Home

Junior Librarian.net User Guide

Contents

1. Barcodes Junior Librarian Data Tidy Click on UNS AND Settings and amp gt 1747 574 GILMAND ND THE then Tutor Groups Reservations gt 1748 574 CARTER G Q iso sra waters Current Loans Past Loans E Dacaruatinne rsi sr cuisoum ys he 1753 574 ASIMOV gt 1754 574 BELLAMY D BOTANIC MAN e a7cc cna LOW iALINCo A ARMBAAI MAI TLIC AA Delete reservations older than _ Days deletes all reservations that have reached the specified time limit Stop reservations for on shelf resources prohibits books which are on the shelf and available from being reserved By ticking Reprint reservations for resources which already have a reservation slip upon return The librarian is given the option to reprint the last reservation slip printed for that resource aeneral Delete reservations older than 28 Days Stop reservations for on shelf resources Reprint reservations for resources which alreadyhave a reservation slip upon return Reservation restrictions are discussed in Chapter 6 Restrictions Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 46 Chapter 3 Settings m Is Reviews Your borrowers can make reviews of the resources they take out on loan using My Books You can create a more structured way for the borrowers to write their reviews by creating your own questions for them to answer From the menu bar at the top of the screen
2. ccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 75 Contents iii HOW do edit atloOr Plan TECOM es a 77 How do I delete a floor plan record c s 2 c2e3 ced dered eld eee ee 79 How do export a floor plan image ccccseccceeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeaeeeseeeeseeeesseseeeeseeeseeenseesaeeess 80 PRCCITIG I ORO WES tact cece gamete tees see A 82 How do create a new tutor group cccceeccceeecceeccenceceeeceececeueeceeecsueeseueseeessuseseeessaeens 82 How do add my borrowers manually ccccccceeecceeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseesseeeseeeseeeseeesaeeees 83 How do I add a photograph Of a borrower ceccceeccsececeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeaeeseeeeaeeesaeeeaeees 84 How do import my borrowers using the school s administration system c ceeeees 84 How do import my student file into Junior Librarian net ccccecccseeeceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeens 92 How do manually move my borrowers to their NEW QrOUPS ccceecceeeceeeceeeeeeeaeeeaees 95 Whatil Nave mixed Var GrOUNS Zoossiss warner a oda alsa weather G 96 What other information is stored on a borrower s record ccccceecceeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeesaeeaeeees 96 USL FIG US ican sca utaeateccunacsaeseceeyeunaauecteneeycaumauestiutnee suman savadeunes y anuinscuniteaneeasaucanuadeueaneaeangae 98 How do create My OWN custom fIEIGS eee ceeccceeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeseaeeseeeeseeeseeetaneess 98 Chapter o sor 0 F Rear e
3. How do I catalogue a Document From the New Resource screen click on the Pe mert icon The resource screen will appear immediately for this document as you do not need to barcode the document and physically store it in your library as it will be stored on the database itself This allows Word Excel and PDF files to be uploaded to the system Type in the document details here To add the document first iis sn click Browse and esi Lem browse to the Suad document Then click Update to i update the record Taa Uae pant Delete with that document Add Edt Oelie J Sav Ciria Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 60 o Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S How do I catalogue a picture From the New Resource screen click on the Picture ICON Once the resource record screen appears click in each field in which you wish to add information There are drop down arrows next to most fields on the screen Clicking these means you can select from a list of previously entered information Click Save when you ve finished Click the drop down arrow to see a list of keywords You can Click Browse to jump to a specific browse to word by typing in the where the start of the word picture is stored a _ Update Expor Deiere Click Save ia ay a when you have finished How do I catalogue a website From the New Resou
4. Click on Settings and then Restrictions a 3 a r m D 5 Statement Renews 99494444994 Fiction Aden R ARABEL AND MOR Fiction Afen L MY AUNTS A BALL Click on the Borrower tab at the top of the screen Select the borrower restriction group that you want to add a resource type restriction to e g Borrowers and then click Edit X Genea Borrowers Resources Select the restriction group and then click Edit System Default Normal v Available Restrictions _sOfrowers Normal Add Edit Delete et P 3 Save Close Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 120 Chapter 6 Restrictions mis Under the Resource Type Restrictions table you ll see that there is nothing listed initially To add a resource type restriction click the Add option Description Maximum Allowance Loan Period Click Add to adda Maximum Reservatons Borrowers 3 3 14 Resource Type Restrictions Criteria resource type IREOALCEADA restriction to this borrower restriction group O00 Allowance Loan Period Reservations Page 1 of O 0 items Save Close Shows the standard borrower restrictions for this restriction group Click the drop down arrow in the Resource Type box and select Film Click the drop down arrow in the Criteria box and select Video Fill in the allowances and then click Save Resource
5. Choose from five different themes that affect the icons used throughout the interface Background Choose from eight different backgrounds to change the main image displayed behind the book interface Click OK to save Change the Language language used lt LA any changes throughout the Sis made or click Junior Classic AN o Cancel to interface discard the currently changes and return to the book interface unavailable More features are available here if a user of Librarian Only has logged in before clicking on Settings Enable or Librarian Options Enable or dias iraries 77 Enable Other Libraries ee tab appearing Unlock Circulate module from on the home being unlocked page This when the plugin setting affects is not installed any user of the system Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 19 Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net m Is The Beach Scene The student may click on Login to log into their account Enter your Search Criteria in here to quick search through your resources Click on Search to search through the library catalogue Click on Borrow Return to issue and return books to one student at a time Click on the newspaper to display News and the books to display Top Ten Click on My Books to see the books you have
6. Use the arrow buttons left right to scroll through Click here to Click here to Click here to you ve reserved sort the search export the generate a the shelves of requires login results ina search results printable list of the the search specific order as a CSV file search results results Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 16 Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net m Is My Stuff The My Stuff icon is disabled until the user logs on Click on the Log On button to be taken to the logon screen where the user must enter the user name and password before they are given access to their personal area of the system Alternatively the user may place their finger on the IdentiKit fingerprint scanner and be logged in if the hardware is installed and available These credentials must first be set by the Librarian in Management manually or alternatively the user will be automatically logged in if they have been successfully linked with Active Directory More information on setting up borrower user names and accounts can be found in Chapter 3 Settings Password Manager and Chapter 12 Security Once the user has successfully logged in the My Stuff icon will be enabled The user may now see their Current and Past loans write a Review for resources they have borrowed and Reserve resources that they would like to borrow Reviews From the home page click on Revie
7. General I Options General Options All Groups Borrower Use these options U Selected Grol to choose oon whether you wish to print a few E No Formatting Selected Groups C Include Photograph or All Groups Custom School Name System Default Custom School Name Generate Close Generate Close lt is within the Options tab in the Card Print screen that customisation of the library cards is available Below is a list of available formatting options Borrower Drop down 000 this defines how many digits you would like the barcode to be l e borrower 1 in this instance will show as 001 No Formatting greys out the above option giving no formatting to borrower barcodes Include Photograph will include the pupil s photograph on each card if entered on the system System Default keeps the school name as the default entered when you register this product Custom School Name enter your own customer school name in the box below Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 249 WW Chapter 17 Label Print m iS Once all details are as you would like them to be click Generate to generate the library cards Click on the Print button to print the cards 166 Jordan Wells ler _Robin test user Carol Chadwick 131 Mm 397 205 233 Leanne Stafford Louise
8. B G gt 1 145 th RD amp 244 A Sign Click on the Print button to print the labels Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No O0 Magnum Landscape Simpsons The Simpsons Tempest Tempest Tempest Magnum Photographers Groening Matt Book Level 0 Book Level 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No O0 And That s When It Fell offi Startled by His Furry Shorts Startled by His Furry Shorts 1 December 1955 Rosa Park 1 December 1955 Rosa Park Book Level 0 Book Level 0 Book Level 0 Rennison Louise Rennison Louise Rennison Louise Steele Philip Steele Philip Book Level 0 Book Level 0 0 Book Level 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 100 Best Album Covers 100 Famous Paintings 100 Great Leaders 100 Greatest Disasters 100 Greatest Medical Discove Book Level 0 Book Level Quiz No 0 Thorgerson Storm Vaizey Marina Mooney Brian Pollard Michael Royston Angela Book Level 0 Book Level 0 Book Level 0 Book Level 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 100 Greatest Natural Wonder 100 Ideas for Teaching Citizer 100 Most Beautiful Cities ofth 100 Most Beautiful National P 100 Ways to Take Better Lanc Book Level 0
9. Cranfield Ingrid Davies lan Benthues Anne Leier Dr Manfred Edwardes Guy Book Level 0 Book Level 0 Book Level 0 Book Level 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No O0 100 Ways to Take Better Phoi 100 Wonders of the World 1000 Great Lives 1000 Makers of the Millennium 1000 Signs Book Level 0 Busselle Michael Benthues Anne Law Jonathan Martin Linda Mustienes Carlos Ed Book Level 0 Book Level 0 0 Book Level 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 1000 Things You Should Kno 1000 Things You Should Know 1000 Years of Famous People 101 Drama Games for Childre 101 Poems Against War Book Level Book Level 0 Farndon John Farndon John Rooyackers Paul Motion Andrew Book Level 0 Book Level 0 Book Level 0 Book Level 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 Quiz No 0 101 Poems by 101 Women 101 School Assembley Stories 1066 A Decisive Battle 1066 A Decisive Battle 1066 Country Tames Richard Book Level 0 Greer Germaine Carr Frank Tames Richard Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 254 Chapter 17 Label Print ay Depending on whether Label Print is accessed from the wes screen or the screen the label print templates differ This is an example of Label Prin
10. Only once a written review has been approved within Grown Ups is it available for the rest of the students to view discussed in greater detail in Chapter 10 Reviews Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 241 WW Chapter 15 Silverlight Home Page m iS Floor Plan The Floor Plan button ae Show me where it is shows where the resource is located Location Angry White Pyjamas How do borrowers use quick search Simply type in the desired search criteria into the Search box Once entered either click on the magnifying glass or press enter on your keyboard To clear the search click on the white X within the red circle Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 242 WW Chapter 15 Silverlight Home Page mM iS How do borrowers use advanced search The Search facility is quick and simple to use Simply click on the Search link displayed on the Home page Use the Picture search facility to search under topics which are illustrated in picture form For example Food and Drink The A to Z search facility allows you to search for all Resources in an alphabetical order A Z Distinguish the search between Author Title Series and Genre Then simply click on the letter of the alphabet that you wish to search by For example All Authors beginning with the letter V Use the Views search to search by particular Page Views These Page Views are created by your librarian
11. For example If you search for the number 1 it won t return a match for 21 just because it has a 1 in it All other fields are searched on an Including basis This means that when a search is done it will return matches for part of the word For example If you search for the word plane it will return matches for any words which include plane i e planets aeroplane Tip If you just want to find the word plane you can use quotes with spaces around the word e g plane Please see Quotes below for more information Refining a search using symbols You can refine your Quick Search by using the following symbols Quotes Using these enables you to search for the whole of the text between the quotes Without quotes each individual word is searched regardless of whether they appear together or not Example search with quotes lf you want to find resources which have the words Planet Earth together type in the Quick Search box Planet Earth and then click Go As you can see from the screenshot below the search has brought up 6 resources where the words Planet and Earth appear together Ta Resme es ra Barcas s l Type Planet Ape Earth here and then click Go Ciia Lowe ron Laane TA Porr etm EE T puos Resens Page Vione O amp Sja et Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 224 WW Chapter 14 Viewing Librar
12. To continue click Next Once the installation has completed click Finish You may be prompted to restart your computer t InstallAware Wizard Te Completing the InstallAware Wizard for MLS Hardware Support Setup You have successfully completed the Installware Wizard for MLS Hardware Support Setup lt Back Cancel Please Note This installer automatically adds microlibrarian net to your Internet Explorer Trusted sites Please ensure that there are no Group Policy Settings on the Domain Controller which could override the changes you have just made Please also ensure that your Proxy Server is not blocking the Junior Librarian net Hosted URL lf you are unsure of any of the above please ask your IT Technician Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 10 a Chapter 1 Getting Started m Is Installing the AD Plugin for use with Active Directory Linking lf your Junior Librarian net Hosted software is linked with Active Directory i e borrowers are automatically logged into Junior Librarian net Hosted when you log into the computer you will be prompted to install an AD Plugin when you enter the site To install the AD Plugin ensure you are logged into the computer as an administrator before clicking on the relevant link below and following the on screen instructions Thes site requires the installation of the AD plugin to a ou will be forwarded momentamnly to your site If you do not
13. j 4 4 tp 44 REES ic Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 131 Chapter 6 Restrictions m Is How do force a return date for resources If you would like all of your resources to be returned by a set date for example before the summer holidays begin you can set a return date in the calendar Select the arrow at the end of the Set tab and select Force Return Find the date you d like to set as your return date and then click it with your mouse The date will then show in Red Click Apply to save the settings All normal issues will not go beyond the date specified until that date is passed unless you use a Manual Loan How do add notes If you would like to add a day note select the arrow at the end of the Set tab and select Note Click on the day you d like to make the note The window will then change and display a personal and public note pad Type your message into the various areas depending on the type of note you wish to leave Personal Note These notes are displayed only for the person who created the note Public Note These notes are displayed for all users who have access to Grown Ups Click Update to add the note this will take you back to the main calendar screen Click apply when you have finished editing the calendar x Type your public note in here This will be displayed for all users who have access to Grown Ups Type
14. Appearance is where you can change the font settings and select a default search field to show when you are in the view for example Title In the appearance tab you can also add an icon relevant to the information which will show in the view have chosen the DVD icon which belongs to the General category because the view have set up shows all of the DVD s in the catalogue Once you are happy with the settings click Save Please Note The icon which you prefer may be located in any of the categories so we recommend you browse them all until you find the one you want A Cha nge the fo nt Description OVD s Category General v settings here Layout Select which search field you d like to appear first when you make an advanced search of the view For more information on searching see Chapter 14 Record Selection Appearance Font Aria v Topin Records Default Search Field Keywords medium Font Previas Select an icon category here The icons which belong to that category will appear in the box where you can choose which one you d like Available Icons MAAT es UP LA 4 mile ts kd 2 aly ves 7 TO EEE aQ Save Close The view you have created will now be listed on the main Page Views screen If you want the view to be the default view i e the one you always see when you access Resources highlight the view and then click on the Default t
15. Click on Show 010149 Fiction Burgess Melvin ooesss FI 2a Bal 007379 323 092 Steele Philip 00214 354 Kennedy Ludowe onm Fic Henry O 006628 937 Macdonald Fiona 009231 769 09 Bailey Steve 006784 749 32 Fiell Charlotte ooms 58 Sir laton Glen 007579 968 064 Malam John cova Fic Finnis A Editor 003531 297 Poms 90962 000191 20982 0010 309 62 Powa 909 82 000151 909 62 006311 331 13 001064 973 006249 385 3 Macdonald Fiona 009241 628 914 Bransford Sandy ocesen 821 0n 745 4 009249 9739 Preston Daniel 000117 909 82 Adams Simon lt Macdonald Fiona Hills Ken Sharman Margaret Hills Ken Campling Elizabeth Hayek F A Steedman Scott Andrew Sarah Editor MecDernnott Catherine Tames Richard Lawrence Amos Anget For May An Unjartanged Mariage 1 December 1955 Rosa Parks and her Protest for 10 Rillington Place 100 Selected Stories 100 Things you should know about Ancient Rome 100 Years of Physical Education 1699 1999 1000 Chairs 101 Cool Science Expenrments 11 February 1990 The Release of Nelson Mandela 13 Again 16Th Century Mosque 1910 The 1S The 1940s The 1950 s The 1970 s 1980 s Unemployment and the Unions 19th Century Frontier Fort 19th Century Ralway Station 2001 a Joke Odyssey 2001 A Postry Odyssey 20th Century Design 20th Century Unded States History 20th Century a visual history Version 11 4 Page 1 of 303
16. Detale Advanced Loss Reservations Summary Photograph Linked liens Float Plan rite Harry Potter and the Order of the Phoenix Recycled Date filled in with today s jae D hidoya date You can change a pens z this if you wish Click the drop down meteor Magic arrow to see a list of 14 39 keywords You can Click Save when you have finished jump to a specific word by typing in the start of the word Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 56 en Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S How do I catalogue hardware You may want to catalogue your hardware e g mobile phones projectors cameras laptops etc From the New Resource screen click on the S Icon oe Hardware Follow the instructions at the beginning of this section on how to enter the resource s barcode Please note that with items other than Books you are not required to enter an ISBN number Once the resource record screen appears click in each field in which you wish to add information There are drop down arrows next to most fields on the screen Clicking these means you can select from a list of previously entered information Click Save when you ve finished x The Date Added field will automatically be filled in with today s date You can change this if you wish Dotad Advanced Loare Reservations Summary Photograph Linked items Date Added 20 02 2008 Recycled Date Enter the resource details by filling in the
17. For each table select what permissions you d like x Expand the Database lt baad Junior Librarian net User Guide E Audit Log O Machine Name a Notes f Recycled a Table Sm Time stamp T User Name ce y Borrowers ao Classifications ce Class Colour Code oA d Current Description Staff Commands Loans Version 11 4 M Visible in Advanced Search table and highlight the search criteria below Choose whether or not you want this option to be made available in Advanced Search for this user 202 Chapter 12 Security mis When you are happy with the permission settings for Grown Ups click on the Commands tab The Commands tab is where you can choose which areas of Junior Librarian net you want people in this security group to have access to Once you have finished choosing the permissions both on the Database and Commands tab click Save Description Staff Database Commands Circulate i v i Help V Allowed to repay fines Ji Allowed to reserve items V Allowed to return book v v Allowed to delete reservations Allowed to issue Allowed to renew Allowed to view details Allowed to view identification Allowed to waive fines Download Error Loa Save A Close How do I change a security group s permissions For each area select what functionality you would like to give to that group
18. Size x Tg Jv the Image IS stored clicked on the text the box will become highlighted Overdue Reminder 1 Reminder for Forename Surname of Group Name Year Year Group 8 The wording or format can be Dear Forename Click Save when changed as with The item s listed below is are now overdue you have finished any word J processor until Please return it them to the Library as soon as possible you are happy 3 with the result m Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 137 Chapter 7 Loans mis How do change the columns included in the grid in reminders Click on the Grid tab at the top of the Edit Reminders screen The screen looks similar to when you are creating or editing a Page View Under Preview you ll see which columns have already been used To add or remove any columns fields use the two boxes at the top of the page The left hand box lists the available fields and the right hand box lists the fields which will appear in the reminder To select a new field to be included in the reminder highlight it from the list in the box on the left and then use the icon to move it into the right hand box To move a field back because you no longer want it to appear on the reminder select it from the right hand box and then click the To change where the field appears within the grid use the Icon When you have finished editing the reminder click Save Select the
19. Version 11 4 WEI gt S JATION WORLD ANIMAL STORIES Above are suggested keywords you may wish to add to your original Animals search 22 mis Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net My Books After clicking on My Books the student will be asked to log in using either their Barcode or Username Alternatively the user may place their finger on the IdentiKit fingerprint scanner and be logged in if the hardware is installed and available Morelia Barcode Username Please enter your barcode number to login Once in My Books the student will have the ability to see their Current and Past loans They will also be able to Review resources they have borrowed and Reserve resources that they would like to borrow Bo um ben User ANDY O BRIEN Harry Potter amp Harry Potter amp Harry Potter And Oxford Print All The Goblet Of F The Philosopher The Prisoner Mathematics Place any items you wish to Reserve into this chest Click on All to see all books Current to see books currently on loan Click on My Stuff to and Past to see view resources past loans dragged into the chest on the Search page My Books holds all of your Current Loans and Past Loans Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 23 mi Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net Reviews When the student clicks on Reviews on the signpost they will be prompted to
20. od Chapter 3 Settings m S Type a description for the mask you are creating and then choose the barcode type from the Type drop down menu Look at the barcode you want to set up a mask for An example of a barcode could be 1234 As this consists of just numeric characters type 4 hashes in the Mask field Click OK when you have finished Type a Sescription MLS 7 Digit OK i Select the type description for Type Rescue r of barcode here the mask here Mask seeeeee e g Resource Modification Mask or Borrower Return the Value Definition Help The system uses barcode masks to identify the barcodes as and when they are scanned T ype the symbols The Mask provides a format definition for each individual barcode whilst the i modification mask tells the system if and how you want to format the which co rrespond incoming barcodes to the barcode here The Mask itself should be made up of Letters Digits and any of the following character placeholders 2 Numeric Alphabetic 7 Any The Modification Mask can be made up of any Letter Digit or any of the following placeholders 7 Any Character Remove Character If you have resource barcodes which consist of more numeric characters than the masks you have created repeat the above instructions For example as well as a barcode of 1234 you could also have 12345 In this case the mask would be F How do
21. Click save when you have finished Please Note Any global restrictions you ve set will be ignored when the resource is issued if you set and lock an individual restriction Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 126 Nyi Chapter 6 Restrictions m S Restrictions example tables The tables below give examples of different restriction scenarios to help you understand how the restrictions in Junior Librarian net work The key tells you what each restriction setting is Key BRG Borrower Restriction Group RTR Resource Type Restriction GRR Global Resource Restriction IRR Individual Resource Record N A This restriction setting hasn t been chosen or isn t applicable Example 1 You have created a Borrower Restriction Group called Borrowers A borrower who has been assigned to this restriction group wants to take out any resource from the catalogue The loan period given is 14 days which has been taken from the Borrower Restriction Group setting Loan Period Restriction Restrictions BRG RTR GRR IRR Given Setting Used Maximum Allowance 3 B A BLA MA 14 BRG Maximum Reservations J M A BIA BIA Loan Period 14 M A BAA MJA Example 2 You have created a Borrower Restriction Group and have added a Resource Type Restriction for your Books which have a media type of Paperback A borrower who has been assigned to this restriction group wants to take out a Paperback Book The loan period
22. For example You may want to conduct a search of your resources to find all books which have both a keyword of magic and wizard Under the Boolean drop down menu select And Boolean In the Field box click the blue box and select Keywords from the list tt Boolean Field And Keywords Pll Westar i O Under the Operator field click the drop down arrow and select Equal to By selecting Equal to you are saying that you only want to search for the exact word you specify and not any words which include that word Please note the Is Boolean Field Operator Empty field This is useful if you want to And Keywords E Equal to by find items where Equal to Field Table OPE ass than the Location is Greater than empty for example Including Beginning wit Not equal to Add Not less than Not greater than ev Not including Not beginning with Wat aO ds Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 227 Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data mM is In the Value box type magic Boolean Operator Value And Keywords J Equal to v Magid Field Table Operator Value Boolean Operator The search And Keyword Slew A criteria appears here after you click Add Field Table Operator Value Keywords Resources Equal to Magic 9 gt Repeat the above instructions but type the word wizard in the Value box You ll see both search criteria is now detailed i
23. For more information on how Schedule works see Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net section on Schedule Once you ve chosen which fields you d like to update from Discovery Online you have two options as to when your records next get updated You can either schedule the update to be run the next day or schedule it to be run straight away Scheduling the Discovery Online update for the next day Once you have entered the Discovery Online settings click Schedule The task will be added to the Schedule The system will then allocate a time between 6pm and 6am for the task to run The time is automatically allocated by MLS and shouldn t be changed unless instructed to do so Please contact the helpdesk on 0161 449 9357 if you are unsure Scheduling the Discovery Online update to be run straight away When choosing which fields you d like Discovery Online to update tick the Force schedule to run on save option at the bottom of the Discovery Online settings screen and then click Schedule The Discovery Online task will then be added to the Schedule and will run within 60 seconds Once the update is complete the Discovery Online task will next run at the allocated time set by MLS see above How do update my whole catalogue If you want Discovery Online to update all of your resources instead of just 200 tick the Force complete update option on the Discovery Online settings screen Depending on whether you ve set the task to run str
24. HARRY POTTER amp THE GOBLET OF FIRE Rowling J K Fiction http HARRY POTTER amp THE GOBLET OF FIRE Rowling J K Fiction http Harry Potter lexicon http www hp lexicon org ir HARRY POTTER amp THE PHILOSOPHER S STONE Rowling J K 005 http HARRY POTTER AND THE PRISONER OF AZKABAN Rowling J K Fiction http Harry Potter companion http www factmonster cor Lists the resources which are linked to this one Author Class URL Harry Potter http www storiesfromthew iil a QOVe _O Page 1 of 1 9 records Enter Your Linked Items coca aa Find Resource Remo i e 0000 D C Book of the Week Floor Plan Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 70 Ww Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S The Floor Plan tab allows you to specify the location of the resource on a floor plan image Barcode 11 Tithe T4 Detads Advanced Loans Reservations Summa Photogach Lrkedlisms Fox Pian Floor Plan New Library X For more information on floor plans please see the Floor Plan section below Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 71 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S Floor Plan How do create a floor plan image Using a paint package e g Paint Shop Pro draw a simple floor plan of your library We recommend the size of 630 x 400 pixels A number of users have given this as a
25. Import oi F Books with Quizzes Expot N Va English Poetry gt Fiction ovo Use this facilty to create alternative views of the data CY you are currently viewing You can change the fields colours and fonts amongst other things Close Please Note The screenshot above shows the views which have already been created under System Page Views These are views which are have been created by MLS and cannot be deleted or edited When you are creating a new view we would recommend that you copy one of the views which have already been set up i e All Resources Doing this means that you don t have to start completely from scratch and you can then edit and customise the copy To copy a view highlight it and then click the Copy icon on the right of the screen Type in a description for the view copy you are creating relevant to what will be shown in that view In the screen below the description is DVD s because am creating a view which will show all the DVD s in my catalogue From the Category field select which category you d like the new view to be listed in Enquiry means the view information will be seen in Enquiry and General means the view is just a general view which can only be viewed in Grown Ups When you are happy with the category and description click Copy Select a New Description DVD s category for the view Typea description for Category General v7 the new view Click
26. Insert Fields Date Time Insert Field Logon Name Borrowers v Insert Date Insert Time 265 320 2 Msg Type any additional text in here Information on text message length Note SMS messages may exceed stated message size due to replacement of fields with actual values Do the same for all other Reminders Reminder2 Reminder3 Reminder4 Before setting up the SMS Scheduled Task ensure that your Reminders Scheduled Task and Statements Scheduled Task are set up correctly For further information see the Schedule section in Chapter 11 Customizing Junior Librarian net To set up the SMS Scheduled Task go to Schedule SMS tick the SMS Reminders box and the Run Now box if required Click Schedule Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 288 Chapter 19 Third Party Products m Is Options SMS Reminders Scheduling this task processes all the SMS messages in the the SMS log for you This will send out SMS messages according to preferences set in the module settings Run Now i Once scheduled SMS Reminders will show as a scheduled task within the Schedule View Tasks page Database Schedule Modules Tools Security Settings Help Damase INPS i77 a To Description Last Run Next Run Status Message Resources 3R News Book of the Week 02 03 2010 09 11 09 03 2010 08 00 Te House Keeping 03 03 2010 07 48 04 03 2010 00 00 amp News New Resources 03 03 2010 08 00 04 03 2010 0
27. Repeat this for each field you wish to apply Data Tidy settings to Click Close when you have finished When you have clicked Close any future records which are added to the database will have the Data Tidy settings applied to them when the Save option is clicked If there is a tick in Do Not Tidy Use the drop down arrow to select the field you would like to apply Data Tidy settings to X take this out Field Author v Upbons Cl Do not tidy OO All upper case Click here to activate Data cleanse replacements and Data cleanse remove Click Close when you have finished 2 Close All lower case Select the Data First character in upper case i First character in each word in upper case Tidy settings om you require for Move The to end of line the field V Move An to end of line F Move A to end of line V Add correct spacing after punctuation s 7 Apply data cleanse replacements Y Apply data cleanse removals For more information on Data Tidy please see Chapter 13 Tidying Data Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 38 Chapter 3 Settings m i S Fields You may find when adding your resources borrowers or tutor groups that a particular field isn t available for you to add information to In this case you can create your own Custom Fields How do I create my own custom fields From the menu bar at the top of the screen
28. S Mew Sorrower Hartede Allucation 5 PR Lists the borrowers in l Managment System I Eclipse net whose surname If the borrower is already RAASTA begins with the same 2 letters e it ty Sorrowe m eee pai ie E as the borrower you are to match them from the Tone importing list GRAHAM Dorel 1 GRAY Amante LPS GREAVES Donne Sis TL GREEN Cathenne 10408 GREEN lee pape Click Import when you GREEN Leit TTL are ready to import the DOQ Pape d of 3 26 itens borrower a ee I i WUUY eo ate Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 212 Chapter 12 Security mis If you are happy with the details in the Intake screen you can click Transfer under the Records tab on the right of the screen This will import everyone who is listed in Intake into the Junior Librarian net borrower database along with the details you specified in the Directory Services screen Click Transfer to transfer all records into the borrower database 2 Done S Local rtranet Once you have clicked Transfer select how you would like barcodes to be allocated to your new borrowers Click Transfer to transfer the records A Select how you would Timia like the barcodes to be Ciki Transfer to move al borrowers in the allocated to the new niake databace ta the borrower datahare Please palec how you would ike bercodes borrowers ah coted le gt Aiton atic Click Transfer to transfer Ly Nana
29. Brogden Brogden Sandham Hitchen Chippendale Cronshaw Shezad Jones Mahmood Warren Farooq Yates Johnston Staffa Furlonger Usman Eastwood Bottomley Bell Slater Slater Shah Parveen Park RT Forename Farzana 8ANR Tyler 8WNL Andrew 7GLR Elizabeth 8BTL Nik TJRR Andy STAFF Andy STAFF Andy STAFF Andy STAFF Andy STAFF Andy STAFF Michael 8TRL Leanne 7PGL Gavin 8ANR Samuel TJRR Stacey 8WNL Lee 8TRL Lee 8TRL James 9GYL Joseph 8DYL Ben 8TRL Christopher 7BNL Amar TWTL Rachel 8ANR Qaser 8TRL Melanie 7FRR Umer 8BTL Emma 8JJR Tyler 8WNL Jenna 8JJR Nicholas STAFF Mohammed 8BTL Mark 7FRR Michael BWNL Christopher ICNR Scott 7COL Scott 7COL Ahlam 8BTL Saiga 8DER Sarah TJRR Page 1 of 178 7097 records Group Name PF Search Advanced Search News 3 Flagging JV Trusted sites Protected Mode Off 100 Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 Icon under Highlight the record you d like to delete and then click on Delete 148 Ww Chapter 8 Reservations m S Chapter 8 Reservations This chapter will explain how reservations work in Junior Librarian net and how to manage and view them The Making Reservations section tells you how reservations work and how your borrowers can reserve resources The Managing Reservations section explains how to view your reservations and how to delete them if the reservation is no longer needed Making Re
30. J POL ee ee ee THE JUNIOR TIMES OUTCAST BECOMES BOOK OF E THE WEEK He s alone cut off uncovers a even from Wolf deception too awful and Renn Hunted to contemplate and on the run he one that shakes takes refuge in him to the core and unknown territory shatters his world the haunted reedbeds of Lake Axehead where he is menaced by the Hidden People The dreadful secret that Torak carries with him at the Other threats lurk close of SOUL i Spain ed nearby and his Is reveale battle with the Paha be IS mes a Soul Eaters is far rom the clans Its from over As he his fourteenth fights for his life summer Torak Features 2 BEC Literacy level claim misleading How do I update and view Other News Items Within the Grown Ups screen click on Database News Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis Database Schedule Modules Resources Borrowers a Tutor Groups Current Loans 2317 Fiction I Past Loans 5368 Fiction All current news items will be listed on the screen To create a new news item click l alternatively to edit a current news item highlight the item you wish to edit and click Edt The below News window allows you to edit the format of your news article x Specify start Details and end date Title of article BBC Literacy level claim misleading validity h
31. Log into Junior Librarian net Grown Ups and click on News within the Tools menu bar A Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited Schedule Modules Tools Se Cunity setings Hi ae Flagging a import LIFE ON THE SE Click on News to open up settings for New Resources Quick Replace Add Hesrerords gt 1745 574 gt i747 574 gt 1748 574 WILDLIFE Book of the When WILDLIFE IN TOV 1750 574 WILDLIFE OF WC 1751 5m4 BIOLOGY Current Loans pm L 1753 5 4 ASIMOVI is there life on oth There are three different tabs within the News window The first of the three New Resources simply allows you to choose which resource types you would like your new resources to be taken from If you simply leave the resource type of Book selected only new books will be shown However if you tick Film as well then new books and films will be shown As default only the resource type of Book is selected This is to avoid students missing out on new books by clogging up the New Resources screen with new Websites for example which they cannot take out of the library Another setting on this tab is the number of items you would like to show in the New Resources news item 10 is the default and recommended seiting New Resources Book of the Week Top Ten Enter the number of ne items to be shown in Please enter the number
32. P Gizmo The mi SS Reviens 78 P W09 Fiction Gaiman Nel The Day Swapped My Oad For Two Goldfish 2071 Pageviews 28 2007 Fiction Ridoy Phiip ZpS Apollo 20812 l Z More 29 42 Fiction Stins RL Deep Trouble 2 Goosebumps D62 29 46 Faction Stine AL Revenge C The Garden Gnomes Goosszumps 2064 3 75 Fiction Ure Jean Captan Cranko And The Cry Baby 20323 3 7505 Fiction Peters Andrew Fusek Ed And Tre River OF The Damned D5 4484 Fiction Stine RL Haunted School The Gooseburnes aneas bone Sd Loc LS Moverter 2007 Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 Defaut Click Select to show impot the highlighted view 273 Chapter 19 Third Party Products How do print out Accelerated Reader labels mis From the Resources screen click on More under the Page Views tab on the right of the screen Highlight and select the Books with Quizzes view from the list of page views This will bring up all of the books in your catalogue which have Accelerated Reader quizzes Click on the Modules menu along the top of the Resources screen Then Label Print Labels In the Label Style box make sure that Avery Mini Labels L7651 is selected From the list of label types highlight Renaissance Learning and then click on Run Select Avery Mini Laser Labels Highlight Renaissance Learning Avygry Mini Laser Labels L7651 oo Renaissance Learning Run Opti
33. Restriction is also ignored Therefore the loan period is whichever is lowest between the Resource Type Restriction and the Individual Resource Restriction Loan Period Restriction Restrictions BRG RTR GRR IRR Given Setting Used Maximum Allowance 4 4 heey BJA Bi IRF Maximum Reservations J J 3 a Loan Period 2 E 2 G Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 130 Chapter 6 Restrictions m S Calendar How do I mark weekends and closed days There will be times when the library is closed due to school holidays and weekends Within Junior Librarian net there is a calendar which enables you to mark these days so that your loan periods are adjusted accordingly For example if you marked all of your weekends as closed and a resource was due back on a Saturday perhaps because of a bank holiday the system would adjust and increase the loan period so that the resource was due back the following Monday To access the calendar click Tools on the menu bar at the top of the screen and then select Calendar B NN aan var paika ig iao A Sirs Database Schedule Modules TOO Secunty Setin wb Flagging gt a SOLE f rr Cer ae ee AP Export Title 1745 574 Add Keywords Paci gt 1747 574 1 nn sme nex WILOLIF Quick Replace life on th 6g gt 1748 574 mawe WILOLIF Select Tools and iiam then Calendar from Tutor Groups 1750 574 Calendar WILDLIF 3 p are the menu bar 2 1751 574 BIOLOS Current Lo
34. borrowed reserved and reviewed Click on Grown Ups to get to Multi Return Grown Ups Multi Issue and Read IT CTL Click on Reviews to write a descriptive review of a book you have borrowed The returns trolley lists resources that have recently been returned to the library Click on the help icon to view ways in getting support The search cloud shows most recent popular search terms Clever Polly And The Stupid Wolf Storr C red Uncanny s Jennings P a ee Click here to adjust interface Caan settings What other people are searching What s been returned New reviews are listed here Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 20 i WwW Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net m S Turning off Animation to Increase Speed Turning off the animation on the home page may increase the speed of the system Click on the bottom right hand corner of the Home Page as detailed in the image above to move the page across and display the Animations button Click the switch to change Animations from On to Off ANIMATIONS ANIMATIONS Please note if you are experiencing any speed issues please turn animations off before you contact the helpdesk for assistance Borrow amp Return Borrow amp Return allows for students to borrow or return books one at a time one pupil at a time This may be accessed by both the teacher librarian an
35. from the list that you want to view User reports Lg Card Print 1 QZ Card Print 2 Delete a B aii reports 10 Most Popular Books by Gender gt 10 Most Popular Books by Year Gro x 100 Least Popular Books by Owner 100 Most Popular Books by Locatio ae 100 Most Popular Books by Year Sas Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 246 WY Chapter 16 Reports m Is Specify a date range for your report enter your start date and then click on Run to enter your end date Parameters Enter a Start Date and End Date for the report Start Date 09 09 2008 End Date 91 04 2009 Shown below is an example of the report 10 Most Popular Books by Gender from 08 09 2008 to 20 04 2009 Click on the Print button to by Gender print this report wt Description This report lists the top 10 most popular ar a specified date range by gender librarian Date From 08 09 2008 23 00 00 to 20 04 2009 23 00 00 Gender Title ota Male HARRY POTTER amp THE GOBLET OF FIRE 49 HARRY POTTER AND THE PRISONER OF AZKABAN HARRY POTTER amp THE PHILOSOPHER S STONE WHERE THE WILD THINGS ARE HARRY POTTER amp THE GOBLET OF FIRE CLAY MR PERFECT BEST FRIENDS PLEASE MRS BUTLER VERSES HARRY POTTER AND THE PRISONER OF AZKABAN Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 247 WU Chapter 17 Label Print mMm iS Chapter 17 Label Print This chapter explains how to use Label Print The Technica
36. over which the days here top ten should be calculated Please choose a resource type from the options below Select the resource types Audio from this list Book Film Generic Select AIl Hardware Musical Instrument Picture W Sheet Music FEl I mi i Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 174 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net WwW mis How do update and view my New Resources news item Recently added resources will appear on the below New Resources screen automatically there is no need or way for you to manually update this area scroll over each book to view the book cover and summary if available New resources a eS a y s 3 i Er Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 175 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis How do I update and view my Book of the Week i Click on Resources to view a list of all of your resources Find the resource you wish to mark as Book of the Week You may do this by either typing the Author s name for example into the Quick Search or using the Advanced Search facility Please see the Searching Databases section of Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data for further details on using the search facility Once you have found the resource that you would like to mark as Book of the Week highlight it and click on Edit to open the resource record Barcode 2317 Title Details Advanced Loans Reservatio
37. required fields Click the drop down arrow to see a list of keywords You can jump to a specific word by typing in the start of the word Click Save when you have finished Ye Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 57 e Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S How do I catalogue live media You may want to catalogue live media e g video s images etc From the New Resource screen click on the Icon Live Media Once the resource record screen appears click in each field in which you wish to add information There are drop down arrows next to most fields on the screen Clicking these means you can select from a list of previously entered information Click Save when you ve finished You can also add extra custom fields which are displayed in the Advanced tab See How do create my own custom fields later in this section Please Note When you save the live media record it will transfer the media file to your web server and then re encode the media file into a flash format where it will be compatible for all users who have flash installed If you get any problems saving your live media record it will most likely be because you don t have the required software on your web server to read the media file To test this you will need to try and play the media file directly from your web server If you have any problems at all please contact the helpdesk Enter the resource details a by filling in the ea
38. then the tutor group is changed to match that of the administration system thus promoting the pupil up a year assuming the administration data is correct Please Note It s important that you make a backup of your library data before making any global changes to your borrowers Your data is backed up by MLS nightly If you are making any big system changes we would suggest you make them first thing in the morning to avoid any loss of changes made to data between the backup and the system change Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 84 Nyi Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S Sims net If you are using the Sims net system you need to download the Sims net Borrower Import disk from our website www microlib co uk onto your computer s desktop You can find this in the User Area section under the Updates tab Sims NET Borrower Import Program 0 3 ME DOWNLOAD k You then need to put either a floppy disk or a USB memory stick in your machine download on the file and click Open This will download the executable file and run it immediately Once the wizard pops up it will ask where you would like the relevant files extracted to this is where your floppy disk or USB memory stick comes in Simply select the relevant drive letter and the Report Definition file along with instruction document will be saved to the disk memory stick for you The instructions will tell you what you need to do to cre
39. under the Page Views tab in the Resources screen a 4 6 Macmisn P Whal S Mappenaig To Me Paperbect i re gt my 81 gt Woy F Where Did Come From Paperbact meee E Retr ewvere gt Urdu Catical Review Of Twa Fomous Urdu Novels ou amp 1 s5 007 The Making Of Goidenoye J Oas m tyr Ss 1 200 Great Lives Moitock mns has Gaps m ox fy S 1 200 Great Lives adtac lt Cony gt woe I Fes 1000 Greet Lives hatas Gets O i00 Fiction Groves P 10 Garest Paperbace ten eee LD jm Fielo Grove nest Paperhac S hi 2 10078 t roves 10 O set Pagerbact um Past Lean i on t oes 10 Chest Peperbact 5 Pecyate Bin 77 he w O ie 100 Gee stent tweeters feet fO em 100 hee at ent ivast Y im 100 Gow at est kwent i Ma nex 10D Gea atest iront O ren 100 Geastest irant 2 i gt 1 10 siest rvant Rosem 20 100 Gow stent ivanti gt J gt Oos a0 Poisid Mecho 100 Geoatevt Mee herttaa gt o V 100 Gesatest Wonen mestes O own en ecm joasa Panoa 100 Gesiests Marmate Wanders natta 64 M Miingor 100 Queabens And Answers Dores Ang Horses Pagerhact O 1001 Facts About Wild Animais ioe Sj Las rere 7 A Edit ej The Arts New Hi Social Soences Copy r f 4 All Resources Delete y J Psychology amp Philisophy Seles Romans Highlight the Books pe Technology Epon with Quizzes view 3 B System Page View i Aj All Records
40. 03 2009 Es yo u d like the Select when you d like the task to start Tick Run Now if you would like the task to run art Time 04 38 End Date 12 03 2019 End Time 00 00 Description ae Interval Type Day Interval Period 4 Exception Details How do delete a scheduled task Run Now Click Save L when you have A 0go finished Save Clase have task to finish Select the Interval Type using the drop down arrow Select the Interval Period you d like to From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Schedule and then View Tasks Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 184 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net Click Schedule and then View Tasks The Schedule screen will appear which lists all of the tasks you have asked it to run Highlight the task you want to delete and click the Dette icon under the Records tab on the right of the screen Dehli pia al Ai ai Rii ZAGA 03 00 Huse Keapeng Discovery Orile TES GRE TT 3E APL Quiz list impart 01052009 00 00 eee Click the task Eo 2 eet you d like to ewe delete and 2 then click Pasi loina Sei i r Del 7 elete Fa iara iliri Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 185 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net Page Views What is a view mis A View is a screen containing the fields and data of your choice The views bot
41. Barcode DateOfBirth Gender Title Surname Forename TutorGroup YearGroup E b 001 re THE 04 Sep 02 LLI p Fema l ae 2 MIT 55 T Abbit Ter Lyd i qa T1w i AL LLI Notes Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 90 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S If you add the LogonName field to the CSV file Junior Librarian net will automatically try and link the borrower to Active Directory If you also add the Password field this will turn off Active Directory linking If you add the Logon Name field to the CSV file but the borrower s Logon Name isn t their Active Directory Logon Name you can either use the Password field in the CSV file to import passwords from your administration system or simply add one in the Borrower s record in the Advanced tab If you add the DateAdded field to your CSV file this will be the date the borrower was added to your administration system and will be shown on the borrower s record card in Junior Librarian net If no date is entered the date shown on the borrower s record is the date they were added to Junior Librarian net If you add the DateExpires field to your CSV file but don t enter a date the borrower will be placed into the Borrower Recycle Bin 100 years after they are added to Junior Librarian net There must be no double quotes within any of the information entered E g Joe Bill
42. Be careful of how much access you give to a group Remember it is best to keep system administration to the Administrator Account It s possible to change the permissions for each security group For example for the Guest group you may want to have less permissions than the Staff group From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Security and then Group manager Highlight the group from the list that you d like to change the permissions for then click Edit Highlight the group from the list and then click Edit x Description Staff Database Commands EM vucit Log a p M Borrowers Classifications No Access ni Class Colour Code O read YF Current Loans 5 gt Modify gt Custom Catalogue 5 Data Cleanse Replacements O Remove 5 Data Cleanse Remove Ocreate O Delete ki mE O Owner Marc Tags Choose the permissions Select the permission settings that you d like the security group to have Click Save when you ve finished Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 203 Chapter 12 Security m Is How do I change the security group for an individual borrower From the Borrowers screen select the borrower that you d like to change the security group for Once in their record card click on the Advanced tab From the Securi
43. C Browse od When the import is complete existing Junior Librarian net borrowers will automatically 7 Edit be updated to their new groups Any new borrowers will be listed in the Intake screen There are two ways to add your new borrowers to Junior Librarian net If you are want to add them all at once click under the Records tab on the right of the screen If you want to transfer them individually either double click on the record or highlight it and click Transfer The new record will then show The Imported Details tab shows the details for the borrower which have been imported from the student file Under the Choose import method tab select whether the borrower is New to Junior Librarian net or if they are an Existing Borrower If they are an existing borrower there is a list of Junior Librarian net borrowers at the bottom of the screen whose surnames all start with the same first 2 letters of the borrower s surname that you are importing This makes it easier for you to match them If the borrower you are importing isn t listed type in their surname or forename in the Quick Search box and click Go This brings up a list of borrowers for you to make your selection Select how you would like to allocate a barcode to the new borrower we recommend the Automatic option Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 93 a Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S When you are happy with the details click Import Repeat this for each new
44. Column Settings Current Loans nh Barcode Caption Nurmber Title j Issue Date Alignment Loft i s m ay z Period Background Colour i BS Date Due Fine Ret Total Renewals L tesue Time Location Machine Name O Overdue l Recycled M Raminder Menner Y lt 4 Harry Potter And The Prisoner Of Azkaban 1007 2007 14 15 11 2007 2700 Clay 07 11 2006 14 21 11 2006 5440 Incredible Inventions 1605 2007 14 0106 2007 63 Witch S Daughter The 1805 2007 t4 14 11 2007 1 lib 15014 Just In Case 18 05 2007 14 0106 2007 0 Lit gt S eee Refresh Preview Save Close iow Sw Cie Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 195 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis Language How do I change the field names It s possible for you to customise any fields in Junior Librarian net For example you may want to change some of the field names which appear in the Resources or Borrower record card From the menu bar at the top of the screen click the Settings tab and then Language A Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited Database Schedule Modules Database i Resources Borrowers 1747 574 6g 1748 574 Tutor Groups P 1750 574 1751 574 Current Loans 2 1753 574 175 7 Past Loans e 34 314 7 gt 1755 591 Reservations E 1757 582 An Tools a Barcode Class Author GIL MAN D GILMAN D CARTER G W
45. Copy to save the new view Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 187 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis Once you ve clicked Copy the copy will then show in the Page Views screen The view has the correct description however the information it shows is All Resources because that s the view that was initially copied You now need to edit the view so that it shows the information you need i e DVD s Highlight it and then click Edit x General gt Books amp Books Never Borrowed DVD s English Poetry Copy Delete Highlight the Select copied view Default and then click Edit The new copy of the view shows here Import Export eo oe _ gt Fiction Tr Use this facility to create alternative views of the data you are currently viewing You can change the fields colours and fonts amongst other things When you have clicked edit the Page View Edit screen will appear This is where you can customise the view to show the information you require in this case DVD s You ll notice that there are 3 tabs along the top of the screen Layout is where you can choose which fields you d like to appear in the view For example you may just want to see the Title and Author of the resource In the Layout tab you can also change the settings for the columns Simpl
46. Directory details into Junior Librarian net It is possible to import Active Directory details for both existing Junior Librarian net borrowers and people who are only listed in Active Directory For example you may have 300 borrowers in Junior Librarian net who are all linked to Active Directory Your IT technician informs you that they have added 50 more people to Active Directory To save you having to go into Junior Librarian net and add them manually you can import the details from Active Directory From the menu bar at the top of the page click Schedule and then Directory Services Database schedule Modules Tools Security Se Click Directory Services News Directory Services Author Resource Reminders aR Data Tidy Colfer Eoin Accelerated Reader Quiz List WebLinks Import 12 Branzei Sylva External Media Statements Tutor Gro 2 a View Tasks Current Loans ty 23323233 Fiction Singer Nicky iction Rowling J K On the Directory Services screen select which details you would like to import into Junior Librarian net If you want to import the details of people who are not already on Junior Librarian net tick Import new records When you have selected the details you want to import either click Run Now to import the records straight away into the Intake screen or click Schedule By clicking Schedule you are adding the import as a task The default time for the Schedule to run the A
47. EC DING soninn ceseecacezecenianseaenacecemeinanseaunaceauaennaseausaceauaesuansdaunecesuassuarseauseasted 171 What does housekeeping CO lisnnianiirmnenn raed al paeeia atest dicceeel ied eliaidietecas 171 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net cccccccsssesceseecenseeeeseeceneeeenseseeneeseneesens 172 INC WS tea erie rea ate ea ee eee ee ee ee eee ee eee eee 172 Where are my news items displayed ccc ceeccceeeeceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeseueeseeeseeeseueesseesaueeseeeeaes 172 How do modify settings for My NEWS items cccceeccceeeceeeeeeeeeceeesaeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeeaaes 173 How do I update and view my New Resources news item ccscccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaeeeseees 175 How do I update and view my Book of the Week ccccceeccseeeceeeeceeeeeeeseeeeseesaeeesaees 176 How do update and view Other News ItEMS ccccccseeeeecseeeeeaeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeesseeeesaaeees 180 How do update and view my Top Ten Resources eee ceeceeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaees 181 o 67 97 60 B Be ee ene me Re ee CO ee eS er ee ea ee eS er Rar eee See erm mere eer reer ater 182 How does schedule work c cccccececcececcaccceccaceceaccceneaceneaceneacateneaceneaeeneaesuentaneneaseneeanes 182 Contents vi WV INE IS ATASE ete here etiet tic a hs Scoeet eceededied euch aaduebehie escent diee eee iuce 183 How OO edita scheduled task nnunnnnnniinnincen cad bineec beads dade gl ggecddeidiia
48. Friends Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library Go 05 05 2010 13 56 57 gt 2554 Best Friends Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio English De 05 05 2010 13 56 59 GJ 10047 Devil s Toenail The Prue Sally Fiction Audio Library 05 05 2010 13 57 01 GJ 10048 Diamond Girls The Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library 05 05 2010 13 57 04 tJ 10020 Girls In Tears Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library 05 05 2010 13 57 07 GJ 10050 Gruffalo Song And Donaldson Julia 782 74 Audio Library 05 05 2010 13 57 11 gt 15001 Half Moon Investig Colfer Eoin Fiction Audio Library 05 05 2010 13 57 13 ia 10002 Hat Full Of Sky A Pratchett Terry Fiction Audio Library E M 4 1 of 60 gt Pl When a search is done it is done in all three StockCheck screens Checked Items Missing Items and All Items which means that the results shown will vary depending on which screen you are in For example If you are in the Checked Items screen and you do a search for Jacqueline Wilson it will only bring up any Jacqueline Wilson resources if they have been checked in See screenshot below Checked 3 Description Stock Check 05 May 2010 Created o complete E Nt checked Sd eer oa ile Oe ee oO Print Flagging Check Un check Remove Bulk Scan Download Complete Cancel Search Tells you the total number of checked and Checked Items Missing Items All Items __ un
49. Guest aw 12 06 2007 Xviii XVIII Guest A 12 06 2007 A amp C Black A amp C Black Guest The Data Tidy settings screen will then appear lf there is a tick in Do Not Tidy take this out so that you can select the settings for that field Click the drop down arrow at the end of the Field box and select the first field that you d like to choose your data tidy settings for Select the Data Tidy options you want Repeat this for each field you want to apply Data Tidy settings to Click Close when you have finished When you have clicked Close any future records which are added to the database will have the Data Tidy settings applied to them when the Save option is clicked Use the drop down l Field Artist arrow to select the field If there i a tick in Options you d like to apply Data Do Not Tidy E Do not tidy Tidy settings to remove it O All upper case All lower case L First character in upper case Select the Data Tidy First character in each word in upper case Click here to settings you require E Move The to end of line activate Data for the field OE A ERER cleanse V Move A to end of line replacements and Data cleanse v Add correct spacing after punctuation v Apply data cleanse replacements remove iv apply data cleanse removals Lif Close Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 220 WW Chapter 13 Tidying Data mi How do schedule a date for data tidy
50. I set up a resource or borrower barcode mask consisting of numbers and letters You may have some resources which have a barcode that contains both numbers and letters alohanumeric It is important to scan a few of the same type of barcode in Notepad so that you can see what characters are included For example You could have a selection of resource barcodes which all start with the same letter R0234 R2345 R4567 From the Settings Barcodes screen click on New Click New to Barcode Masks Automate Barcodes create a Eit new mask Galaxy Resource sess New MLS 6 Digit Value Resource renew Delete MLS 5 Digit Value Resource 4 OO MLS 4 Digit Value Borrower E QOOQe OF Page 1 of 1 4 records s Use this facility to define the barcodes that are used for both Readers and Catalogue items in your library mm Save Cancel Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 34 ws Chapter 3 Settings m l S Type a description for the mask you are creating and then choose the barcode type from the Type drop down menu As the barcodes in the example above consist of alphanumeric characters with one letter at the beginning and then four numbers type R in the Mask field If the letter was at the end of the barcode e g 1234R the mask would read R MLS recommend that you use the letter in the mask as opposed to the symbol This is so that the system can distingu
51. J ANDS 1754 574 CHISHOLM J Current Loans DH rs 574 Asimov ERI 2 1754 574 BELLAMY D BOTANIC MAN Past Loans EA wi aT OS ir daf a Prid bars AR A AERA TS FARI Ti 2 ee er The Settings Page Views screen will then appear There are 3 tabs at the top of the screen General is the one you need to select to set your default views For each screen click the drop down arrow to select the view that you d like to be the default When you are happy with the settings click Save Set the system default views below Click each drop down arrow to select the Borrowers Borrowers default view for each Tutor Groups All Records screen Resources Fiction Current Loans All Records Past Loans All Records Reservations All Records Reviews All Reviews Click Save when you have finished Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 191 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net ww mis How do I change the information shown on a resource record It s possible for you to customise some of the tabs which are held on a resource record The tabs you can change are e Loans e Reservation e Linked Resources From the menu bar at the top of the page select Settings and then Page Views Database Schedule Modules Tools Secunty ommase JDA ie Selanne El es ee Barcode Class Author Resources Select Settings and IR GILMAN D then Page Views Borrowers GILMAN D 6 e s
52. Library Data How do delete a resource To delete a resource from the catalogue highlight the record and then click on the Remove icon under the Records tab on the right of the screen Deleted items will be moved to the Resource Recycle Bin To access this click onthe Recycle Bin icon under the Records tab on the right of the screen lf you change your mind you can restore the resource back to the Resources database by highlighting it and then clicking onthe Restore icon under the Records tab Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 159 NV Chapter 10 Maintaining My Library mM How do change the accession number of a resource You may want to change the accession number of a resource perhaps if the barcode you have assigned to it has become damaged Open up the resource s record card by highlighting it and clickingon 2 Eat Type the new barcode into the Barcode field at the top of the screen and then click Save p4 Type the new barcode number here Suad Photogaph Linked lems Dote Added 02 07 1998 Recyced Ooste Click Save when you are happy with the changes you ve made How do I make global changes to selected resource records Its possible for you to make global changes to any of the fields in the resource s record i e Location Publisher and Class etc For example you may want to change the Location of a selection of books because they have been moved to a di
53. Resource that you wish to Review into the Review treasure chest This automatically brings up the Review page The second way to Review items is to click on Search on the signpost Follow the process as described in How does a borrower reserve a resource in Chapter 5 Circulate Instead of following the final steps to reserve an item drag the resource into the Review treasure chest The Review page as shown above will appear fill in the review as normal Please note the student may add as many resources to their My Stuff area as they like However it is important to remember that this area is emptied each time the student logs out They may write reviews for resources they both have and haven t borrowed only from the My Stuff page if writing from the Reviews page they may only review resources they have borrowed Reviews are not available for public viewing until they are approved by the librarian Please Note The screen above shows a review with set questions To find out how to add your own review questions please see section How do add my own review questions later in this chapter Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 156 WW Chapter 9 Reviews mMm iS Managing Reviews How do I view reviews Once a borrower has written a review it will be listed in the Reviews screen within Grown Ups To access the reviews database click the ed icon from the tool bar on the left of the screen Reviews A i A nas oe de EE
54. The new field names will be shown only once the IIS server has been restarted e s The edited field Facon Fielo Namas y name is shown in _ this column The original field ardia Guardian 1 Date Added name is shown in prie bane RAES this column Notez Type the new field name Serial Number Serial Number Click Save when you have finished Reminder Number Reminder Number Q Page 1 of 23 433 iy For more information on Languages please see Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net section on Language Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 42 Ww Chapter 3 Settings m Is Page Views lt is possible for you to customise some of the tabs which are held on a resource and borrower record and on the circulate screen From the menu bar at the top of the page select Settings and then Page Views Barcode Class Author e 1745 574 GILMAND Click on 1746 574 ANDERSON P NS AND Mt gt Settings oa su cumo WD TH and then 1748 574 CARTERG Page Views 1750 574 WATERSJ ANDS THE Current Loans 2 gt 1751 574 CHISHOLM J gt 1753 574 ASIMOV ER PLANE Past Loans 7 a 1754 574 BELLAMY D BOTANIC MAN Reservations o 1756 04 OWGA INOFF A ANIMAI S ON THE MAVE The Settings Page Views screen will then appear Click on the relevant tab to change page views e g Borrowers Click on tab you d General Borrowers _Besquice
55. _ wT Please Note Label Print will generate exactly what is shown on either the Resources or Borrowers screen behind Therefore if you only wish to print labels for a certain amount of Resources or Borrowers perform either an Advanced Search or flag items and Show flagged only Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 253 WW Chapter 17 Label Print m is The Label Print Options screen is exactly the same as the Generate Barcodes Options screen Because the Label Print function allows you to generate both Resource and Borrower barcodes there is the option to select the length for each of these below The System Default school name enters the school name entered when registering the software The Custom School Name allows you to type your own custom school name in the box below The Start from label allows you to specify from which label you would like to start printing Please Note Only edit the options page if you choose to print barcode labels from LabelPrint Select the format by choosing from these drop down lists 00000 No Formatting Specify from which label you would like to start No Formatting printing Borrower 000g Custom School Name Start from label Select school name Custom School Name Rows down Click on Save to here a EEE return back to the LabelPrint screen Columns across Below is an example of Renaissance Learning labels
56. a different format ccccccccceeecseeeceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeaees 236 PrNUDO Dala innan aa 237 FOWAO TOMOA ea a a a a a a E taka tetteasnceuueuauaanae 237 Chapter 15 Silverlight Home Page ieissar aapa 238 Launching Silverlight Home Page ccsscccescceeseeseeeeeeeseeenseeeneeoesesenseoesesonseseaseoeneneas 238 What is Silverlight Home Page cccccccsecceeeceeeceeeceueecueeceecsueeceuecsueeseuseseeessueeseessgas 238 How do I open Silverlight Home Page ccccceeccceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeceueesseeeeeeeseueeseeeseeesseeesaees 238 USING Silverlight Home PAG vrro a 239 How do borrowers view resources s nseneneresrerrrrsrrrrrrerrrrrrerrnrrrrrrrerarrnrerrrrsrernrrerene 239 What other information is shown on a resource record in Silverlight Home Page 241 How do borrowers use guick SCAICIN 2 sororciurs siisi R A veceewess 242 How do borrowers use advanced search ccceeccseecceeeceeeeeeeeceueeseeeeeueeseueeseeesaneeseeesaees 243 How do borrowers view their loan NIStOry ccccceccceececeeeeeeeeceeeeceeeseeeeseueeseeessueeseeesaees 244 How do borrowers reserve resources cccseccceeccceeeceuceceecececeueeceessueesueeseeesauessusenaess 244 How do borrowers review resources cccceeccceeeceececeeeccececeueeceecsusesueeaueessuesseeessusenaees 245 How do borrowers read FOVICWS ccccccceccceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeteeeceueseeeseeeseeeseeetseeseeeseees 24
57. arrsa en Ae 217 What is data cleanse FTEMOVE cccecceeccssccseeeeeeceeeceeeceeeeeeecsueeeuecsuecsuecsuesseetuetseeseeesaeees 217 How do I apply the settings for data cleanse remove cccceseecceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeesseetseeesaees 217 Data TUY cesca a ee ee eee ee ee 220 WAM dala WO ote cetcete kcsutt a kee h kesh amt eet a east E 220 How do I apply the settings for data tidy cccccccecccseccceeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeseueeseeesaeeeseeesaees 220 How do schedule a date for data tidy to take place cece eecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeees 221 Contents vii Chapter 14 Viewing Library Dataisiiicitsccciscieietict casncdcsietetactvedecd cntsteticivecenecnnstetichiateneeeeetaee 222 SGarching Databases ecrane AEEA Oan anO ANES 222 How d l se QUICK sealen arriera nE GEE EAEE EE RRRA 222 Howdo luse advanced sealCh cureranno aa a 226 IAG ING S ian NN 231 Whatis Tagging I eee ee anne ere ne a 231 Whenmwould Tuse flagging 2 asco soe see eet a oe hohe toate art oa taal Alavi alata Goan 232 Flagging using the Barcode REAEL cccsscccseccececeeeccececeuceceuecsusessuesseeesuseseeessusesanes 233 PAG VI CW S aipiga E E a E E 234 WAI A V N a a a a a keeeet ec aattes 234 How do I Creale NEW VICWS tisrin na a a Was ecieuies 234 SONNO Dala nonr a 234 How do sort the databases into a different Order s essneenssernseerrreerrrrrrrreerrrrerrreerreen 234 EXPOMING DAtlas E Ra O Eat 236 How do export data into
58. be run is everyday at midnight You can change this by clicking on Schedule and then View Tasks from the menu bar at the top of the screen See Chapter 12 Customising Junior Librarian net section on Schedule for more information X X Options Advanced Options Advanced Extra data to import Field Mappings Surname and Forename Tick Run Barcode Enter more Now if you Management System ID advanced elephone Numbers UPN Primary Group Maps to tutor wish the Beo options here Z schedule to Tutor Group Record Actions run on save Import new records Year Group Other Schedule Automatic Sync The time you would like the Click Schedule to link the records Run the sc dule monthly on the Run Now Schedule Close Schedule Close Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 208 Chapter 12 Security mis How do I check that the scheduled task has run successfully To ensure that the Directory Services scheduled task has run successfully within Junior Librarian net open Internet Explorer and go to Tools MLS AD Integration 1 t3 Reopen Last Browsing Session Pop up Blocker gt Manage Add ons Work Offline ba Compatibility View Settings A Full Screen F11 Toolbars gt Explorer Bars gt 7 Developer Tools F12 Suggested Sites MLS Directory Services MLS Hardware Configuration Fiddler2 C
59. borrower listed in the Intake screen A z Select how you d Details of the iiih hatik like to allocate a borrower from ikma Tutor Group barcode to the the student file Forename rear Group borrower Date yg Birth Gender anagment System ID Security ID Select New od New Borrower Borrower if they Se iil oe of existing Junior are new to Junior automatic Librarian net borrowers Librarian net Pr sninen airy whose surnames start E nter barcode ai with the same first two Existing Borrower letters as the new borrower Select Existing Borrower if they are ROBERTS Barclay already listed in the et ee sean ROBERTS Laura BTRL Junior Librarian net tected Oliver ast Click Import borrower database OBINSON Cari OGHL ROBINSON Chery 1OCLL when you are 00 Page 1 of 3 17 items happy with the details Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 94 Nyi Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S How do I manually move my borrowers to their new groups If you are unable to use your school s administration system to move your borrowers to their new groups it s possible to move them manually 1 From the Tutor Group screen double click or highlight 4 Edt and click on the first group that you d like to move 2 Inthe Tutor Group record click on the Move To tab By default there will be a tick in the Ignore box To select a new group tick the Move To box 3 Typ
60. click the Settings tab and then Fields Database Schedule Modules Tools Security Settings Help ee y A Password anager O Barcode Class Author Resources x e 1745 574 GILMAND Sie gt 1746 574 ANDERSON P 6g DH or su cuman Tutor Groups 1748 574 CARTERG gt 1750 574 WATERS J Current Loans 2 DH si sr cisHoums 75 i P gt 1753 574 ASIMOV A os 176A RTA REI AMY N RMTANIC MAM Module Settings gt Barcodes Junior Librarian Date Tidy Fields MNS AN Click the ND THE Fields tab Language Page Views Restrictions Reservations Reviews ANDS T Printing Reminders G Cenera ER PL Click Add to add a new Custom Field Custom Fields Click Add to e Resources a Add add a new j Text 1 Rename field J Subject J Text 2 o Text 3 O Text 4 O Text 5 T Acquisition Date 1 O Date 2 LE Tant m Delete Click the drop down arrow at the right of the Table field and select the relevant database you would like to add the custom field to Type the Field Name and then the Data Type for example Text Number or Currency etc Click Add when you have finished Click the arrow to Type the name select which erihercustem database you want to field you want ita add the custom field to add here Field Name First Published Data Type Text Click the arrow and select the format you Cancel want the custom field
61. clicked on will be de selected When you turn on Flagging you can select as many records as you like all at the same time Flagging is available on all of the databases To turn on Flagging click on the 939 icon under the Tools tab on the right of the screen Asmall menu will appear click on flagging by mouse Flacgng by mouse Piscong by barcode reader Clase Anis Tibe Ls La atasa Futon Rowing JF Hary Potter amp The Gettet Of Five Paoerberk Litwary so iare Ser zes Roweng Jk Hary Pone A The Hadsereg Sone Orar Liteary Secara Once flagging IS Fion Rowing Jk Marty Potter And the gt sone OF Areaban Papeta Litwary 2 t A aaron n Foring Jk fery Potter And The Charost OF Secrets Panertac Liteary turned on com Ficton Rowing JK hary Potter Ard the rat iliood Parc harbet Library 7 tpa lect wheth a se ec Ww e er Tapson Frank Jiri Muthernatas Study Deda y Paperback amp toe 6 acy De Vee Free Mon The Paperbac you are going to flag by mouse or flag by barcode reader Madega a lAras lira Pagerbech Library i i 949994944944 ug ry F amtasi Coasteres Hardbec Libsary e E t Begu P F y Beyons Anod Bes Agan lbe Library Aa i trege Vapi Nonegary And The Wellington f wha t Click on the Flagging icon to turn on Flagging Click on each tase r gt 010143 Ficton Burgess t bin Anget Fo
62. given is 21 days which has been taken from the Resource Type Restriction Setting This is because any restrictions that you specify in the Resource Type Restriction field will be chosen against the restrictions you ve set for the Borrower Restriction Group but only when issuing the resource type that you ve added a separate restriction for e g Paperback Books Loan Period Restriction Restrictions BRG RTR GRR IRR Given Setting Used Maximum Allowance 3 3 eres BIA 21 RTR Maximum Reservations 3 3 hey BIA Loan Period 14 21 BA BS Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 127 Nyi Chapter 6 Restrictions m l S Example 3 You have created a Borrower Restriction Group and have added a Resource Type Restriction for your Books which have a media type of Paperback A borrower who has been assigned to this restriction group wants to take out a Hardback Book The loan period given is 14 days which has been taken from the Borrower Restriction Group Setting This is because although you have set up a Resource Type Restriction for your Paperback Books the borrower is taking out a Hardback Book instead so the Resource Type Restriction is ignored Loan Period Restriction Restrictions BRG RTR GRR IRR Given Setting Used Maximum Allowance 3 3 B A BA 14 BRG Maximum Reservations 3 a B A PLA Loan Period 14 21 B A BIA Example 4 You have created a Borrower Restriction Group a Resource Type Restriction for your Films with a media
63. i of i 9 recng Enter Your Linked Mams Swci Ac a Remove ok e oOo o Ci Sosak of the Week Close Select the resource you want to be linked from the list using Quick Search if you need to Once it s highlighted click on Select at the bottom right of the screen You can select multiple Resources if you wish es Seer lems harry potter Seatrix Potter To Harry Potter Harry Potter gt 6 G Haery Potter G Hary Potter G Harry Potter G Hary Potter Fiction Rowing Lk Haery Potter amp The Goblet Of Fire H gt oo Rowaing Ik Harry Potter amp The Philosophers Stone If you clicked om G Harry Potter Activities Find Resource gt 37 Rowling J k Hary Potter And The Chamber Of Secrets gt gt gt 6 8 Fiction Harry Potter And The Deathly Hallows highlight the Fiction Rowing JK Harry Potter And The Half Blood Prince resou rce from the Fiction Roeting J K Hary Potter And The Prisoner Of Azkaban Harry Potter Books list that you Wa nt Harry Potter Companion eke to link and then Marry Potter Lexicon Hary Potter Censorship Battles click on Select Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 65 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m Is The resource s will now be listed in the Linked Items tab x Barcode 1 Title Details Advanced Loans Reservations Summary Notes Photograph Linked Items Floor Plan a yo u wi S h Title A
64. isabel 50 Buildings You Should Know 010118 629 2 Wood Jonath S0 Years of Classic Cars C nin BOT AB btn ry Oa wat PAD Pn eH Ot Hd Mn eel eth bataie wd Pe an SEE Cee re entra Scene Dore a Loca rtranet How do I import resource records into my custom catalogue You can import resource records in MARC21 or UK MARC format Make sure you are in the Custom Catalogue screen by clicking on Database and then Custom Catalogue oe YES Barcode Class Author 1 11470 779 36 Magnum Photographers Click Database and then Custom Catalogue 11334 Fiction Groening Matt 11549 822 33 11551 822 33 11550 822 33 10793 Fiction Rennison Louise 10203 Fiction Rennison Louise Statement 2 ra 10292 Fiction Rennison Louise Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 278 Chapter 19 Third Party Products m Is From the menu bar at the top of the screen click on Tools and then Import Click Tools and then Import gfaphers Magnun Simpsor Tempes Tempes select Marc 21 from the list of file types and then click Browse to browse to where your quiz list file is stored Click Import Carel Press LinksPlus Accelerated Reader Quiz List Click Browse to select the location of the marc file Click Import to import resources The records will then be imported Manap n d sof nterm xpi wd y At Custom Catalogue jasa Autos ithe Rosen
65. it may be an idea to ask her to create specific page views for a project you may be doing For Example a page view for Monet to display all resources linked to Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 243 WwW Chapter 15 Silverlight Home Page mM iS How do borrowers view their loan history Once the borrower has logged into their individual area of the Junior Librarian net site which details all of their loan information reservations and reviews it is possible for them to click on My Books A The All link displays all resources saved in the My Books area My Books Search for a Harry Potter And Primar y Grammar The Philosoph Box Grammar The Current link lists all of the resources the borrower currently has on loan The Past link lists all of the resources they have previously borrowed How do borrowers reserve resources If a borrower would like to reserve a resource they simply need to drag a resource into the Reserve treasure chest Please note this chest is only available on the My Books My Stuff page Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 244 WW Chapter 15 Silverlight Home Page mM iS How do borrowers review resources There are two Reviews icons which allows you to write a review for that resource and I want to write a review What other people have said which allows you to read reviews which have been written for that resource simply click on Kokk Andy O brien
66. linked they won t need to type in a username and password If there are problems with Active Directory or if a borrower hasn t logged onto the computer initially they will need to type in a username and password so that the library software knows who they are Active Directory logon details are stored in the borrower s record card in the Advanced tab What is Active Directory Active Directory is a database which stores permission information about users who belong to a computer network The main purpose of Active Directory is to provide central authentication and authorisation services for Windows based computers For more information on Active Directory please speak to your IT technician How does Active Directory work within Junior Librarian net All users on a network which uses Active Directory will have a unique Security ID When a user logs onto a computer with their user account this ID is used to identify them and determine the permissions which they have been given In Active Directory terms this is known as authentication It is possible to import the Active Directory Security ID s of all users into Junior Librarian net This means that once they ve logged onto the computer if they launch Junior Librarian net they will automatically be logged in This saves you having to have one set of login details for the network and a separate set for Junior Librarian net Junior Librarian net User Guide Version
67. moved to the ilir Grapa ee mi 26002009 appicaionipt indvdual Reminders uest H e 1HOM2009 application pd RESERVATION House Keeping Guest Recycle Bin To view DAZD applicationipd RESERVATION HousaKeaping Guest aaa Sh0G2004 application RESERVATION HouseKeeping Guest and or print them click here tow SCS Pasi Loma Hima F Aesernalions Pageviews Revres Curent page ww All Ferm How do I print reminders To print your current reminders highlight or double click the required PDF document from the list in the Output screen The reminder details will be shown Click Open to view the PDF document Click Open to view the reminder PDF Details Data Date Created Description Mime Type Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 145 lt Chapter 7 Loans m S Once the PDF document is open it will list all of the reminders you have scheduled to send as print To print them click on the print icon at the top left of the screen When the reminders are printed they will be grouped together by borrower and reminder number For example A borrower may have three resources on loan For one of the resources he is due to have Reminder 1 sent For the other two resources he is due to have Reminder 2 sent When the reminders are printed the borrower will have one sheet of paper with Reminder 1 on which lists the first resource and another sheet of paper with Reminder 2 on which lists
68. of items you would like the NEW Resources to show in the New Resources News Article news item here Please choose a resource type from the options below Select the resource types you would like to display new resources from on E Audio k this list Book E Document A L Film Select All ear All E Hardware F Live Media F Musical Instrument Ela a pa s7 Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 173 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net ww mis The next tab along is the Book of the Week tab Within this tab you may simply choose where you would prefer the book image to appear in relation to its summary There are just three options Top Left and Right Pe eo x New Resouces Book of the Week Top Ten u Please select where you would like the book image to To appear in relation to its summary p Save Cancel The last tab is the Top Ten tab Again you are able to select the resource types that you wish this information to be taken from All resource types are selected as default You may also enter the period in days over which the top ten should be calculated The default amount here is set to 365 which means it is calculated per annum Should you wish to change this to monthly for example change this period to 30 Hew Resources Book of the Week Enter period in Please enter the period in days
69. of the screen Deleted groups will be moved to the Tutor Group Recycle Bin To access this click onthe FecycieBin icon under the Records tab on the right of the screen lf you change your mind you can restore the group back to the tutor group database by highlighting the record and then clicking on the icon under the Records tab A Restore Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 167 Chapter 10 Maintaining My Library mM Discovery Online What is Discovery Online Discovery Online is an online database which holds over 2 million Bibliographic Records over 200 000 Book Cover Images as well as over 700 000 Book Summaries Discovery Online will add thousands of colour book cover images and book summaries similar to back cover blurb to your own resources database When your catalogue is searched a picture of the front cover and or summary will appear on screen Discovery Online will also automatically find the bibliographic details of new resources added to the catalogue and will open up retrospective cataloguing to a much wider range of users beyond educational establishments It will fill in any gaps in field entries in your catalogue for example if you have many records without publishers Discovery Online will fill in that field for you How do I choose which fields to update If you have already spent time adding your own bibliographic information you probably don t want Discovery Online to overwrite it The s
70. on Bulk Scan to begin scanning resources resource will be listed here Click on Bulk Scan to begin scanning your resources 25 at a time As you are on a hosted system adding the resources a few at a time aids system speed 10047 Scan Enter a barcode 10013 2554 10048 10020 10050 15001 2479 10007 10002 Click Apply to check them in StockCheck Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 Scan or type resource barcodes 261 W Chapter 18 StockCheck m I S Once you have clicked Apply on the Bulk Scan screen the screen will go blank but remain open so that you may scan the next batch of resources and all checked resources will display in the Checked Items screen behind Bulk Scan Once you have completed scanning resources into Bulk Scan click on Apply for the last time followed by Close This will return you to the Checked Items tab of the StockCheck screen displaying all checked items Stock Check Shows the number of Totals Quick Search checked and Description SM notchecked coea osos completes resources here N E Bulk Scan Download Checked Items f l Checked Date Time Resource Type Barcode Title Author Class Media Location Recycled Datis v 05 05 2010 13 57 22 GJ 10036 Montmorency Updale Eleanor Fiction Audio Library v 05 05 2010 13 57 18 CJ 10007 King Of The Middle March Cross
71. project to pupils as very often they are already quite familiar with packages such as Paint Shop Pro MLS recommend that you save the floor plan in png format or jpg because the quality of the image will be better however you can save it in any format you wish Once the floor plan has been created save it somewhere you can easily access it How do add a floor plan record You can have as many floor plan records as you wish in Junior Librarian net From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Database and then Floor Plan Select Database and 1747 74 GILMAN then Floor Plan GILMAN 11748 574 CARTER ATER F Plan iiom Catalogue 1 74 CMISHO Wa Log F 53 ASI Outpt 0k Martenance 54 BELLAMY vere ts i LO j Weer y v 1 CHINERY 2 gt 1758 ILSON Reviews PEN Click Add Under the Records tab on the right of the screen Type a name for the floor plan in the Description box at the top of the screen Click Browse and select the location of the saved floor plan Once the location is specified click Update gt s Descnotion Floor Plan 1 Pr Type a describtion here Click Browse to select the location of the floor plan Click Update to import the floor plan g OoOvovcd Save Close Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 72 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m Is The floor plan image will be shown Click Save Description Floor Plan 1 Flace Pian Entran
72. replace Replace with Geography Room Replace Close Look For Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 161 WW Chapter 10 Maintaining My Library m Using Quick Search in Quick Replace It s possible to search for specific field data using the Quick Search function You may want to find specific data and replace it with something different To save you having to scroll down the list of entries in quick replace to find the one you want you can type the data you are looking for in the Quick Search box For example You want to change the media of Video to Tape for all of your resources From Quick Replace choose Media from the Field drop down menu In the Quick Search box type Video and then click Go x Srecla Gal Choose Media Range All records C Filtered records from the list Quick Search Video T Media ype Video here Audio 195 and click Bunson bumer 10 Go Cd 3 Cd rom 1 Digital camera 7 Hardback 183 HARDBACK AUDIO CD PERFORMANCE SPOKEN WORD 1 Laptop 12 LIVE MEDIA 1 QOVer _O gt Page 1 of 3 26 records Look For Replace with Replace Close The media Video has now appeared on the screen If you highlight it Video will appear in the Look For box Type Tape in the Replace With box and then click Replace x Field Media EJ Range All records L Filtered records Quick Search Go Video 41 Highlight Vid
73. right of the screen Aj Recycle Bin lf you change your mind you can restore the review back to the Reviews database by highlighting it and then clicking on the Restore icon under the Records tab How do I add my own review questions You can create a more structured way for the borrowers to write their reviews by creating your own questions for them to answer Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited Settings Heip Database Schedule Modules Tools Security GILMAN D ieee 1747 574 GILMAND Prl ss s4 canter Tutor Groups gt 1750 574 WATERS J 1751 574 CHISHOLM J Current Loans s3 574 asmovi 1754 574 BELLAMY D BOTANIC MAN Past Loans Page Views Click Settings and then Reviews Restrictions Reservations Reviews Printing ets 7 1755 591 LOGVINOFF A animals on the move From Grown Ups select Settings and then Reviews from the menu bar at the top of the screen Type the questions you d like your borrowers to answer making sure you do so for both your Fiction and Non Fiction items if needed Click Save when you have finished You can change BRIAN BA Eee the layout using the tools here Click here to change the screen to Fiction or Non Fiction What was the resource about Was the resource interesting Type your Did you have a favourite character If so why review would you recommend the reso
74. setting the restriction on all of your resource records for the resource type you have selected If you enter a Minimum age Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 124 Chapter 6 Restrictions mis for example 10 it means that any borrower who is 10 or under won t be able to borrow any resources You can enter a different loan period by clicking on the Advanced tab To place restrictions on individual resources please see the section below on How do I set restrictions for individual resources Once you have finished entering the restrictions click Save General Advanced Maximum Renewals Maximum Reservations 5 Maximum Fine 5 00 Place a tick in any of these boxes to restrict the year group from borrowing all of this resource type Fine Rate 0 10 Not allowed to Select All Year Group 7 ClearAll _J Year Group 6 jYear Group 0 a Year Group 9 _J Year Group 10 _J Year Group il _j Year Group 12 C Year Group 13 a 10AOR Year 10 J10CLL Year 10 mm Save Cisse Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 To change the loan period click on the Advanced tab Enter the restrictions you d like this resource type to have Use these options to select all or clear all of the selected groups Click Save when you have finished 125 Chapter 6 Restrictions How do set restrictions for individual resources mis o You may want to place a rest
75. t yet been checked or scanned Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 259 WwW Chapter 18 StockCheck m S All Items shows all the resources included in the StockCheck both scanned and not scanned ya D Description Stock Check 05 May 2010 CA RAR A Print Flagging Check Un check Remove Bulk Scan Download Lists all of the resources you have chosen to StockCheck The date and time they were checked or scanned is alen shawn Checked Complete Checked Items Missing Items All Items Checked Date Time Resource Type Barcode Title Author Class Media Location 00 00 00 al 10013 Best Friends Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library 00 00 00 gt 2554 Best Friends Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio English Department 00 00 00 tJ 10047 Devil s Toenail The Prue Sally Fiction Audio Library 00 00 00 GJ 10048 Diamond Girls The Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library 00 00 00 tJ 10020 Girls In Tears Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library 00 00 00 tJ 10050 Gruffalo Song And Other Songs The Donaldson Julia 782 742 Audio Library 00 00 00 15001 Half Moon Investigations Colfer Eoin Fiction Audio Library 00 00 00 10002 Hat Full Of Sky A Pratchett Terry Fiction Audio Library w 1 of 60 gt bi Please Note The All Items screen only shows the resources you have chosen to StockCheck If you have chosen to St
76. the relevant box Once you have selected which resources you would like to StockCheck click Create at the bottom of the screen Description Today s date will be the P r pga default Description for your StockCheck Rename by typing in your own Description Choose which i Entire catalogue resources you would like to StockCheck kta Class range i Fiction authors between _ Reference stock only ka Selection from Ticking this option means Penson puter TE abate e a that any resources which my P new stockCnec are on loan won t be Computer included in the StockCheck Create Close Note This option is not ticked by default Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 258 w Chapter 18 StockCheck m Is Once you have clicked on Create the main StockCheck screen will appear StockCheck starts from the standpoint that everything is missing until scanned Please Note Only resources which you have chosen to StockCheck will appear in the StockCheck screen All other resources will be ignored On the main StockCheck screen there are 3 tabs each showing different sections of your StockCheck Checked Items default tab shows which resources you have scanned this tab is empty upon creation of the StockCheck as it assumes that all books are missing until scanned Description Btock Check 05 May 2010 Checked 3 Go Created 05 0
77. the book shelf and click on it to view the details of the item The In Out notification icons at the bottom left of the screen depict whether a copy of the resource is available for loan at this time or not If the latter the user may place a reservation on the item by clicking on the green Reserve icon near the top right corner of the screen Total number of reservations placed for the user currently logged in By reserving a resource the total number of reservations for the immediate borrower shown inside the icon will increase by one A record of the reservation will be placed in the Reservations table in Management for the Librarian to manage Details of managing reservations in Management can be found in Chapter 8 Reservations Librarian Only To gain access to Management an authorised user must first log on as normal The Librarian Only button will be activated if the user is authorised to use the administrative areas of the system Details of setting up users to gain access to Librarian Only is covered in Chapter 12 Security Please note Librarian Only shares the same function as Grown Ups when using the Beach Scene interface rather than Junior Classic Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 18 W S Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net m Settings Use the Settings features to change fundamental aspects of the Junior Classic interface display
78. the keyboard to enter the resource barcode manually StockCheck do s amp don ts Don t catalogue any new resources whilst a stock take is in progress Don t issue any resources whilst a stock take is in progress Do read through all this documentation before you start Do ensure you are using the latest version of your library system If you have bought or hired a Portable Bar Code Reader do ensure you read through all the separate documentation for this e f possible do try to complete a stock take without stopping or being interrupted Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 256 Chapter 18 StockCheck m Is Creating a New StockCheck To create a new StockCheck click on Modules and then StockCheck from the menu bar at the top of the screen within Management Click Module StockCheck Click on New on the right of the screen Computer Live Media Media Test qwerty Stock C Stock Check February 2010 Stock Check 23 February 2010 Stock Check666 Test 23 02 2010 Stock Check 22 February 2010 Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 257 i tW Chapter 18 StockCheck m S Today s date will show in the Description field To rename the StockCheck to something else simply type over the text in this box lt is possible to StockCheck different sections of your catalogue at a time Under the StockCheck Criteria option specify which resources you would like to StockCheck by placing a tick in
79. the name of the student who has written the review Only once a written review has been approved within Grown Ups is it available for the rest of the students to view discussed in greater detail in Chapter 10 Reviews WODO Y ANI Y VV c mile Review What did you find most scary about this book Would you recommend this book to a friend Give the resource a Explatqwhat you think the book means star Type the review in here rating using the toolbar to make text more interesting or insert smiley s to show vour approval disapproval When the review is finished click Save The review will then be listed in the Grown Ups section in the Reviews database It will need to be approved by the librarian before it can be viewed by other borrowers in SearchStar See Chapter 10 Reviews section How Do I Approve a Review How do borrowers read reviews Simply by clicking on the Read Review link displayed on the Search and My Stuff pages What other people have said Aok k Andy O brien Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 245 od Chapter 16 Reports m Is Chapter 16 Reports This chapter tells you how to access and view the various reports which have been created for you in Junior Librarian net Accessing Reports How do I view reports From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Modules and then Reporting Tools z Click Reporting To po Select a report to view Highlight the report
80. the other 2 resources So he will receive two sheets of paper altogether If you don t want to print any reminders simply click on the cross at the top right of the screen Viewed and or printed reminders will be moved to the Output Recycle Bin where you can view them and print them as many times as you wish A Sa OOD wiae Ols l scroll up and down the list of reminders Use the arrows to Click here to print the reminders Pages Group List Meme Library Loans for STAFF Your 0 The readers Gated below brs berast icem whack showid be retiraed to Se Lacy a secu m porsble Thank you Library Maza me hvas Dawe Cim Attachments N f _ Comments gt What is a memo used for You might need to send a memo to Year 11 leavers for example who usually leave officially before their exams start A memo would remind them to bring all their resources back regardless of whether they are overdue or not If you want to change the text in a Memo you can edit in by clicking on Tools and then Edit Reminders Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 146 Chapter 7 Loans m S How do I send reminders to individual borrowers If you only want to send reminders to an individual borrower use the Advanced Search facility in Current Loans to search for the individual first or use Flagging See sections on Searching Databases and Flagging in Chapter 16 Viewing Library Data If yo
81. to be in Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 39 od Chapter 3 Settings m S The Custom Field you ve created will now be shown underneath the relevant table You can delete or rename it if you wish Custom Fields 1l Resources ms Add Rename Borrowers I E Text 1 Text 2 O Text 3 i GJ Text 4 Text 5 O Date 1 O Date 2 Delete When you create a new Custom Field it can be accessed by clicking on the Advanced tab which is located on the individual resource or borrower record card Click the mee The Custom Advanced vanc Loans Reservations Summary Photograph Linkeditema Floor Plan Field you ve tab Custom Fields created is First Published shown here Public Notes Restrictions Minimum Age Lock Restrictions Loan Penod Not allowed to Maximum Renewals 0 Year Group 0 a Select All Maximum Reservations 9 Year Group 7 Clear All Maximum Fine 1 Year Group amp Year Group 9 Fine Rate 0 02 P Odo Book of the Week Save Close For more information on Custom Fields please see Chapter 4 Creating My Library Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 40 Chapter 3 Settings Language mis lt is possible for you to customise any fields in Junior Librarian net For example you may want to change some of the field names which appear in the Resources or Borrower record card From the menu bar at the top of the
82. to the newspaper to take effect How do I update and view my Top Ten Resources Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 181 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net WwW mis Again this area is updated automatically the system looks at your library data and calculates the top ten most popular resources within your library These resources are then displayed here Scroll over each book to view the book cover and summary if available Top ten books Schedule How does schedule work Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 182 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis The MLS Schedule is a new facility which has been added to Junior net It is a windows service that runs constantly on the server Every minute it will check the list of scheduled tasks to see if any are either overdue or flagged to run now If there are the scheduler will run these tasks in the background on your behalf without any intervention from you This enables you to update your Discovery Online data on a regular basis generate reminders and run housekeeping tasks All you have to do is create the tasks you want to automate and the scheduler will do the rest What is a task A task is something which you have asked the schedule to run It can be any of these e Discovery Online Update e Reminders e Data Tidy With these scheduled tasks you can e Schedule a task to run daily weekly or monthly at a time convenient
83. using the Platinum software for Identikit on your old system Once you have completed the installation of the Identikit Software please go to Start Programs MLS Hardware Support MLS Bio Server configuration di Microsoft Office Microsoft SQL Server 2005 a Microsoft Windows SDK di MLS Hardware Support v MLS Bio Server configuration d Mozilla Firefox On the screen below click on Browse to browse to the location of the SDF file you were sent by us via email Please provide the location of your database to import Import Once you have found the file highlight it and click Open to insert it into the location box Then click Import All of the fingerprints from your old Junior3 system will now be imported into the new Junior Librarian net system saving you hours of time Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 104 Chapter 5 Circulate m S How do l register a fingerprint All potential Identikit users will need to have their finger or thumbprint registered before they can be identified when borrowing a resource They can do this at any time The registration process normally only needs to be done once but individuals can be re registered at any time or deleted altogether if required Ensure you have firstly enrolled all your borrowers See Chapter 4 Creating My Library section on Adding Borrowers Once all of your Borrowers are successfully added to the system log into Grown
84. wish to install the AD Plugin and you do not wish to be reminded about tt again click on the relevant link above Login details for My Account will be requested if a The user you are currently logged into the PC on is not Active Directory linked to your borrower account in Junior Librarian net b You are accessing the Junior Librarian net Hosted system from outside the school network Please Note the login details for My Account are not the same as the Active Directory login details For further information on Active Directory Linking please see Chapter 12 Security Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 11 mis Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net This chapter will give an explanation of the home page as well as the different areas of the system you ll be able to view once Junior Librarian net has been opened A brief explanation will be given for each section on the home page The different areas of each section will all be covered in depth later on in the guide The Home Page The home page is the first screen you will see once Junior Librarian net has been opened There are two different looks or interfaces to the home page that can set in Librarian Only or Grown Ups Junior Classic or the Beach Scene Junior Classic The home page of Junior Librarian net Classic features the book interface The book interface hosts a n
85. your personal note in here This will only be displayed for you when you log into the system Set Note Clase Weekends Clear All c lsimitiwit leis is imltiwit le isis leit iwitlelsis yiriwitlelsis miriwit le isis im Public note Make Personal note Need to buy more boo bloggs sure joe today Click Apply when you have entered loct 3 the note s Close I Force Return E Personal note fj Public note i Both Apply Close These notes will be displayed on the homepage when you log into the system See Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net for more information Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 132 Chapter 6 Restrictions m Is How do I exclude closed days from fines and overdue s If you don t want the days when the library is closed to be included in your overdue s and fines you can set this by clicking on Settings and then Restrictions from the menu bar Barcode Class Author 1745 574 GILMAN D Click on Settings 574 GILMAN D 7 and then Restrictions 574 CARTER G Tutor Groups gt 1750 574 WATERS J ANDS 1751 574 CHISHOLM J Current Loans 2 DH s 574 Asimov ets r 2 1754 574 BELLAMY D BOTANIC MAN h General Borrowers Resources E Allow reference resources to be issued E Remove closed days from days overdue E Remove closed days from fine calculation Apply age restr
86. 00 NB Active Directory matches accounts by the First name and Surname fields Please make sure that these are correct before linking Junior Librarian net with Active Directory If you have set up different User Accounts you can also link these to Active Directory From the Tool bar at the top of the screen click Security and then User Manager Highlight the account then click Edit Place a tick in Active Directory Linked then click Save Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 207 f wa Chapter 12 Security m S The second and easier way of mass linking borrowers to Active Directory is by using Directory Services From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Schedule and then Directory Services If the school has a Management Information System in place eg SIMS NET with all of these options already entered in it Address Telephone numbers etc then leave all of the fields in the Directory Services Options window un ticked As you will have imported those details from your Management Information System already there is no need to import them again The Directory Services Advanced window allows you to import more advanced options such as the UPN If you would like to run this right away then tick Run Now before clicking Schedule Otherwise leave it blank and simply click on Schedule The Schedule will then add the Active Directory update to the list of scheduled tasks to be run The default time for the task to
87. 00s Guest 7 12 06 2007 Xviii XVIII Guest 12 06 2007 A amp C Alack A amp C Black Guest The Data Tidy screen will now appear Using the arrow at the end of the Field tab select the first field that you d like Data Cleanse Remove to apply to In the screenshot below the field selected is Artist You then need to place a tick in the Apply data cleanse removals box Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 218 Chapter 13 Tidying Data Apply data cleanse removals When you have finished click Close Please Note The available fields in the Field drop down menu will differ according to the screen WJ mis Repeat this process by selecting each field from the drop down list and then placing a tick in you are in The fields in the Resources screen will differ from those in the Borrowers screen Field Artist Options ga Lf Junior Librarian net User Guide J Apply data cleanse replacements _ Do not tidy all upper case J All lower case First character in upper case First character in each word in upper case Move The to end of line C move An to end of line Move A to end of line Ll Add correct spacing after punctuation i iv Apply data cleanse removals Version 11 4 Use the drop down arrow to select the field you d like to apply data cleanse remove to Click Apply data cleanse removals Click Close when you have finished 219 Ww S Cha
88. 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net This chapter tells you how you can customise Junior Librarian net to so that it works in the way that you need it to The News section tells you how to add edit your own news items and describes how your Top Ten Resources and New Resources are displayed The Schedule section tells you how the scheduler works in relation to Housekeeping Discovery Online and Reminders The Page Views section tells you how to add your own customised views so that when you view your library data only the information which you require is shown The Settings section explains what each option in the list does and how it impacts on other settings in Junior Librarian net News Where are my news items displayed There are three main areas in which News items are displayed on the Junior Librarian net home screen New Resources are displayed when clicking upon the hot air balloon which can be found floating across the sky on the Home screen Book of the Week and other news items are displayed when clicking on the newspaper A which can be found on the beach towel on the Home screen Top Ten resources are displayed when clicking on the books a lt a which can be found on the beach towel on the Home screen Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 172 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis How do I modify settings for my news items
89. 11 4 149 we Chapter 8 Reservations m S If you don t want to print a slip straight away simply close the Adobe Reader screen by clicking the red cross at the top right of the screen You can print the slip at any time by going into the Reservations database highlighting the reservation and then clicking on the lt Print sip icon under the Records tab on the right of the screen If the borrower has a valid email address an email will also be sent to the borrower informing them that the resource is now available for collection How does a borrower reserve a resource There are two ways to reserve a resource The first of which is completed by following these instructions Click on Search on the home page gt This will bring up a clear and colourful easy search selection as shown in the screen below Each picture represents a search criterion for example the dog represents animals and will bring up all resources in the library which relate to animals Below is the Search Results page for the Animals search Each area is described in the captions below Search STERG Animals Floating in the sea are suggested keywords to add to your search Simply click ona keyword to add it to vour search PROVIDES PLANTS By clicking ona resource type you stop that particular Drag resources into the My Stuff resource type treasure chest Click on the My from being Stuff treasure chest for a link to shown on the gt t
90. 11 4 205 wa Chapter 12 Security m S How do I Configure Active Directory Linking for Junior Librarian net Before continuing with the instructions below please ensure you have installed both the Hardware Plugin and the AD Plugin onto the computer on which you are setting up Active Directory linking For further information on how to do this refer to the Prerequisites section of Chapter 1 Getting Started Note It is not a requirement to install these plugins on every computer you wish to access Junior Librarian net from only on the computer on which you are setting up the Active Directory Linking Once you have followed the instructions for installing these plugins detailed in Chapter 1 Getting Started log into Junior Librarian net and click on the Management option on the signpost Go to Settings Directory Services Selings Help Pacsen Manger EI Oreciory Services Go to Settings Mode Sanit and Directory Barcodes Services ok Data Tidy le Figdds on Lorgusge TH Pae views nud Rethicions ing Reservations red aaa Dk printing fan Rerterd rs co Genra its Click on Add and enter the details for your Active Directory server as shown below Enter details by Servers ES am placing the cursor in BAA Ot a E paca nee ee Eclipse OF FICE Administrator testing users students Click on Add to add details for linking to your AD Server Test th
91. 3 DENN 03218 aE 03223 03228 ELL 3204 UL 03208 LL 03214 ENEN 03219 LL 03224 ANININ 03229 Version 11 4 KINNE 03205 GU LL 032710 SIL 03215 O UL 03220 SL LL 03225 A TL 03230 amp Resources Borrowers EEN 03206 ERINN 03211 EE 03216 EEN 03221 vA 03226 A 03231 screen screen yr 252 WW Chapter 17 Label Print m iS How do print book labels Whether you wish to generate Spine Labels showing the Dewey number or Renaissance Learning labels showing the Quiz Number all of these label templates are accessible from the Labels option on the Label Print sub menu Seri Secunty Card Print Generate Barcodes Click on Labels Labets aj i is ee MAAN GR OD Le i In the Label Print window shown below there is a large selection of label templates to choose from Click Run to run the selected template Avery Mini Laser Labels L7651 r Available Label Options allows Print templates J a System reports modification of formatting are listed here oo p Barcode Labels B meote to import a z Barcode Labels with School Name new template oo SA Renaissance Learning Click Delete to delete a selected Renaissance Learning Label Print template ae Spine Labels Author Year Spine Labels Dewey Author Ye Spine Labels Dewey Author OA l Spine Labels Dewey
92. 4 Creating My Library m S Where should I start cataloguing lt makes sense to have a plan for cataloguing your resources to avoid missing items out therefore we would suggest cataloguing your library a section at a time Fiction may be easier to start with as the key wording is generally less demanding Then work through Non fiction Reference stock and finally non book items e g videos audio tapes etc Insert each barcode label as you add the item to the catalogue so that you will always know which items have been entered onto Junior Librarian net Label stored no label not stored Remember the order in which you apply barcode labels is not important However if you have ordered an MLS cataloguing day the barcodes should be entered sequentially Please contact MLS for an instruction sheet How do enter a new resource onto the system Make sure you are in the Resources database by clicking on the i icon Resources Click acd under the Records tab on the right of the screen The New Resource screen will appear Click on the type of resource you are adding from the list and then stick a barcode on the item you are adding Please choose a resource type from the options below Choose the type of Website Document Picture resource from the list a ON A _t is Film Audio Musical Sheet Hardware Instrument Music Generic eBook Book Text Book ih Close Once you have chosen t
93. 4 101 Chapter 5 Circulate m S How can I check the hardware specification of my PC 1 Switch on your PC so it shows the normal Windows Desktop display 2 Click the My Computer icon with the RIGHT mouse button 3 Click Properties in the resultant menu with the LEFT button My Computer system Properties nna uscii fewe You should now be able to see details of your hardware mil Compde amo Hanae Advanced Please check this corresponds to the above requirements a Seek clarification from a technician if necessary Microsoft Windows xP Professional hf See Pack 1 If your PC does not match this specification please Systems return Identikit unused in a padded envelope to MLS en ee straight away and we will not invoice you for it Coenputer AMD Athlnitn XP 2200 Once you install the software see Chapter 1 Getting 1 80 GHz 240 MB of RAM Started Identikit we will assume your hardware has been verified as compatible and a refund will not be possible Other hardware issues The following points relate to known problems with some PCs If you do not understand them please seek the assistance of a technician e Onsome older PCs the USB sockets may be disabled in the BIOS Please ensure they are enabled e Some machines will randomly cut off the power to the USB sockets Please ensure Power Grown Ups is disabled in the BIOS e Viatech chipset known problems Please visit www usoman
94. 5 Chapter 10 REDON S acri a eden Pocatencnten ene nese neuednednetnensentete 246 ACCESSING ROD OMS ecne tere ieecs Matec ene Pein eins eiecie shee 246 How do I VIEW reporto sansene a E ated 246 Chapter 17 Label PrNicscsosg a e a 248 TecNNICalIDIOrMaU ON ise Eaa 248 Whar WIM tabel PRIN GO serere a 248 WicmpornnNters WIN IEAW ORIG ON Zsisiraaene a at ooe teat fleets ai eeateta 2 aus at hiesieat fleet ai onaeetetecant 248 Which labels sho ld l DUV scci scsscocehscossvets cei uechs denieuks ieidesbuccevacesdeieahsceiieeesaciedseeiveatsandes 248 PRIMING EAD CIS cicero tetas ae caer a eee eee eas 249 How do print library Cards for borrowers ccccceccceeecceeeceeeecaeeeseeeeaeeeseueeseeeseueeseeesanes 249 Contents viii How do I generate new or existing barcode labels for resources and borrowers 250 HOW dO I OMMUDOOK laDElS ornina aiheec iat esdede al decadetdci ar deeat iat ie 253 Chapter 18 StOCKCHECK ninrin o aaa 256 ADOUTSTOCKONECK rare wa nce a T A a eee 256 Creating a New StockChe ck iscsi 257 Scanning resources into StOCKCHECK ccccccceececeeeecceeeeceeeeeeeceseusessueeeseueesseeeeseeeessaees 261 How can search for resources in StOCKCNECK 0 cceeccceeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeessneeess 265 How do download data from a portable barcode reader cccceccceeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 267 How do edit a previously started StOCKCNECK cccccececeeceseeeeeeeeceee
95. 5 2010 Completed Not Checked ae O 9 Oa bs Print Flagging Check Un check Remove Bulk Scan Download Complete Lists the resources you have checked or scanned Checked Items Missing Items All Items Checked Date Time Resource Type Barcode Title Author Class Media Location Recycled Date Missing Description Stock Check 05 May 2010 Checked lo F sd Lists resources Created 05 05 2010 Completed Not Checked which have not yet 1 Oo sore Ff S4 been checked or Print Flagging Check Un check Remove Bulk Scan Download Complete scanned Checked Items Missing Items All Items Resource Type Barcode Title Author Class Media Location LJ 10013 Best Friends Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library gt 2554 Best Friends Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio English Department CJ 10047 Devil s Toenail The Prue Sally Fiction Audio Library CJ 10048 Diamond Girls The Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library GJ 10020 Girls In Tears Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library CJ 10050 Gruffalo Song And Other Songs The Donaldson Julia 782 742 Audio Library 15001 Half Moon Investigations Colfer Eoin Fiction Audio Library m 10002 Hat Full Of Sky A Pratchett Terry Fiction Audio Library Please Note The Missing Items screen only shows the resources which you have chosen to StockCheck and which haven
96. 5060 records Flagged Only When Flagging is selected it appears highlighted as shown here Sq Local intranet 232 UJ mis A Print icon under the Records tab on the Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data To print the list of Flagged items click on the right of the screen Barcede Class Author Hoots wa YE te 009531 297 Macdonald Fiona 16Th Century Mosque Paperback Borrowers gt 000166 909 62 Hills Ken 1340s The Hardback Click Print to print gt 001054 973 Steedman Scott 19th Century Frontier Fart Hardback Q 006560 821 Andrew Sarah Editor 2001 A Poetry Odyssey Paperback l a list of the flagged records Resources Kennedy Ludovic 10 Rillington Place Paperback Tutor Groups Currem Loans Past Loans ad WZ Reservations Statement Reviews Sd Loca in 2 February 2000 Elone Flagging using the Barcode Reader There may be times when you wish to flag using the barcode reader e g selecting a number of resources which require deletion from the system Click on the icon Flagging under the Tools tab on the right of the screen and select flagging by barcode reader The flagging by barcode reader window will appear Scan your resources and click Apply MIDNIGHT FOX THE Byars B Delete SINGER TO THE SEA GOD Alcock V Delete ASK ME NO QUESTIONS Bevan C Delete Click Apply to show only the scanned resources on the main resource table Junior Librari
97. 8 Reservations m Is How do I automatically delete reservations When a resource is reserved the reservation will stay on the resource record until it s issued to the person who reserved it You can set Junior Librarian net so that reservations over a certain period of days are automatically deleted From the menu bar at the top of the screen click on Settings and then Reservations Database Schedule Modules Tools Security Settings Help Author Title SEDER RUFUS BUTLER GALLOP DANIELS LUCY WHALE IN THE Module Settings gt Barcodes Junior Liprarian Data Tidy Fieids ALMOND DAVID CLAY Language Borrowers f SYARSB TAROT SAYSB page Views Br JENNINGS P PAW THING TH Restrictions Click U TALES OF A FQ Tutor Groups ajara n SP PAW THING aai Settings DEARY TERRY GHOST FOR SA RAAN Reservations DONALDSON JULIA ss cHocoLATe my PE GC CurrentLoans ROWLING JK HARRY POTTER RE 2i DEARY T DIARY OF A MU I General SHAN DARREN LAKE OF SOULS THE PastLoans nati ROALD TAPE A181 THE TWITS Enter the number of days You can also stop reservations being made for resources which aren t on loan If you want to do this place a tick in the box Click Save Enter the number of days here General Delete reservations older than 28 Jays Tick here to stop Stop reservations for on shelf resources reservations to Reprint reservations for resources which resources which alrea
98. 8 00 Tutor Groups News Top Ten Resources 02 03 2010 09 11 09 03 2010 08 00 gt SMS Processing Schedule 04 03 2010 13 00 Current Loans To schedule this task to run on a regular basis highlight the task and click on P Edi Modify settings as required and click Save when complete Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 289 Chapter 19 Third Party Products Details Description End Date 03 03 2020 End Time 00 00 Exception Details To run SMS Reminders once a week change Interval Type to Interval Period 4 Set required Week and ensure Interval Type Week Interval Period is Wee Last Run set to 1 Run Now Fj Start Date 03 03 2010 Start Time 13 00 v Start Date and Start Time How do I check if the messages have been sent successfully View the SMS Log by navigating to Database Logs SMS as shown below Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 290 Chapter 19 Third Party Products m Is Dalabase Schedule Modules Resources Borrowers Tutor Groups Curreri Loans al Past Loans Book of the Wi Reservations Statement e Keeping Reviews New Resource t News Top Ten Reso ja Software Licenses intake Processing Sche Floor Phan Custom Catalogue b h Audit Log Lookup Maintenance Prim Exit This will display a list of SMS messages with the status of each along side Status
99. ATERS J CHISHOLM J ASIMOV BELLAMY D LOGVINOFF A CHINERY M Security Settings Help Click Settings and then Language Page Views Restrictions Reservabons Reviews BOTANIC MAN ANIMALS ON THE MOVE WILD FLOWERS The Language screen will then appear Under Installed Languages you will see a list of languages which are included in Junior Librarian net As you can see from the screenshot below only English is listed If your school is based overseas you will more than likely have more than one installed language on the operating system Select the Language under the Installed Languages heading that you want to change the field s for and then click on Modify rs Language Lists the languages currently installed in Junior Installed Lanquages Junior Librarian net User Guide System Default Language English All Languages Abkhazian Afar Afnkaans Akan Albanian Amharic Arabic Aragonese Armenian Assamese Avaric Avestan Version 11 4 Save Cancel Click the arrow to change the system default language Click Modify to change the fields for the highlighted language 196 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis At the top left of the screen under the Section drop down list you can select which section of Junior Librarian net you wish to change the fields for To change Field Names make sure this has been selected X Selec
100. Advanced Cumeri Losna Statement Reservations Past Loans Issue Dale Return Date Tike Author Chass 17 10 2007 1771072007 What S Happening To Me Macmillan P 177102007 17702007 What S Happening To Me Macmillan P 5 Lists the 77102007 17 0 2007 What S Happening To Me Macmillan P 612 25102007 Tape A178 The Enormous Crocodile Dahl Roald Fiction r r h esources t e 25 10 2007 ZpS Apollo Ridley Philip Ficton bo rrower has 7A072007 177102007 What S Happening To Me Macmillan P 612 PAO2007 30 10 2907 What S Kappening To Me Macmillan P 612 taken out in the past Q Q Q PT Page I oft 7 items y OoOo Save Close Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 97 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S Custom Fields How do I create my own custom fields You may find when adding your resources borrowers or tutor groups that a particular field isn t available for you to add information to In this case you can create your own Custom Fields From the menu bar at the top of the screen click on Settings and then Fields Database Schedule Modules Tools Secunty Senngs Help Ootabase ERA Resources Barcode Class Author a Click the Fields Resources x 1745 574 GILMAND tab fee 1747 574 GILMAND amp gt 1748 574 CARTERG Tetor Groups gt 1750 574 WATERS J ANDS La gt 1751 574 CHISHOLM J Current Loans 2 s su asovi ets gt 1754 574 BELLAMY D BOTANIC MAN Past Loans WZ 1755 591 LOGVINOFFA animal
101. All Records will appear click on All Records Now follow the instructions below to import the file From the menu bar at the top of the screen click on Database and then Intake Database Schedule Modules Tools Click on Database j 1745 574 GILMAN and then Intake 1747 574 GILMAN 1748 574 CARTEF 1750 574 WATER 1751 574 CHISHO 1753 574 ASIMO Lookup Maintenance 1 54 574 BELLAN Print 1755 591 LOGVIN Ext 1757 582 CHINER The Intake screen will then appear Click on Import from the Records tab on the right of the screen aes i TE i i i i a9 Heed vor O 2 O 5 3 xe O i i jole ji Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 92 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S Click Browse and select the location of the student file Once the location of the file is showing in the Filename box make sure you have the correct file type selected before clicking Import NB A very important detail to remember is if your csv file from SIMS NET has quotation marks on either side of each data entry you must select Sims net Quoted or you may end up with duplicated tutor groups If your csv file x from SIMS NET Please select a file type is quoted then detect sure you select ae 2 Format select the H oenix Sims net RM Integris location of the Quoted SEEMIS student file ims Net Quoted Sims Net Filename B 7
102. Armstrang i O86 043 O44 Matthew Stephens 334 155 370 Tabo Mwiko How do I generate new or existing barcode labels for resources and borrowers Within Grown Ups open the Modules menu from the top menu options Place your mouse over Labelprint to expand the sub menu From the sub menu click on Generate Barcodes Securty Setti Click on Generate Card Print Barcodes to print barcodes for your resources Generate Barcode Labels al Ci as me MAAN ki OD Le i Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 250 WV Chapter 17 Label Print m iS On the Generate Barcodes screen below there is the option to choose From which barcode number you would like to begin printing The amount of Pages you would like to print What Label Style you would like to choose To tick Unused number only which will print brand new numbers not yet on the system or to leave it un ticked so you may print existing numbers on your system There is even the option to Include School Name Settings Tick this option to Include a Click Generate School Name Pages 1 to generate Label Style Avery Mini Laser Labels L7651 the barcodes El Unused number only P Include School Name al Options Generate Close We strongly recommend that in the Label Style box you select Avery Mini Laser Labels L7651 Shown below is the Options screen It is quite similar to that of the Card Print screen Page 215 in the
103. Class Author ee Current Loans 1745 574 GILMANI 1747 574 GILMANL 1748 574 CARTER 1750 574 WATERS 1751 574 CHISHOL 1753 574 ASIMOV I 1754 574 BELLAMY 1755 591 LOGVING 1757 582 CHINERY 2 i758 582 WILSONI Highlight the floor plan record you want to edit and then click Edit under the Records tab on the right of the screen Highlight the z EZ floor plan you d like to edit p ma apt x f TEL l 31 i iq i ul or jiji j A R erar Posey birar 0 ak lf you want to simply change the name of a floor plan type the new name in the Description box at the top of the screen and then click Save Junior Librarian net User Guide Computers ened You are here Version 11 4 Type the new floor plan name here T7 SY mis Chapter 4 Creating My Library lf you have made changes to your floor plan image and want to update the one which is stored in the floor plan record highlight the floor plan record from the list in the Floor Plan screen and click Edt Click Browse at the bottom of the screen and select the location of the updated floor plan image Once the location has been specified click Update Description Text Sook Floor Plan Er You are here Fiy Pan Click Browse to select the location of the updated floor plan Click Update to import the floor plan Documents and SetlingshelerOes
104. Click Edit to Highlight weet mond Om cin ST es te err aaj view the the review _ ae won go gg sasas roe you want to sn eana T ine T E O O O details Footbal A iation Soccer MALADI 4ANDERTON Tia yea iak approve Core So Local mtraret How do approve a review Before the review can be seen by anyone else the librarian has to check it for content and then approve it Highlight the review you want to view and then either double click your mouse or click A Edt under the Records tab on the right of the screen When you are happy with the review tick Approved at the bottom left of the screen and then Save 4 v jA D 7 U a Ezan w cas Ge ye Tick Approved PUT TA Click Save to wee allow everyone to when you are happy with the review Revi Written By Travis ANDERTON 7WTL 3 Sa a view the review in found this book very intersting Enquiry 2 0000 Ban Sen com You can delete a review if for example a borrower writes one which is either unsatisfactory or is for the wrong resource Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 157 W Chapter 9 Reviews mMm iS How do delete a review From the Reviews screen highlight the review you want to delete and then click Remove under the Records tab on the right of the screen Once a review has been removed it gets placed in the Reviews Recycle Bin To access this click on the icon under the Records tab on the
105. Default v Use this facility to create alternative views of the data LO you sre currently viewing You can change the fields Close colours 4nd fonts amongst other things The list of books which have quizzes is then shown along with the Book Level provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited Barcode Class Author ie 13 475 Fiction Biyene A Wily The Charme TB o ee Shows the Book 13 gt 435 Fiction Browne A Wily The Charme 200814 13 3637 Fiction Brans A Wily The Champ NB Level 15 i33 Fiction Browne A Wily And Hugh 20 fi a 15 474 Fiction Browne A Wily And Hugh 20054 I we Ito Grows fig ziza Fiction Friel M Felix On The Move X548 Romae gt 18 n Fiction Pauw k Captan Teachurn S Guned Treasure 237 Q copy tie 2 3672 Fiction Lewis K Emmas Lamb m aw 2 aaa Fiction Browne Anthony Wily The Were Dus J Bp 2 25 6412 Fiction Mcnaughton C Boo xww amp Pee Past Loans 25 sos Faction Nicholl H Meg And Mog 2161 m Sot a 25 on Fiction Blume J The One In The Middle is The Green Kangaroo mon jf Geaa 2 24 4456 Fiction Jennings P Come Back Gizmo 2002 Tets g Reservations 26 r Sy Fiction Jennings P Gizmo Agan The wo bs EET amp 26 4467 Fiction Jennings P Gizmo Agan The 20002 ews Sunsonens 27 a7 Fiction krpey R Desperate For A Dog W76 55 L ser 27 4709 Fiction Stine RL Don t Go To Steep Goosebumps 20062 do ream 2 27 4457 Fiction Jennings
106. Depending on what is selected they will need to enter either their Barcode or Username to log in Login Barcode Username Please enter your barcode number to login The My Books screen is displayed below This screen contains all Current Loans and Past Loans relating to that student i User CINDY HULSE Wee Free Men Just In Case Harry Potter amp Sony Camera Print All The The Goblet Of F Drag resources into the Reserve bin to reserve them Click on All to show all books click on Current to show current loans click on Past to show past loans As students obviously cannot reserve their Current Loans the best way to make reservations through this page is to click on Past to display Past Loans and then drag the desired resource into the Reserve treasure chest Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 152 Chapter 8 Reservations m S How do I reserve a resource for a borrower It is only possible for you to reserve a resource for a borrower by logging in as the borrower themselves and following the steps above Managing Reservations How do I view reservations To access the reservations database click the ie icon from the tool bar on the left of the screen Reservations Database Schedule Modules Tools Security Settings Help Database o JJ OON VQ CSTO w Page 1 of 1 33 records Author Title Date Reserved Surname Forename Group Name Available Copies Resources SEDER RUFUS BUTLER GAL
107. ET e Pox va Oe Type History Piz H AC Pecna da s Pon an ia Fiction here and Tix embe Arei J em n min sim i pate then click Go eu October the 7 wy ais 4 October ng Gn Pre fth Center J ton gt 1s 76 Bat ont e Euwe O nowo h n ISEE D aa Vv cee yi Tea E t 7 a selon pe A gt w Sy Pe ues 19 IN 1 katui Prine ex tA d Fuggay gt 208 ry Pis Ws Page viena A x 4 S ver x j Tar F340 x Kes tal ez rhe L ite yi gt Sal sek For a list of the default search fields please see the beginning of this section Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 225 WW Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data mM is How do I use advanced search The Advanced Search option enables you to perform a more detailed search of your library data using Boolean logic Boolean logic uses the words and and or to allow you to perform more complex searches of your library data To access the Advanced Search click on Advanced Search at the top right of the screen Click on Advanced Search here Canton Loans gt P 2 t sP 10 t Paperback Past Loans a3 Feet sP 10 Pacerbach Ta gt 3 nS Mea 4 amaa 100 Greatest mentio Resorvimlers 529954 100 Greatest twertior ts 103172 100 Greatest inventio IS i339 100 Greatest inertio i2 10 atest meren 2 112223 100 Greatest inventions Reviews 12908 100 Geeatest in Jj IQ Hestest y 3 25 aD Polad Mich 100 Great
108. F WOODLAMI 1751 574 CHISHOLM J BIOLOGY Current Loans a Click Add Edit Click Add to adda Delete new group Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 201 Chapter 12 Security mis In the Description box type a description for the group you are creating e g Staff You ll see there are two tabs Database and Commands The Database tab lists each table in the Grown Ups section For each table listed on the left select the permission you want it to have No Access means the button is removed from the screen completely so whoever belongs to this security group won t see it Read Only means the edit button on the right hand side will change to a show button and they can only view a record s information Read Write means they can view and edit a record For example if you don t want this security group to have access to Current Loans highlight Current Loans from the list and then select No Access If you want them to be able to see Current Loans but not be able to make any changes select Read Only Database Description Staff Commands H I Borrowers ao Classifications No Access Class Colour Code O read ae Current Loans eum Bn J Custom Catalogue ao Data Cleanse Replacements O Remove ao Data Cleanse Remove Ocreate HE Floor Plan O Delete jj REE O owner H Marc Tags News Type a description for the new group here
109. From the Floor Plan drop down menu select the floor plan that you want to add the resources to e g Fiction x Fioce Plan Floor Plan Fiction Floor Plan X i Fiction Floor Plan on Fiction Floor Plan Select the floor plan that you d like to add the resources to Study Area ee wT ee 4 e e 2 H Non Fiction z o O o Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 75 i Naw Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S Place the mouse pointer at the location of the item and click A red flashing beacon will now appear denoting the position of the item Click Apply to save the location Floor Plan Floor Plan Fiction Floor Plan hd T Pe 3 p 3 ig Computers Librarian enema You are here Click your mouse at the location of L Fiten e the resources a a LC Fiho Entrance j 4 Click Yes to update the resources location e Update 2703 records You will then be taken back to the main Resources screen Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 76 Chapter 4 Creating My Library How do I edit a floor plan record mis From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Database and then Floor Plan Select Database and then Floor Plan Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by h EPLENE schadula Modules Tools ie Renouroe a i Tutor Groups Barcode
110. Getting Started This chapter introduces you to Junior Librarian net The Introduction section gives a brief overview of how Junior Librarian net runs how to get help should you need it and also how to feed back any comments and suggestions for ways to improve Junior Librarian net The Prerequisites section tells you what you need in order to run Junior Librarian net successfully on your computer Included in this section is information on installing the hardware plugin which enables you to use hardware other than the standard barcode reader with your Junior Librarian net software You do not need to install any additional software to enable hardware such as the IdentiKit to work with Junior Librarian net once you have installed the hardware plugin Introduction About Junior Librarian net Junior Librarian net is a web based library system which is accessed via a web browser The web browser accesses a web server which hosts your Junior Librarian net website The library database is held on a separate SQL server which gives you a robust and manageable database storage solution The aforementioned server s are administered by Micro Librarian Systems leaving you the easy task of simply accessing and administering your own Junior Librarian net library system via the Internet Obtaining Technical Support Our friendly dedicated team are always on hand to offer clear step by step expert advice and assistance by phone fax or email whenever y
111. Guest Past Loans 12007 OUP OUP Guest J Reservations 2007 But but Guest D Review l 2007 of of Guest News 2007 Macdonald Macdonald Guest HEE intone a cd CD Guest a Poor Pen 2007 Macro Macro Guest 2007 Mackey Mackey Guest y2007 Xi x Guest By Audit Log Coi col Guest Select Database D Output 2007 DfEE DEE Guest L k CAPONE kaz Guest ookup Classifications Guest Maintenance and Marc Tags then Data Cleanse TE Remove Guest 12 06 Class Colour Code sm Guest 12 06 2007 gcse GCSE Guest 12 06 2007 Xv XV Guest I2IARHNNT7 Yii Yill Guect Date Cleanse Replacements Data Cleanse Remove Paper Size The Data Cleanse Remove screen will then appear This will be empty if you haven t already added any words Click the add icon under the Records tab on the right of the screen Type in the word you want to be removed and then Click Save Repeat this for each new word you want to be removed X Type in the word that you want to word poo remove then click m Details Save Please Note When you add a word to Data Cleanse Remove e g Poo the system will only remove the exact word Poo If the word Pooh is entered or any deviations including abbreviations and punctuation marks the system won t remove this word Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 217 WD mis The word will now be listed in the Data Cleanse Remove database where you can edit o
112. I LL LL Time stamp Word Replace With Us 12 06 2007 AS level AS Level Select Settings and then Data O 12 06 2007 O U P OUP Gul Fields Borrowers 1206 2007 But but Gul T Language Tidy 12 06 2007 of of G Page Views 6g 12 06 2007 Macdonald Macdonald G Restrictions 12 06 2007 cd CD G Tutor Groups 42 06 2007 Macro Macro a 2 12 06 2007 Mackey Mackey G 12 06 2007 Xi x G Current Loans 42 06 2007 Coi col G 2i 12 06 2007 DfEE DEE 12 06 2007 RAC RAC Guest PastLoans 42 06 2007 1900 s 1900s Guest 7 12 06 2007 Xviii XVIII Guest 12 06 2007 A amp C Black A amp C Black Guest The Data Tidy screen will now appear Using the arrow at the end of the Field tab select the first field that you d like Data Cleanse Replacements to apply to In the screenshot below the field selected is Artist You then need to place a tick in the Apply data cleanse replacements box Repeat this process by selecting each field from the drop down list and then placing a tick in Apply data cleanse replacements When you have finished click Close Please Note The available fields in the Field drop down menu will differ according to the screen you are in The fields in the Resources screen will differ from those in the Borrowers screen A Use the drop down Field Artist vi arrow to select the Options field you d like to C Do not tidy apply data cleanse O all upper case replacements to All lower cas
113. If the letter appears in a different place on each barcode a separate mask will need to be set up accordingly For example 123A4 12B34 2345V Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 35 WwW Chapter 3 Settings m l S What does Returning the Value do On the screen when you are creating a new mask there is an option you can tick called Return the Value By placing a tick in this box you are simply instructing the system to look at the scanned barcode and it will return the value of that barcode For example If you scan in the 6 digit barcode 000123 it will simply return 123 as this is the value of the barcode Please Note If you have converted to Junior Librarian net from Junior3 there will already be a tick in the Return the Value box If you are a new customer the Return the Value box will be empty lf you are unsure about creating or editing barcode masks please consult the MLS Help desk What does the Modification Mask do The modification mask enables you to control how barcodes are stored and searched within Junior Librarian net Please consult the MLS Help desk for more information Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 36 Chapter 3 Settings m l S Junior Librarian It is within Settings Junior Librarian that you choose what options you wish to be made available within Circulate By ticking Allow keyboard input you give the option of typing in the book and reader barcodes as well as scan
114. LIAMS B 822 DAHLR 822 DAHLR 822 DAHLR 822 DAHLR 822 DAHLR 822 DAHLR Fiction APPS ROY Fiction APPS ROY Fiction APPS ROY Fiction APPS ROY Fiction UMANSKY K Fiction UMANSKY K Fiction UMANSKY K 904 JENNINGS P 904 JENNINGS P 535 LLOYD G Fiction RUSHTON R Fiction RUSHTON R Help Title GULLIVER S TRAVELS NEV S BIG DAY NEV S BIG DAY NEV S BIG DAY PIANO THE MOUSEHOLE CAT THE MOUSEHOLE CAT THE MOUSEHOLE CAT THE MOUSEHOLE CAT THE MOUSEHOLE CAT THE MOUSEHOLE CAT THE DRUMMING IN THE SKY FUTURE TELLING LADY THE MICKEY MOUSE IN COLOUR MICKEY MOUSE IN COLOUR MICKEY MOUSE IN COLOUR MACBETH THE PLAY MACBETH THE PLAY MACBETH THE PLAY SONIC THE HEDGEHOG ADVENTURE GAMEBOOK 1 METAL CITY MAYHEM CRYSTAL PRISON THE EXPLORING WAR AND WEAPONS JAMES AND THE GIANT PEACH A PLAY JAMES AND THE GIANT PEACH A PLAY JAMES AND THE GIANT PEACH A PLAY JAMES AND THE GIANT PEACH A PLAY JAMES AND THE GIANT PEACH A PLAY JAMES AND THE GIANT PEACH A PLAY TWITCHES AT SCHOOL TWITCHES AT SCHOOL TWITCHES AT SCHOOL TWITCHES AT SCHOOL PONGWIFFY AND THE HOLIDAY OF DOOM PONGWIFFY AND THE HOLIDAY OF DOOM PONGWIFFY AND THE HOLIDAY OF DOOM SHIPWRECKS SHIPWRECKS OPTICS HOW COULD YOU DO THIS TO ME MUM HOW COULD YOU DO THIS TO ME MUM Sumame Khan Johnston Talbot Rawcliffe Waring O brien O brien O brien O brien O brien O brien Bulcock Waring Almond Morris Everett
115. LOP 45 04 2009 Hulse Cindy STAFF 1 IR DANIELS LUCY WHALE IN THE WAVES 16 04 2009 O brien Andy STAFF 4 Borrowers ALMOND DAVID CLAY 30 03 2009 Moseley Emma 7COL 2 BYARS B TAROT SAYS BEWARE 16 04 2009 Hussain Tahir 8JJR 1 Ava i la b l e co pies d j S p l ays rte JENNINGS P PAW THING THE 30 03 2009 Moseley Emma 7COL 1 Tutor Groups BLUME TALES OF A FOURTH GRADE NOTHING 23 04 2009 Crutchley Lucy STAFF 0 how ma ny copies of this JENNINGS P PAW THING THE 18 05 2009 Abasss Mohammeddd 10AOR 1 DEARY TERRY GHOST FOR SALE 20 03 2009 O brien Andy STAFF 2 resource are out on loan A h DONALDSON JULIA CHOCOLATE MOUSSE FOR GREEDY GOOSE 30 03 2009 Moseley Emma 7COL 1 resource Snowing ROWLING J K HARRY POTTER amp THE GOBLET OF FIRE 18 05 2009 Abasss Mohammeddd 10AOR 1 Resources shown in a DEARY T DIARY OF A MURDER 16 04 2009 Hussain Tahir 8UUR 0 in Black means it s SHAN DARREN LAKE OF SOULS THE 18 05 2009 Abasss Mohammeddd 10AOR 1 black show as havin g 0 DAHL ROALD TAPE A181 THE TWITS 06 04 2009 Hulse Cindy STAFF 4 l i not on loan and is GILMAN D life on the seashore 16 04 2009 Campbell Jody 7WIL 1 Available copies this ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL BIOGRAPHY AND MUCH MORE 23 03 2009 Smith Jonathan 7PTR 0 available to issue ROYSTON A TRANSPORT 06 04 2009 Crutchley Lucy STAFF 1 means 0 co pies are o ut RIORDAN J HERCULES 16 04 2009 Hussain Tahir 8JJR 1 ROYSTON A TRANSPORT 06 04 2009 Hulse Cindy STAFF 1 on loan BROWNE A WILLY THE WIZA
116. Leaders Mooney Brian Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 100 Most Beautiful Cities of th Benthues Anne Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 1000 Great Lives Law Jonathan Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 1000 Years of Famous People Rennison Louise Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 100 Famous Paintings Steele Philip Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 100 Greatest Disasters Pollard Michael Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 Vaizey Marina Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 100 Ideas for Teaching Citizer Leier Dr Manfred Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 Davies lan Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 100 Wonders of the World Martin Linda Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 Benthues Anne Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 1000 Things You Should Know Farndon John Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 101 School Assembley Storie Rooyackers Paul Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 1066 A Decisive Battle Tames Richard Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 1066 A Decisive Battle Tames Richard Carr Frank Version 11 4 84 4 A Sign at me 1 December 1955 Rosa Park 100 Most Beautiful National P 1000 Makers of the Millenniun 101 Drama Games for Childre Quiz No 0 Tempest Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 1 December 1955 Rosa Park Steele Philip Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 100 Greatest Medi
117. Michaet Rover x McKay Himy Safy s angel f Malone Geoffrey Crocodile River Paperback ena Handford Martin Where s Waly Stitched a Wishinsky Frieda Just Mabel Stitched Sarita Dsevels Lucy Seals on the sled Paperback Tets Grows Heexiford Martin Where s Waly now Stitched e Beck tan The threes little pigs Stitched 2 a amp total of 26 record s have been imported cut of a Past Loans sree porte Ste the error bog for informamon an gt Resan vnica 2 Fisher Catherine The Lammas feld Paperback eat Sharratt Mick Monday runday Limp Sameer batson Ea Dial a ghost Papesback g Atiberg Janet Funnytones Stitched gt Amand David Skellig Paperback Roens Malone Gootrey Elephant Ben Paperback Graham Bob Jethro Byrde fairy child Hardback Hayes Sarah Tris is the bear andthe picnic unch Stiched Handford Martm Where s Wally in Hollywood Stitched Rodgers Frank The Witch s Dog andthe crystalball Stitched Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 279 mis Chapter 19 Third Party Products LinksPlus What is LinksPlus LinksPlus is a comprehensive directory of the websites most frequently requested by learners when researching in the library To purchase LinksPlus you ll need to contact Carel Press either by email to info carelpress com or telephone 01228 538928 How do I import a LinksPlus WebLinks file Make sure you are in the Resources screen From the menu bar at the top of the screen click on Tools and
118. MmINdErS eee een e eee chee etr ene tenet eter Sonnets a le seer Susp eees a a 49 GeNErAL oscaeer ences eased ec te cee wees O E E aoe tencecunerneecaneencerecst 50 internace SWIICNINO secasiss create bis netrsascisinaenals Wane eeaaseess E E 51 Chapter 4 Creating My Library sssansnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennen 52 CataloGuing RESOURCES iaicisoscets tens seccisodccassnsietasansetevenniadatansctavensi stevens ddavensswcouanteutdbectentesas 52 Where do put the barcode labels cccccccccsecccseeeceeeceeseceeeceeeeceuseseeeseusessuesseeessueensss 52 Where should I start CalaloOQuUIng t c 2ic2xe2et2laues aibie tices oteeh aicisteat eles aioie ital orinta aie cecaete saul 53 How do enter a new resource onto the system ccc ccecc cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeseeeeeeeaeeeaees 53 FIOW OOl CalalOGUC ai BOOK saz aotizah yaoi tra esas cations vated ets a wastes a seat 55 What should do with school library service books cccceecceeeceeeeceeeeeeeseeeeaeeseeeenaees 56 How dolcatalogue a iM sie53 cient nds edie e E nase die E 56 How do catalogue hardware cccccccccsecceccceeeeceeeceucecseeceuceceueeseeessusesseeesueessusessessseeess 57 How do Catalogue live media cccecccsecceeeceeecceeeceuceceeeceuceceueeseuessusesseeeeueesueeseessaaeens 58 POW CO Cala OGUGINUSICG 7 nN 59 How do catalogue a musical INStTUMENT cccceeccseeeceeeeceeeeeeeeseeees
119. NBERG P Jenga Haig LIFE UA THE SEASHORE WILDLIFE OF FARMLAND THE WILDLIFE IN TOYS WILDLIFE OF WOODLANDS THE HOLOGY t5 THERE LIFE ON OTHER PLANETS BOTANIC MAN ANIMALS ON THE MOVE WILD FLOWERS LIFE OF PLANTS THE TREES TREES OF BRITAIN AND EUROPE BABY ANIMALS WILDLIFE IN TORS Hardback Library Hardback Library Hardback Library Hardback Library Hardback Library Hardback Library Paperback Library Hardback Library Hardback Library Hardback Library Hardback Library Hardback Library Hardback Library Hardback Library BUTTERFLIES OF BRITAIN AND EUROPE Hardback Library BUTTERFLIES AND MOTHS HSECTS HSECTS THAT LIVE IN COLOMES ANIMALS THAT LIVE IN SHELLS ANIMAL COMMUNICATION POLAR REGIONS THE CROCODILE AND THE ALLIGATOR EXPLORING UNDER THE SEA Junior Librarian net User Guide Hardback Library Hardback Library Hardback Library Hardback Library Hardback Library Hardback Library Hardback Library Hardback Library Version 11 4 Media Locabon URL lt lt lt _ 74 Page tof 287 6824 recorda Click More to access Page Views 186 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis The main Page Views screen will appear eS 9 Edit _ ath R l p Ce sources TEE i NN E cee A _ Paora New 3 g System Page View Copy B A Records __Delete Select 5 Books 5 nN on Default s Books never borrowed
120. Number Allovence Date Expires Click Save when you have finished Save Cancel Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 197 Chapter 12 Security m S Chapter 12 Security This chapter will explain how security in Junior Librarian net works It will also tell you how to set up different security groups as well as how to make sure that anyone who accesses Junior Librarian net is given the right permissions so that they can only access the areas which you want them to The Security section explains how User Manager and Group Manager work how to change the security restriction group for your borrowers and how to change your password Security When you first launch Junior Librarian net you will need to Log on This is so that the system knows who you are and what permissions to give you If you don t log on you will only have access to Enquiry Junior Librarian net security works similarly to Windows security in that each person who accesses the system belongs to a specific security group Initially so that you can access the Grown Ups side of Junior Librarian net you will need to use one of the default user manager logon details below Administrator The username is Administrator and the password is Microlib Librarian The username is Librarian and the password is Password NB Username and password are case sensitive Both of these default users are given maximum permission
121. ORE Details Advanced Loans Reservations Summari NM obes Photograph Linked tems Floor Plan Sumame Forename Group Name Date Reserved Campbell 16 04 2009 A full list of current reservations is displayed here ul 4 QVOM OF Page 1 of 1 1 records C Book of the Week Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 68 af Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S Summary The Summary tab shows a book summary from Discovery Online or any notes on the resource that you want others to be able to view Add any notes here that you Barcode 1 Title want to be Details Advanced Loans Reservations Summary Notes Photograph Linked Items Floor Plan seen by people Summary Public Notes using Enquiry Harry Potter can t wait for the start of the school year It is his fourth year at Hogwarts School of Witchcraft and Wizardry and there are spells to be learnt and Divination lessons sigh to be attended Harry is expecting these however other Add any notes you quite unexpected events are want anyone already on the march using the Grown Notes Ups section to see here Click Save when C Show Notes on Issue _ Show Notes on Return et vou have finished OVO C Book of the Week Public Notes allows you to write a note which is viewable by everybody who accesses the resource either via the Grown Ups section or Search For example you may want to let borrowers and staff know that the r
122. Pending Junior Librarian net is waiting to send message Sent Junior Librarian net has sent the message to Truancy Call Delivered Truancy Call have marked the message as sent Failed Message failed to Send Deliver ClickView What is ClickView Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 291 Chapter 19 Third Party Products m S ClickView is a 3 party software solution designed to assist learning in the classroom by providing a simple and complete solution for watching digital video and other digital media within a school ClickView allows teachers and Borrowers free access to all of the digital video resources in the ClickView library from any computer in the school removing the possibility of restrictions due to the availability of AV equipment Junior Librarian net software can now provide links to the videos from the Home Page simply by importing the ClickView data into Junior Librarian net For more information on ClickView please visit the following link http Awww cClickView co uk How do I Import ClickView into Junior Librarian net Log into Junior Librarian net and enter the Grown Ups area Go to Tools Import as shown below Security Tools Ei Circulate ye Flagging import lid Exp rt Quick Replace Add Keywords Book ofthe Week Fh Mewes yla Floor Pan ot Calendar Edt Pesranders Howsekeeping Select ClickView from the File Type list and click on Browse to b
123. RD 15 04 2009 Hulse Cindy STAFF 2 QTTRIDGE R ADVENTURE FILMS 23 03 2009 O brien Andy STAFF 0 SAL JACQUELINE GIRLS IN LOVE 08 04 2009 O neill Emma STAFF 8 BRITISH CANOE UNION KAYAK CANOEING 06 04 2009 Hulse Cindy STAFF 0 STINERL CRY OF THE CAT GOOSEBUMPS 18 03 2009 Potts Ben STAFF 2 TWIST C 1970 TAKE TEN YEARS 23 03 2009 O brien Andy STAFF 0 ADAMS RICHARD CHILDREN S VERSE 23 03 2009 Hussain Rusma 7PTR 0 HARGREAVES ROGER MR PERFECT 25 03 2009 Turer Gemma 7WTL 1 SHAKESPEARE W ROMEO amp JULIET THE PLAY 15 04 2009 Hulse Cindy STAFF 14 BURNARD D REVENGE OF THE KILLER VEGETABLES 10 04 2009 Khan Ajmal STAFF 1 GANERI A ANIMAL RIGHTS WHATS THE BIG IDEA 18 05 2009 Abasss Mohammeddd 10AOR 1 CAPP S LOOK AROUND LANCASHIRE 20 03 2009 O brien Andy STAFF 4 STRONG J MY DAD S GOT AN ALLIGATOR 16 04 2009 O brien Andy STAFF 1 CONRAD JOSEPH VICTORY 15 04 2009 Hulse Cindy STAFF 4 ANDREW K BEYOND THE ROLLING RIVER 20 03 2009 O brien Andy STAFF 0 How long are reservations listed in the reservations database Once the reserved resource has been issued to the borrower who reserved it it will be removed from the Reservations database How do I delete a reservation From the reservations screen find and click on the reservation you wish to delete and then click the Delete icon under the Records tab on the right of the screen Please Note You can t reserve items marked as Reference Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 153 Chapter
124. Resources 19 11 1998 03 12 1998 bas 01 12 1998 18 12 1998 Borrowers 19 11 1998 20 11 1998 42 01 1999 29 01 1999 rte 03 12 1998 03 12 1998 08 11 2005 23 11 2005 Tutor Groups 47 42 2001 25 08 2005 gt 25 08 2005 28 09 2005 04 11 2005 08 11 2005 CurrentLoams 43 49 2005 04 11 2005 2 28 09 2005 13 10 2005 04 11 1998 17 11 1998 PastLoans 48 95 2007 11 06 2007 WZ 43 10 1998 03 11 1998 05 11 1998 03 12 1998 Reservations 02 07 1998 07 07 1998 09 03 1999 23 03 1999 a gt 23 03 1999 12 04 1999 Reviews 02 07 1998 08 09 1998 02 07 1998 08 07 1998 20 01 1999 03 02 1999 19 03 1999 13 04 1999 17 03 1999 14 04 1999 03 11 1998 19 11 1998 23 02 1999 23 02 1999 24 11 1998 09 12 1998 02 02 1999 23 02 1999 11 03 1999 25 03 1999 10 11 1998 01 12 1998 26 01 1999 09 02 1999 15 10 1998 04 11 1998 24 03 1999 13 04 1999 12 11 1998 26 11 1998 20 10 1998 05 11 1998 02 07 1998 09 07 1998 22 01 1999 05 02 1999 13 11 1998 13 11 1998 17 03 1999 19 03 1999 26 01 1999 08 02 1999 15 10 1998 15 10 1998 Current page view All Records Fiction SWIFT J Fiction BARLOW STEVE Fiction BARLOW STEVE Fiction BARLOW STEVE 786 CROWD Fiction BARBER A Fiction BARBER A Fiction BARBER A Fiction BARBER A Fiction BARBER A Fiction BARBER A 821 BECHELY P Fiction BERRY J Fiction DISNEY W Fiction DISNEY W Fiction DISNEY W 822 SHAKESPEARE W 822 SHAKESPEARE W 22 SHAKESPEARE W oO Fiction WALLIS J Fiction JARVIS R 623 WIL
125. SMS log This means deleting entries in the log which are older than a certain amount of days The default is set to 365 Forms Biling Housekeeping Define sending time limits SMS account Days to truncate SMS log 365 LI Truncate sent C Truncate pending d Truncate failed C Truncate too expensive 4 The Define sending limits tab is used to define between which hours SMS Messages will be sent to Borrowers This is in place so that Borrowers don t receive text messages from the library in the middle of the night When setting these times remember to give the server enough time to go through all the SMS messages that need to be sent Forms Billing Housekeeping Define sending time limits SMS account Restrict SMS queuing to these time settings Earliest time 09 00 Latest time 21 00 i Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 285 Chapter 19 Third Party Products mis Lastly enter the SMS account settings which were provided from Truancy Call when the account was setup Without these settings SMS Messages will not work in the Junior Librarian net software Forms Billing SMS account settings SMS customer ID SMS account password a z Housekeeping Define sending time limits SMS account Save Close Once all these settings have been entered correctly click Save In order for SMS messages to be sent to borrowers they need to
126. Specify the maximum number of pages that you d like anyone printing from My Books to be able to print Click Save Enter the General number of Opac pages here Maximum printed records 60 amp Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 48 Chapter 3 Settings m S Reminders This page is where you can set some global settings for your reminders These include a default email address that will be used to send the emails a checkbox to enable the sending of emails and also the page orientation of the reminders From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Settings and then Reminders Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited Database Schedule Modules Tools Security settings Help Barcode Class Author Password Manager Module Settings Barcodes Resources X Es 1745 574 GILMAND Borrowers 1746 574 ANDERSON P Rr gt 1747 574 GILMAND Tutor Groups 1748 574 CARTERG gt gt 1750 574 WATERSJ Current Loans 2 DH s sa crustoum gt 1753 574 ASIMOVI Past Loans 74 gt 1754 574 BELLAMY D BOTANIC MAN Junior Librarian Data Tidy WINS AND M ND THE Page Views Restrictions Click on Settings and then Reminders Reservations Reviews Printing Reminders ER PLANE Recervatinnae e TEE a4 OWAAMOMEE A AMMMAAI Q AM THE Aarne Enter an email address from which your reminders
127. Third Party Products m Is The records will then be imported B Maneapement Microsott inte cl Resources Atho Fiction Burgess Melin Angel For May An a55 FIC Rai Bali Unjarranged Mariage 007878 323 092 Steele Philip 1 December 1955 Rosa Parks and her Protest for Civil Rights 008214 s Kennedy Ludowe 10 Rillington Place 002282 Fic Henry O 100 Selected Stories lojale gt 937 Macdonald Fiona 100 Things you should know about Ancient Rome 009231 769 09 Bailey Steve 100 Years of Physical Education 1699 1999 006764 749 32 Fiel Charlotte 1000 Chairs O1OMs 507 8 Singleton Glan M Maal Sei Crmvent Loans 007873 968 064 Malam Jd dela 007141 FIC FinnisA Me oe en j posse 49 Fiouaw gue the error len toy DANIEN Gh Spec records omi IED Hills Ken x lofej lt je 4 8 z B Tames R 000161 909 62 Campling Elizabeth 1970 s 000311 331 13 Hayek F A 1960 s Unemployment and the Unions 001064 973 Steedman Scott 19th Century Frontier Fort 008249 365 3 Macdonald Fiona 19th Century Radway Station 009241 820 914 Granstord Sandy 2001 a Joke Odyssey 006660 a21 Andrew Sarah Editor 2001 A Poetry Odyssey BH O01 745 4 McDermott Catherine th Century Design 009249 9739 Preston Daniel With Century Untied States History 000117 909 62 Adams Simon Ah Century a visual history 000693 94054 Whiting Charles 44 In Combat on the Westem Front from Normandy to the 010216 720 9 Kuhl
128. Type Film Criteria Allowance Video 1 Reservations 1 Click Save when you have finished Loan Period 7 RF v Save Close Click the arrows to select the resource type Fill in the allowances for this resource type Once you ve clicked Save the new resource type restrictions will be shown on the borrower restriction group A borrower who belongs to this restriction group will now have Maximum Allowance of 3 of which 1 can be a Film with a media type of Video Maximum Reservations of 3 of which 1 can be a Film with a media type of Video Loan Period of 14 except if they borrow a Film with a media type of Video where this will be 7 Description The resource Maximum Allowance type restriction shows here Loan Period OVO Aad Edit Delete Borrowers Maximum Reservations 3 3 14 Resource Type Restrictions pa Page 1 of 1 1 tems Save Close ns Shows the standard borrower restrictions for this restriction group If you delete the resource type restriction the standard restrictions will apply to all resource types Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 121 w Chapter 6 Restrictions m S Please Note When setting the Maximum Allowance and Reservations on the Resource Type Restrictions the numbers cannot add up to more than the standard borrower maximum allowances For example if your standard maximum allowance is 3 any res
129. V 11 4 Junior Librarian net User Guide Click on Other Libraries to visit MLSLibraries net and library catalogues outside of your school Click on Settings to choose from a Click in the quick Search selection of different icons and box to begin searching backgrounds log in required first for resources Other Libraries Settings Help Click Enquiry to browse through the library catalogue Click on Circulate to issue and return books Click on Reviews to write a descriptive review of a book you have borrowed Welcome to Junior Librarian If you are not sure what to do then click me Students and Librarians should click Log On to access other features available on an individual basis Click on Librarian only to go into the Librarian s management area of the system authorised log in required first Contents i Junior Librarian Net User Guide sroine andurasa ia aa a a e a a 1 MLS END USER LICENCE AGREEMENT 2 2 sscesseseecccensseececnnseececensseseeenasseenennssseeees 1 Chapter 17 Getting Started soisin aa a a daa a aaan 4 MIKOGUCHION a icccscesee ete eed awe ea eee cee tae 4 PAD OUT UMMOF ID FAN ANIC sce scence ciency resected ciel eclectic cia 4 Obtaining Technical SUDO OM osscacsccecsnnsceyasaccineesdadedscaccenanuasdeoanansovengeaseese cans ooeadageadseoacsogaatease 4 Comments and SUG SSN ONS ee ceetad chee creche aces ee a
130. ab To see the view straight away click on Select You can carry out any of the actions on the right of the Page Views screen by highlighting the view and then clicking on the action x Select any of these Edit actions once you ve General 2 Meas highlighted the view gt Books F M Copy Books Never Borrowed Ter Select Default Import Export i ion Cg Hardware Use this facility to create alternative views of the data Y you are currently viewing You can change the fields colours and fonts amongst other things Close Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 190 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis How do I set default views for my borrowers You can set up a system default view for each screen i e Resources Reviews Enquiry etc so that anyone who hasn t specified their own personal default views will see the ones that you ve specified when they view each screen Once they specify their own default views they will only see those From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Settings and then Page Views 1 Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited Database Schedule Modules Tools Secunly setings Help Barcode Class Author 1745 574 GILMAN D Select Settings and gt 1747 574 GILMAND 1D 1 then Page Views gt 1748 574 CARTERG 1750 574 WATERS
131. ade to ALL of your resource records not just the ones you have searched for In the example have decided that would like all resources which have the location of either Careers Room or Hall to be changed to Library initially searched my catalogue for all resources with either of these two location types You can see from the screenshot below by looking under Occurrence that 3 of my resources have a Careers Room location and two have the location of Hall Select the first location from the list that you want to change by clicking on it with your mouse Here have chosen Careers Room You ll see that in the Look For box Careers Room has appeared Now type the new replacement location that you want these resources to have in the Replace with box have chosen Library Click Replace The system will then find all of the resources with the location of Careers Room and replace it with the location of Library Repeat the process if you want to change any other locations x Select which Click here to Field Location ee ace d gt Range All records _ Filtered records nee the a Quic Quick Search type Replace to you wish to apply the POCANOA ECRERRCE change changes to Select the Science Lab 10 field data Server Room 14 you want to Special 3 replace Type the new replacement data here Click Replace when you have finished Shows the field data QQ Page 1 of 1 7 records you have chosen to TN
132. aight away or at the allocated time all of resources will be updated Once the update is complete the system will revert back to updating 200 resources at a time What happens if the Discovery Online update fails Discovery Online updates 200 resources each night If the update fails perhaps because the internet connection has timed out the update will start again It will continue to do this until all 200 records have been updated Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 170 Ww S Chapter 10 Maintaining My Library m Housekeeping What does housekeeping do Housekeeping runs automatically overnight and makes sure your days overdue days on loan and fine information is up to date You can view the progress of housekeeping by clicking on Schedule and then View Tasks from the menu bar at the top of the screen in Grown Ups The housekeeping task is shown here Unless the status says failed the task has run successfully Next Run and Last Run dates are a good indication of if itus Fa running nightly lent page vase AD Tei of naird vim Protected Moe GH Please Note If the loan and or fine information on your resources isn t up to date there may be a problem with the housekeeping task In this instance please ask your IT Technician to restart the MLS Scheduler Service on the IIS server If this fails contact the helodesk on 0161 449 9357 for support Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 171 Chapter
133. allowances For example you may have a restriction group for your staff borrowers and one for your standard borrowers You can give the staff restriction group more allowances than the borrowers As well as being able to set up restriction groups for your borrowers you can also set restrictions for your resource types e g Book and the different media types within the resource type e g Paperback If you have set various different restrictions for your resources media types and borrowers the system will compare the loan period which has been set for all 3 and will take the Lowest of them all This will be covered in greater detail later in this section Please Note There is a default restriction group set up when you first install Junior Librarian net This is called Normal and allows your borrowers to take out and reserve 3 resources for a maximum of 14 days Any existing borrower and any new borrowers who are added to Junior Librarian net will belong to the default security group initially You can then change the default restriction group once you have created it to your preferred group which will automatically change the restrictions for anyone who belongs to the default group How do I create my own borrower restriction groups The first thing you need to do is decide what restrictions you d like to have The simplest restriction is to create your borrower restriction groups and then assign your borrowers to those groups This means tha
134. ame Tutor Group Year Group ia Resources Roberts Georgie 11P 11 2 Griffin Hope TAL 11 ee ese Wiltsher Dean 7P 7 Lindsay Sophie 7R 7 Rr Olive Sophie 10L 10 Rees Chelseanne 8R 8 TE OSB Koll Luan mw 11 Stevens Mark aw 7 Percy Jennifer 410P 10 Fj Recycle Bin CurrentLoans E jider Jack 10R 10 N 2 Watson Robert OW 9 od Transfer Hind James 8E 8 PastLoans Rafeez Ravel 12CMM 12 7 Twigg Kerry 8P 8 Jakeman Gemma 135XR 13 Reservations Cresswell Lewis 9L 9 Ba Jay Harry 7P 7 Randle Chantelle 11 11 Statement Tomlinson Jack 9L 9 S Ward Richard 10L 10 Sanders Bethany 8R 8 Reviews Peterson Robert ayy 8 Riley Matthew 11E 11 Rix Georgia 13HB 13 Dunt Stephanie 12KD 12 Drysdale Ruth 125W 12 Imarni Pierre 12CMM 12 Raniga Ashil 13HB 13 Stonelake George 10E 10 3 Done 3 Local intranet Once in the record you can select whether the borrower is new to Junior Librarian net or if they are an existing borrower If they are an existing borrower simply place a tick in Existing Borrower The bottom section of the screen lists all of the borrowers in Junior Librarian net which share the same first two letters of the surname of the borrower you are importing Simply highlight the correct person from the list and click Import es Active Directory details a are given here a a ae Surnare Tutor Croup forename fee Group Dale at Sr Gander If the borrower is new A 7 Sa anagnert Syster IC Securty ID tick here Choose mpari mothad
135. an 1 p s Select who you want this reminder to always be sent to Once you ve chosen who you want the reminder to be sent to you need to choose how you want it to be sent Click on the drop down arrow next to Output to and select the format that you want the reminder to be sent in e g Email Select how you want the reminder to be sent Click Save when you have chosen the settings Please Note It s possible to override these settings when sending reminders to individual borrowers Please see section How do I print individual reminders Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 139 Chapter 7 Loans m S What happens if have specified the reminder to be printed o If you ve set the reminder to be printed a reminder PDF document will appear on the screen for you to then print out if you wish If you don t want to print the reminders at that time simply click the cross at the top right of the screen to close it Reminder PDF s which have been viewed and or printed are automatically moved to the Output Recycle Bin To print a reminder PDF click on Database at the top left of the screen and then Output A list of reminder PDF s will be available Find the one you want to print and then either double click your mouse over it or highlight it and click Edit under the Records tab on the left of the screen What happens if have specified a reminder to be printed and emailed lf you have set the rem
136. an BAL ae 7166 Aba Sahiba BOER B J130 Ahmet Kajes BHL 08 Ahmed Shamir burr i a J300 Aktar Mazmin BMYA B Note how after TH Akiri Jara ETFL Tuercas laiis a Seqeeh DER performing a search fora NG Ab Sama TRL l nno a Faza SL Year Group of 8 only eich u Seb BAHA a 7 g ri Am om R a borrowers with a 8 Year ect Use el Fg Alen Waconia BIRL B 3040 Alen Aalhorty BTL B g ms Memi Gma wR n Group are shown j Amn Das WEA i Reneia i507 Amin Fanah BMYA a eS IH Aiii Natasha BO i 30i Andeten Andey EYL 8 Panis 3001 Appleby Ress BOER a J112 nhai Zimi i ETL B 113 Aigh Shakeel EL Jiii Asghar Abbas BANA 6 TH Aghia Mohammad BATL B 7g5 Ashra da BAHL az AiE Fhad BAHL ai J11b Azad Mohammed BTL B H77 Bassler Law ETFL B ligi Barca Tanya BTL i 3a Gant Creariste BANA 6 3003 Baton Nana BAMA B 3184 Beanthieath Jorna BAHA 16 Bapa Sena RAHA 8 17 em Asha BTRL i a Hennati Karan STAFF 710 Bi Sia BO i Jiz20 Bi Saja BANAL a J121 Ai Stakena BERA i 3115 Bi Haalt BTRL B Hj Artivaatls Karsty BTL 2656 Bike Keit BANA i Current page vane Borrmevers of Trashed 15er Protected Mock CHH 100 Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 223 WW Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data mM 3 How is the search performed Not all fields are searched in the same way The Barcode and EAN ISBN fields are searched on an Equal to basis which means that it searches for the whole of the number and not part of it
137. an net User Guide Version 11 4 233 WW Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data mM is Page Views What is a View A View is a screen containing the fields and data of your choice The views both standard and ones you have created will vary depending on the database you are in The Page Views facility in Junior Librarian net allows you to customise the display in each of the databases by setting your own default view MLS have already set up a number of standard views within each database for you to utilise these are called System Page Views However you can create your own Views containing the fields and data you wish to display How do I create new views For information on how to create a new view see Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net section on Page Views Sorting Data How do sort the databases into a different order To sort any of the databases into a particular order click on the Column heading Example To sort the Class column into ascending order click on Class once To sort Class into descending order simply click on Class again Barcode Class Author Title Media 5125 Fiction Barlow Steve Nev S Big Day Paperback 1249 Fiction VVestall R Stones Of Muncaster Cathedral The Paperback 4355 Fiction Aiken R Necklace Of Raindrops Paperback 5365 Fiction Swift J Gulliver S Travels Hardback 20145 Fiction Mowll Joshua Operation Typhoon Shore Hardback 742 Fiction Le Guin U Tehanu The Last Book Of Earths
138. and editing the standard page views See How do create a new view Make the required changes to the view and then click Save To see the changes go into a borrower record and click on the tab you ve edited Description Category i Layout Available Fields Visible Fields Column Settings Borrowers ad Class 0 Caption Class i active Directory L Author x Title Alignment Lef ial Address 1 Date Reserved Address 2 HO Address 3 Address 4 o Address 5 HO Address 6 Z Balance E Ranner Background Colour lt Make the required Preview changes and then a O ccc Class Author Tille Date Reserved click Save Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 194 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis How do I change the column names in my page views Its possible for you to change how field names are displayed in your page views For example you may want the field Barcode to be displayed as Number From the Page View Edit screen highlight the field name in the Visible Fields list that you d like to change e g Barcode Under the Column Settings delete any text in the Caption box and type the new word you d like the field to be displayed as e g Number Repeat this for each field you d like to change and then click Save Type the new Peon e column name in yo the Caption box Available Fields Visible Fields
139. anguage r da aul Page Views Restrictions Reservations Reviews Printing Reminders General Use the Forms tab to choose Truancy Call SMS Provider from the Select SMS Provider drop down list Tick the boxes to enable the relevant SMS options e g SMS Reminders and SMS statements And choose a display name that the messages should appear to be from in this example the default value Library has been chosen Form Billing Housekeeping Define sending time limits SM5 account Select SMS provider Truancy Call SI Sender masks Reminders Library Enable SMS reminders Statement Library Enable SMS statements Reservations Library L Enable SMS reservations 4 Close Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 284 Chapter 19 Third Party Products m Is The billing tab allows the choice of whether the Borrowers should be billed for receiving SMS Messages Simply place a tick in the Charge borrower for sent SMS if Borrowers should be charged or leave blank if this is not required lf Borrowers are to be charged then the charges and maximum cost need to be set in the Charge per text message and Maximum message cost boxes Forms Billing Housekeeping Define sending time limits SMS account Billing options E Cha rge borrower for sent SMS Charge per text message 0 1 The Housekeeping tab is used to set preferences for truncating the
140. ans Housekhooping 1753 574 ASIMOV is there lt To mark weekends as closed click on the Close Weekends tab and then click Apply lf you want to mark days when the school is closed perhaps for an inset day or for your school holidays select the arrow at the end of the Set tab and select Close You ll then need to click on each day on the calendar that you want to mark as closed As you click on the day the field will change from white to pale blue To de select a day simply click your mouse over the day again and it will return to white Click Apply to save these settings Cal sidhi o al Close Weekends Clear All Current Year 2007 y Click here Set Close v g ip Close TE PE PrE P elalalniviairieiaisl gt Te te choose what ei Ww 3 F s simiriw FSiS MT mis FS miT WIT IF Click here to riz Note 2 4 27 3 you d like to a change the year if 1 25 set Click here to mark shown weekends as closed iSe D 118 le 20 21 e2 02 29 25 a0 728 pu 4 solii a eS n Bees o o j i4 ji i 4291 21 262 di E eee Once you have kaiii il i T aR i ai H a finished click EEEE EET y RE EE eE Apply to apply the settings i gt G i E 2 marmora 20 22 122 23 24 25 26 27 28 22 1 a o aS gt ae ee ee tel j i os x i 16 18412 1 i te 2 211 22 2 t
141. apter 4 Creating My Library m S What if make a mistake when cataloguing If you make a mistake when cataloguing and want to start again click the Close button You can of course re visit the record at any time in the future and change delete or add information How do I copy a resource If you have multiple copies of the same resource to save you having to add each one manually you can use the Copy function This copies all of the details from the first copy excluding the accession number which you enter manually From the resources screen highlight the book which you d like to copy and then click tf copy the icon under the Records tab Scan or type the barcode number you are assigning to the copy and then click Copy If you have more than one copy to enter repeat the process until all of barcode numbers of the new copies are listed in the Copies field and then click Close Details of the book you are Title copying Author Class Type or scan the barcode New Barcode 36752 number you are assigning 5 to the new copy and then click Copy to add it to the Copies list Copies 78942 57893 Click Close when you have finished L E p O O O r Please Note The resource types you can copy are Books Hardware Film DVD s and Generic Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 64 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S How do l link and un link resource items Its possible fo
142. arian net User Guide Version 11 4 74 od Chapter 4 Creating My Library m Is How do I globally add a selection of resources to the floor plan You may want to add specific resources to an area of the floor plan Perhaps you have an area of your library where you keep your fiction resources Junior Librarian net allows you to search your catalogue for specific resources for example by classification media type Title etc and add these resources to a floor plan you can have as many floor plans as you wish From the Resources screen use the Advanced Search to search for your resources for example Fiction For more information on searching please see Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data section on Searching Databases Once you have just your fiction resources on the screen from the menu bar at the top of the screen select Tools and then Floor Plan SS Schedule Modules Tools Security Settings Help a Cm Flagging gt a port Barcode Clas y Export Title Resources 1745 574 Quick Replace LIFE ON THE SE FR Add Keywords Click Tools and Borrowers gt 1747 SM Book ofthe week WLOUIFE OF FA then Floor Plan 6g rs sata 5 TTO FlorPion Tutor Groups gt 1750 574 Calendar WILDLIFE OF WOODLAT Edt Reminders P 1751 574 BIOLOGY Current Loans retrace 2 DH ss sra ASMO IS THERE LIFE ON OTHE gt 1754 574 BELLAMY D BOTANIC MAN Past Loans 7 1755 591 LOGVINOFFA ANIMALS ON THE MOVE A
143. at if have mixed year groups If you have groups with readers from different year groups the system can accommodate this You need to make sure that you create a separate Tutor Group for each Year Group which belongs to the tutor group For Example if Tutor Group SEG has years 7 8 and 9 in it you need to create three Tutor Groups called SEG one with a Year Group of 7 another with a Year Group of 8 and another with a Year Group of 9 Select the Group Name that the student belongs to here X 0000 What other information is stored on a borrower s record Advanced Select the correct Year Group from the drop down list This list will only show what has been added in the Tutor Groups page so make sure all of the correct groups are in there first The advanced tab holds settings which you generally will only need to change occasionally Security is where you would choose the type of login for your users Other is where you would store the borrower s Grown Ups System ID Restrictions is where you would ban a borrower and also where you would choose the restriction group they belong to See Chapter 6 Restrictions for more information Click here to enable Active Directory logon Enter the borrowers Grown Ups system ID here Set the Reader Restriction Group here Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 If you have added any custom fields they will show here See Custom Fi
144. ate the CSV file from SIMS net RM Integris Student data can be easily imported from Integris by designing a report in Integris with the following fields certain fields are optional SURNAME FORENAME DOB Date of Birth DOA Date of Admission GENDER REG Tutor Group ADNO Grown Ups System ID YEAR Year Group STUDENT ADDRESS LINE 1 STUDENT ADDRESS LINE 2 STUDENT ADDRESS LINE 3 optional STUDENT ADDRESS LINE 4 optional optional optional STUDENT ADDRESS TOWN optional optional STUDENT ADDRESS POST CODE optional STUDENT E MAIL ADDRESS optional NAME KNOWN NAME optional The report should be saved in Mail merge format to a USB pen drive under the name students csv comma delimited format Also select the option to use headings If you wish to edit the data make sure you open it in Notepad Please do not open it in Microsoft Excel Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 85 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S Nii The following instructions illustrate how to design the export report within Integris 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 Go into the Reports section of Integris Click on Ad Hoc Reports Select Ad Hoc Manager over to the right of the screen Select the first icon at the top left Create New Report Enter Report Name and Description In the bottom right hand corner of the screen select Export as a report type Go through each of
145. ave obtained through MLS Confidential Information includes without limitation trade secrets technical information product design information database scripts database schema source code and or object code copyrights and other intellectual property associated with the SOFTWARE PRODUCT Protection of Confidential Information You understand and acknowledge that the Confidential Information associated with the SOFTWARE PRODUCT has been developed or obtained by MLS by the investment of significant time effort and expense and that the Confidential Information is a valuable special and unique asset of MLS which provides MLS with a significant competitive advantage and needs to be protected from improper disclosure You agree to hold in confidence and to not disclose the Confidential Information to any person or entity except those who are required to have access to the Confidential Information in order to perform their job duties in connection with the limited purposes of this agreement Limitations on Reverse Engineering De Compilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE PRODUCT except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation Rental You may not rent lease or lend the SOFTWARE PRODUCT Software Transfer You may permanently transfer all of your rights under this EULA provided you retain no copies you trans
146. avid SNLL Ryan Leaver Ryan Leaver col Setti GFA rA Category Caption Issue Date Alignment Lef v Background Colour v Format ddiMMiyyyy Date Separator f v Make the required changes and then click Refresh Preview Save Close How do I change the information shown on a borrower record It s possible for you to customise some of the tabs which are held on a borrower record The tabs you can change are e Current Loans e Reservations e Past Loans From the menu bar at the top of the page select Settings and then Page Views Junior Librarian net User Guide Dalabase owtatese Je Resources Past Loans rr Schedule Modules Tools Barcode Class Author 2 1745 S74 gt 1747 574 gt 1748 574 gt 1750 574 1751 S74 gt 1753 574 1754 S74 O N C Er iaf a Prid GILMAN D GILMAN D CARTER G WATERS J CHISHOLM J ASIMOV I BELLAMY D E rar MENNA A Version 11 4 Securty setings Help Select Settings and then Page Views BOTANIC MAN ARBRE AD TS Fe TU E eee er 193 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net ww mis The Settings Page Views screen will then appear Click on the Borrowers tab Click on the first sub tab you d like to change e g Reservations El oe ree you d like to change The Page View Edit screen will appear This is the same screen you ll see when creating
147. aving your borrower restriction groups set up However MLS recommend that you choose either to use borrower group restrictions or resource restrictions You can of course use both but if the system is presented with a situation where there is more than one loan period set up it will always choose the lowest of them all For example You may have set up a borrower restriction group which has a standard loan period of 14 but you ve also set a resource type restriction for the media type of Film Video to 7 If you globally set the Film resource type to 21 when a borrower who belongs to this restriction group takes out a film the loan period given will be 7 because that is the lowest of the three Please see the Restriction example tables later in this section for more information From the menu bar at the top of the page click on Settings and then Restrictions Click on the Resource tab at the top of the screen Select the resource type that you want to set restrictions for and then click Modify a Select the General Borrowers Resources resource type Avalehe Resource Types from the list Film Genenc and then click Hardware Modify Modify Save Close J Enter the restriction settings that you want this resource type to have On this screen you can also choose to restrict any whole year groups or individual groups from borrowing this resource type By placing a tick in any of the Not allowed to options you are
148. bed through Grown Ups By clicking on the pair of sign hands the story will launch onto the computer screen as shown below Signed Stories Browse ALL Books This Signed Stor y is sponsored by DabySign 00 00 Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 283 Chapter 19 Third Party Products m S Text Message Alerts What are Text Message Alerts Junior Librarian net is now compatible with Text Message alerts This allows the sending of Text Messages to borrowers regarding their loans Text Message Alerts will then send reminders to your Borrowers via text messages reminding them of over dues outstanding balances and reservations Text Message Alerts work through third party companies MLS are currently partners with Truancy Call How do I Setup Text Message Alerts In order to use this service please go to the following website to set up a free account Please note Although the account is free you will be charged a fee per text message sent Please discuss this fee with Truancy Call http www truancycall com messagegateway Once you have set up an account with Truancy Call you will be sent an email containing your username and password for the truancy call service Once you receive this email log into Junior Librarian net and access the Grown Ups area Navigate to Settings Module Settings SMS Settings Click on Settings Module Settings SMS Settings Fields Hardware L
149. cal Discove Royston Angela Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 100 Ways to Take Better Lanc Edwardes Guy Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 1000 Signs Mustienes Carlos Ed Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 101 Poems Against War Motion Andrew Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 1066 Country 274 Chapter 19 Third Party Products m Is How do I find Resources with AR Quizzes in the Home Page Highlight the Books with Quizzes Page View and click Copy Enter the description and category as shown below Please note selecting the Enquiry category makes the view available to students on the Home Page selecting the General category only makes the view available within Management New Description Books with Quizzes category Enquiry Copy Cancel To modify the appearance of this view select the newly created Books with Quizzes view beneath the Enquiry heading in the Page Views list Once selected click on Edit and navigate to the Appearance tab Description Books with Quizzes Category SearchStar v Layout Record Selection Appearance Font Amal Set the Font and Size of the view here Size small Font Preview Current Icon Select System from Available Icons the Categories drop Categories System down to choose the correct Icon AL Mn Once all e changes have been made d Reader l click Save icon Save Close Junior Librarian net User Guide V
150. ce 0000 Eme cse The floor plan will then be shown as a new record on the Floor Plan screen dydulss Tolg Secunky Jsamrgs Halp Descriptecn Science Lab Somer Agom New Library i 375 The new floor MLS Ofiee Pr plan is shown Cinna nt Loans y 6th Form Library 665 463 PastLoans English Classroom 515 506 toe O o ee news Reservations ab Flpsing Reviews SS Wor Current page views All Records of Travted sites Protected Mode ON Al Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 73 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m Is How do add an individual resource to the floor plan From within the Resources screen find and select the resource that you d like to add to the floor plan 3 Find and highlight the resource jojejeiojejaje 4nd MANIGA Once in the resource record click on the Floor Plan tab at the top of the screen Place the mouse pointer at the location of the item and click A red flashing beacon will now appear denoting the position of the item Click Save to save the location You will then be taken back to the main Resources screen CANNE SAN CA Barcode 106040 Title Detais Advanced Loans esetvations Summary Photogaph Linked Items i l Click on the r F F Librarian You are here Floor Plan Floor Plan tab BEARDE Click your mouse at the location of the resource Ojai uc Entrance e 0000 a Junior Libr
151. checked Checked Date Time Resource Type Barcode Title Author Class Media Location resources 05 05 2010 13 57 04 10020 Giris In Tears Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library according to the 05 05 2010 13 57 01 tJ 10048 Diamond Girls The Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library search results 05 05 2010 13 56 57 2554 Best Friends Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio English Dep Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 265 Ww Chapter 18 StockCheck m S If you then go into the Missing Items screen the same search criteria has already been applied and will show you any Jacqueline Wilson resources which haven t yet been checked scanned Description Stock Check 05 May 2010 Checked gt f Go l vfz miom Tells you the Print Flagging Check Un check Remove Bulk Scan Download Complete Cancel Search total number of checked and not checked Resource Type Barcode Title Author Class Media Location resources Checked Items Missing Items a 10013 Best Friends Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library according to the search results Going into the All Items screen will show you all Jacqueline Wilson resources regardless of whether they have been checked scanned or not Quick Search Description Stock Check 05 May 2010 Checked eae fs co o IMM Tells you the total number of checked and not checked resources Checked Date Time Resource Type Barcode Title Author C
152. ck in this box After Run the schedule fortnightly on a When you have that the next time they are sent will am 2m ae a chosen your be on the date and time that you ve i N a settings click Save specified above Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 143 ed Chapter 7 Loans m Is For more information on the Output table see the section What happens after I ve applied my reminder settings below What happens after I ve applied my reminder settings Once you ve clicked Save the reminder settings will be added to the Schedule as a task to be run To see the task click Schedule and then View Tasks from the menu bar at the top of the screen Whenever you create a new reminder task or edit the current one the Schedule adds a Last Run date The last run date is the way the schedule knows when the reminders would have been sent last so that it Knows when they are next due to be sent You can edit the Schedule reminder settings if you wish See Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net section on Schedule for more information When the time comes for the Schedule to send out the reminders any reminders which have been specified to be emailed will be sent out to those borrowers who have a valid email address held on their record card Please see Chapter 3 Settings for how to apply the email settings For any reminders which have been specified to be printed a PDF reminder document will be available to be printed as an
153. ck on e Restore under the Records tab on the right of the screen Please Note If you restore a floor plan from the Recycle Bin the links between your resources and that floor plan will also be restored Once you ve deleted a floor plan record from the Recycle Bin all links between your resources and the floor plan will be gone Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 79 Chapter 4 Creating My Library How do I export a floor plan image mis If you accidentally delete a floor plan image which you ve designed you can export the image from the floor plan record From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Database and then Floor Plan Select Database and then Floor Plan Management Microsoft Intemet Explorer provided by M Dalabase Schedule Modules iib Resources W Borrowers T ols a Tutor Groups Barcode Class Author Se Current Loans Ve Pact Loans 1745 Reservations 1747 Pe Reviews G News 1748 s riake 1750 Floor Pian Custom Catalogue 1751 1753 1754 1756 E 1757 D Er 574 574 574 Sra 5rd 574 574 591 582 582 GILMAN GILMAN CARTER WATERS CHISHOL ASIMOV BELLAM LOGVINO CHINERY WILSON Highlight the floor plan record that you want the image for and then Edit Records tab on the right of the screen Highlight the floor plan you d like the image for CC cee phi
154. com for help Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 102 Chapter 5 Circulate m S How do l install the IDK software Everything you need for Identikit is installed through the Hardware Plugin This is covered on Page 5 of this user guide in point 3 beneath the heading Prerequisites Once the machine has been restarted after installing the hardware plugin click on the Tools menu within your Internet Explorer window itself Then select MLS Hardware Configuration from the menu Make sure that Identikit is showing as registered within the Biometric Library tab as shown below n i Save Close a Sl If you click on Settings you have the option to change the location to either the Default Server local machine or the Custom Server different machine The default is the Default Server it is recommended that it remains on this selection J Identikit Options Default Server Server Address entikit a 5 Cea Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 103 Chapter 5 Circulate m S How do I import my Junior3 fingerprints These instructions are only relevant to you if you have had your Junior3 data converted to Junior Librarian net and have been sent an SDF database file file along with your converted data files which will contain the fingerprints from your old system Please Note you will only be sent an SDF file if you were
155. ctive Directory update is every day at midnight You can change this please see Chapter 12 Customising Junior Librarian net section on Schedule for more information Select the details you would like to import into Eclipse net Extra data to import Options Advanced Surname and Forename Address Telephone Numbers If you want to im po rt Primary Group Maps to tutor group details for new borrowers dii Record Actions who are not In Import new records Eclipse net tick here Other Schedule Automatic Sync The time you would like the automatic download to run Click Run Now or Run the schedule weekly on a Schedu le Run the schedule fortnightly on a Sunday Run the schedule monthly on the day of the month Run Now T Schedule Close Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 211 wa Chapter 12 Security m S Once the import has been completed any new records will be added to the Intake screen To access Intake select Database then Intake from the menu bar at the top of the screen If you need to make any changes to anyone listed in the Intake screen before they are imported highlight them from the list and either click Edt or double click your mouse to go into the record E Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited BEIENEE Schedule Tools Security Settings Help ee TOC Aa R Page 1 of 29 847 recor ds Surname Foren
156. d et aieateed cies 183 How do delete a scheduled task cccccceeccseeeceeeeceeecseeeeeeeeseeeceueeseueeseeeseueesseesaeeesenes 184 Page NVICWS space ene acen scence vecewacessepacesemewaces asx aceseseyacevaseraceseceyacesmseraceseneracesasepacereaepacevesepacera 186 WV UNS VIC serno i ses ssces Seen atti A a 186 HOW dO Create A NEW VIEW ccccceccceccceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeseeeseeeteeeseeeseeeseeseeeseeteeeseeeseees 186 How do set default views for My DOrrOWEIS ccccceeccceeeeeeeeceeeeseeecaeeesueeseeesaeeeseeeeaaes 191 How do change the information SHOWN ON a resource ECOL ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 192 How do change the information shown on a borrower record ccceeceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 193 How do change the column names in My page VIEWS cccceeeecseeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 195 ENOJO aceacescewace ces eeace rece eases E E E E EE 196 How do I change the field NAMES cccccseccceeeceececeeeccececeucecseecsueeseeeceueesueeseeessusenaees 196 Chapter 12 Secu aorar eccuansuautucactermuamnwectaheathncuceaneseuteorscucrunedteteaue cause 198 SECUN Yo E a REA 198 WhatlS user manager sioineetisi pie a e e a e i 198 How do I create a new user account cccseccceecceececeeecceeeceuceceeeceueecsueeeusesaueeseeessueenanss 199 Wh hatis group manage oaee a a a a a aN E 201 How do I create a new security group cccceeccceeeceececeeecceeeceuceceeecsus
157. d not return because item not currently on loan What happens if the resource I scan isn t in the catalogue If you scan a resource in Multi Return which hasn t yet been added to the catalogue a message will appear on screen to let you Know Please check the number you Vo have entered for the resource and try again Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 113 W Chapter 5 Circulate m S How does a borrower reserve a resource In order to reserve a resource the student needs to follow these instructions Click on Search on the home page This will bring up a clear and colourful easy search selection as shown in the screen below Each picture represents a search criterion for example the dog represents animals and will bring up all resources in the library which relate to animals Search Below is the Search Results page for the Animals search Each area is described in the captions below Search Caarch far Matias Floating in the sea are suggested keywords to add to your search Simply click ona PROVIDES A keyword to add it to your search By clicking ona resource type you stop that Drag resources into the My particular Stuff treasure chest Click on resource type the My Stuff treasure chest for from being a link to the My Books page shown on the where you may Reserve search page resources Please Note If the student is not yet logged in they will be requested to scan or ty
158. d the student librarians Follow the instructions on the screen to either issue or return a book Once you have scanned the barcode label inside the book scan the students barcode label If they already have this book on loan it will be returned If they do not have this book on loan the book will be issued to them Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 21 Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net Search Search is a facility for both the students and the librarian to use in order to search for resources within the library Below is the initial search screen which appears once you click on Search Search Simply click on the subject field to navigate to a search page as shown below for that particular subject 100 Questions And Answers Poni gt r E Aerodynamics Of Animals Mari ra Listed above is the number of Resource Types that relate to the Animals subject Junior Librarian net User Guide Search Resources are displayed here enter resource by simply clicking on it and going to More _m 1001 Facts About 3D Animal And Wild Animais gt m E amp k e a Ae S n Afghanistan African Myths And African Wildlife African Wildife Online Legends Footprints Foundation tek t kkel Drag Resources into My stuff chest in order for them to appear in My Books described below My Stuff can also be clicked on as a shortcut to the My Books page
159. d when required The PDF reminder documents are held in the Output table To access the Output table select Database and then Output from the menu bar on the top of the screen Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by M Dake thse Schedule Modules Tools dii Resources hy Borrowers Daakia Barcode Class Author Curent Loans a Past Loans 5 4574 GILMAN G Reservations 1747 574 GILMANE 1748 S4 CARTER Select Database and then Output 1750 5 4 WATERS 1751 574 CHISHOL 1753 574 ASIMOV I 1754 574 BELLAMY Lookup Maintenance Print 1755 4591 LOGVING A i1757 582 CHINERY Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 144 Chapter 7 Loans m Is The Output screen will then appear Please Note Only the reminders you haven t viewed will be listed Once you have viewed them they will be moved to the Output Recycle Bin where you can view and or print them if you wish Lata Hodules Tools Security Brags Hes oe Daio Croaied Mima Typa Description Deer Hame Ristien z F 7 ATi F 7EG2009 applicationipd RESERVATION HousaKeaping Guest Ig TAs application RESEAVATION HouseKeeping Guest wer 122008 sepication pt RESERVATION HouseKeeping Guest Any viewed reminders DEAZ 9 applicabon pd RE SER VATION Houskeaping Guest Ptrl 0300209 appicmion pH RESEARVATION HouseKeepng Guest 1 seas ON07009 application Indridual Reiniera Tutsi will be
160. dyhave a reservation slip upon aren t on loan return By clicking on this the librarian is given the option to reprint the last reservation slip printed for that resource The reservations are then deleted during nightly housekeeping When a reservation is deleted the system will check and see if that resource is reserved by another borrower The system will create a report which will be placed in to the output table which consists of a list of resources which no longer have reservations and all the new reservations for resources which are now reserved by a different borrower Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 154 WW Chapter 9 Reviews mMm iS Chapter 9 Reviews This chapter explains how your borrowers review the resources they take out on loan and how you can manage them The Making Reviews section tells you how borrowers can make reviews The Managing Reviews section explains how you can view the reviews your borrowers have made and what you need to do before the reviews are available for everyone to see It also tells you how to delete reviews and how you can customise the review questions Making Reviews How do borrowers review resources There are two ways for borrowers to review resource both of which are described below First of all click on Reviews depending on whether or not the student is logged in they will be presented with the Login screen The Reviews screen as shown below will then appea
161. e First character in upper case First character in each word in upper case Click Apply data cleanse C Move The to end of line replacements Move An to end of line C Move A to end of line Add correct spacing after punctuation Click Close when you have finished V Apply data cleanse replacements a Apply data cleanse removals z Case You have now set up the Data Cleanse Replacement words along with the fields you d like them to apply to This means that if someone enters a word which is listed in Data Cleanse Replacements whilst adding a resource borrower when the record is saved the word is automatically replaced Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 216 Ww S Chapter 13 Tidying Data mi Data Cleanse Remove What is data cleanse remove Data Cleanse Remove is a database which you can add words to that you don t want to be used in a Resource or Borrower record This means that when a resource or borrower has been added and includes a word listed in Data Cleanse Remove the word is automatically deleted How do apply the settings for data cleanse remove From the menu bar at the top of the screen click on Database Lookup Maintenance and then Data Cleanse Remove Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Syster Database Schedule Modules Security Setti E Tutor Groups Curent Loans 2007 AS level AS Level
162. e connection before Test Connection clicking Save Save Close Please Note although the Password field displays in text when you first enter the details it will be encrypted once you click Save and will show as asterix s from then on Because of this once you have clicked Save you will be requested to enter your password should you choose to Test Connection again Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 206 f wa Chapter 12 Security m S How do I link Junior Librarian net borrowers to Active Directory There are two ways of linking your Junior Librarian net users to Active Directory The first way is to manually link them From within the borrower s record card click on the Advanced tab at the top of the screen Place a tick in the Active Directory Linked box and then enter the borrower s Active Directory Logon Name When you click Save Junior Librarian net will connect to Active Directory to search and then store the borrower s Security ID x Place a tick in Active Directory Linked Details Advanced Current Loans Statement Reservations Past Loans Barcode 1 Name Security Custom Fields AR Level v Active Directory Linked Logon Name andy Text 2 Text 3 Text 4 PIN Random _ Text 5 Security Grou Administrator ty p bi Date 1 E Date 2 E Other Management System ID andy RFID Erase Restrictions Banned Staff 00
163. e cece ae eee et 5 Getting Started with Junior Librarian net ccsccccesseeeeneeeceseeceneesenseeeeseeseeseseeneseeneesonees 6 PrereguiSheS riana aeaa aaa aeaea EEEa 7 WMAGCKING Spansion a a a ce ats ees Rat he es Meet aes As 7 MSAN Sverig A tareeeerene es ee eset hee nies ee eee eee eee ee ee ee 7 UNOKA pO go 6 F eprmreenen ent neers ere tet erent Pear RET Snir Mere a Sn ee ee 8 Installing the Hardware Plugin for ldentiKit cccccccseceneceseeeneeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeneeeneeseeeseeees 9 Installing the AD Plugin for use with Active Directory LINKING cccccceeecceeeseeeneeeneeenees 11 Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net ccccsssessesecseseeseeseeeenseseeeeseees 12 Tne ROMmMS FAG runica a a a a a E a 12 J NIOr GIAS SIC naen E a cess acueuenssaweamneusneueaneaes 12 OCUA a n a a A A E 13 E EAE ASAA OC EEN et LEE A AE EEO E A E AA 13 MY StU nen eE E E 17 OVIEN E T T E E eee ere eee 17 FAC SEM Well ONS sina aca chee taaniatd 2am chomp haan ata hota tema hian ata dota stump haanseta Dota tomate oth ete tty hia ti deia Mima enamels 18 LNOF ANIA ONIY sivsiintseeccieevestieds ie a seh dieters nd Redheaded a e a 18 DOINGS arenes Arcos ares Ae th aces At tess Ae a at cae Me ald ceed Me a eet 19 Mme BO aC OCENG anean y cceuen ccc cernen eveaneuceav ce eveug a exeuens ecermaLenes 20 Turning off Animation to Increase Speed ccccceeccccsececeeeeeeeeeeceecesseeeeseueesseees
164. e information you will be taken to the resource record card screen If you are cataloguing a book you may find that a lot of the fields in the resource record have been filled in automatically from Discovery Online For any other resource the fields will be blank and you will have to fill them in manually You can add extra custom fields which are displayed in the Advanced tab on each resource See How do create my own custom fields later in this section for how to do this Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 54 Ndir Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S How do I catalogue a Book From the New Resource screen click on the Book Icon Follow the instructions above on how to scan or type the resource s barcode Please Note e lf the ISBN does not have a barcode you will need to type it in Ignore any spaces or hyphens e g 9 781 2345 67896 9781234567896 e lf the ISBN does not appear on the back cover of the book look on the back of the title page or alternatively at the very end of the book or inside the dust jacket e lf the book is very old it may only have a 9 digit SBN Standard Book Number If this is the case you need to add a 0 to the beginning of the number e g 1238456789 0123456789 to make it an ISBN International Standard Book Number e Ifthe number is rejected you may have made a mistake so try again Very occasionally an ISBN may be printed incorrectly and will either not register or bring
165. e resource s barcode Please note that with items other than Books you are not required to enter an ISBN number Once the resource record screen appears click in each field in which you wish to add information There are drop down arrows next to most fields on the screen Clicking these means you can select from a list of previously entered information Click Save when you ve finished p a Click the drop down arrow to see a list of keywords You can jump to a specific word by typing in the start of the word Click Save when you have finished Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 59 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S How do I catalogue sheet music 4 From the New Resource screen click on the 6 Icon Follow the instructions at the beginning of this section on how to enter the resource s barcode Please note that with items other than Books you are not required to enter an ISBN number Once the resource record screen appears click in each field in which you wish to add information There are drop down arrows next to most fields on the screen Clicking these means you can select from a list of previously entered information Click Save when you ve finished p s ee e Click the drop down T arrow to see a list of Editor _ ga Se s keywords You can E coas 3 jump to a specific E rewi word by typing in the e start of the word Click Save when you have finished Add cat Delete
166. e the Group Name that you want the group to move to Type the Year Group and then click Save If the group is leaving school select Leavers 4 Repeat this for each group who are moving Select Move Duaan MoveTo loMember To wily need to spacity If the group are leaving tick here Type the Group Group teenie FODUN Name and Year fear enaa fie Group they are moving to B 000 See Cas 5 Once you ve selected a new group for each group who are moving click ON Move Tutor Groups under the Tools tab on the right of the screen Please Note We strongly recommend that you make a backup of your data before making any changes Your data is backed up by MLS nightly If you are making any big system changes we would suggest you make them first thing in the morning to avoid any loss of changes made to data between the backup and the system change 6 When you are ready to move your groups click Yes x _ WARNING We advise you to back up your data before pp running this routine Update tutor groups to match the move to information yes Re NB Groups who you have marked as Leavers will be moved to the Borrower Recycle Bin You can delete them from here if you wish however borrowers who have loans outstanding cannot be deleted until the resource has been returned or has been marked as missing Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 95 mis Chapter 4 Creating My Library Wh
167. ea Hardback 3095 Fiction Guy R And Heard A Bird Sing Paperback e 55 Fiction Barber A Mousehole Cat The Hardback 67 Fiction Berry J Future Telling Lady The Hardback 1380 Fiction Disney VV Mickey Mouse In Colour Hardback 1238 Fiction Wallis J Sonic The Hedgehog Adventure Gamebook 1 Metal City Mayhem Paperback If you want to sort by more than one column click on the ar icon under the Records tab on the right of the screen a For example You could sort by Class and Author which would mean all the 200 Classifications would be shown together but would be in alphabetical order by Author Highlight each field in turn that you want to sort and use the icon to move the selected field into the right hand box Once the field is listed click on it to highlight it and then choose whether you d like the column data to be listed in Ascending or Descending order by clicking T l scending Descending Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 234 WwW Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data mM is lf you want to move a field back highlight it from the list in the right hand box and then click on the icon Title Ascending Rt Author 2 Author Ascending Highlight the field ef Author 3 Barcode Ascending B 6 author 4 you d like to sort l Q and then click here Select the field C Average Reading Age to selecttheorder you d like to sort LT Barcode and use the arrows LS Book Lev
168. earch criteria whenever you select the DVD view In Record Selection you can also specify a Sort Order for the fields See Chapter 15 Viewing Library Data section on Sorting Data for more information x Enter the search criteria in these Description DVD s Category General fields For example Laona Record Selection uAppsaance New Media Equal To DVD Click Add to add it to the search criteria Default Search Boolean Field Operator Value New Media E Equal to DVD Select whether you want the data to show in Ascending or Descending order Field Table Operator Value Change the Sort Order of the fields here by highlighting the fields and using the arrows Add to move them across Sort Order See Chapter 15 a R Title Ascending Viewing Library Data see l 5 m is for more information L iha ial Author 2 Q Click Save when L E Author 3 ED Aiha you are happy i mm x with the view Ascending Descending settings Ca Save Close You can use Boolean searching to customise the search even more This allows you to broaden your search by using and and Or Boolean searching is useful because it allows you to refine your search ensuring you get the results you want For more information on Boolean searching see Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data section on Searching Databases Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 189 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis
169. ed Click Update to import the photograph owse Update Delete Close How do import my borrowers using the school s administration system Each year usually September the students in the office administration system will be promoted to new tutor groups and new students will be added into the system You can use the administration system to create a file containing all of your borrower s details to import into Junior Librarian net Once you have created the file by following the instructions relevant to your school s administration system below you will then need to see the instructions in the sub section How do I import my student file into Junior Librarian net It is pointless to use the administration system to add your borrowers before they have been promoted or added Ask your office administrator if the students have been promoted before you Start The intake details may be all entered into your school s administration system but they may not yet be assigned an administration number If they have not been assigned a number again it s best not to use this method to add your borrowers as the administration number is what distinguishes one record from the next Tutor groups are automatically created or changed by comparing the student s administration number surname and forename on both Junior Librarian net and the school s administration data If these are matched but the tutor groups are different
170. ed documentation and that b any technical support supplied by MLS will be provided according to this EULA MLS will be either in position to a repair the SOFTWARE PRODUCT or b replace the SOFTWARE PRODUCT The SOFTWARE PRODUCT replacement will be guaranteed during the rest of the original warranty time period or during thirty 30 days choosing from both periods the larger one The present warranty will be terminated if the SOFTWARE PRODUCT fails as result of an accident abuse or misuse 7 NO OTHER WARRANTIES To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law MLS and its suppliers disclaim all warranties and conditions either express or implied including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability fitness for a particular purpose title and non infringement with regard to the software product and the provision of or failure to provide support services 8 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law in no event shall MLS or its suppliers be liable for any special incidental indirect or consequential damages whatsoever including without limitation damages for loss of business profits business interruption loss of business information or any other pecuniary loss arising out of the use of or inability to use the software product or the provision of or failure to provide support services Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 3 Chapter 1 Getting Started m S Chapter 1
171. eeds to belong to a security group By default every borrower who is added to Junior Librarian net belongs to the Guest security group This means that when someone either Logs in or is authenticated using Active Directory they will have the permission settings which belong to the Guest security group Please Note The Guest security group has been given some default permissions Please see page 174 for how to change these How do I create a new security group There are three security groups which have been created for you These are Administrator Librarian and Guest The Administrator and Librarian groups have full permissions whereas Guest only has limited permissions If you have converted from Junior 2 or a different library Grown Ups system all borrowers will belong to the Guest security group You may want to create a new group perhaps for your staff borrowers and give them more permissions From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Security and then Group Manager Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited Database Schedule Modules Tools Secunty Settings Help Change Password Click G Ir IC roup ae CTE Group Meneger Manager p e Barcode Class Author User Wanag r 2 1745 574 GILMAN D life on the seashore La i747 4574 GILMAND WILDLIFE OF FARMLAND q 1748 574 CARTER G WILDLIFE IN TOWNS gt i750 869574 WATERS J WILDLIFE O
172. eeessaeeesees 21 BONOwW amp REU once E EERE 21 SEACA eee ee ene ne S a ee eee ee eee eee eee 22 IY BOOK San seer goin stump semeti dois sane gonnsumy sented a ate goin samy ase doinsaaetes 23 ROVIOWS oosit E ee ee 24 Grown UDS ei a A A cies Ae a ees 25 MURT ROUF Dassia eet ee eee ee ee eee ee 25 MUSS UC to aana 26 DCM IS SUG urp EE EEEN EEEE 26 LiD raa ANY a E nace seteesae wan nenventeecesuuennwessnececesnays 27 Read IP sucira E tevacesiiceeitiece 27 Chapter s SEUNS anni E 28 Password Manager oiccscctcecerscess tense a wanes a 29 Module Senings SIP2 SEVT iois e ES 31 SiR aLa o AS AN E duce A EA S AE AN AE S EAN ETE AS E AN E N EPA E AS REA 32 Contents i JUNIOF LMU AGIAN eo cche avec an a acccssmesereeedeucnsecns 37 Date WY veces vets ete scere cs voters te sceawcawwueadeteeceawscwcusadetssceawencusauetssceausansusadetssseausancusstetsecemmacnceds 38 l Co eae eee rae ree ae ema ee E Ee E a mE Pea E Cee eee meee eee eee ee Seer eee 39 NAG Caen nce mer ocr nce ne ecm nce nr comets nce en er ncexiotis acta ener acexiones acsea ener adaoneeasewentnacexenee 41 Page VIEWS sisone a a E 43 BRS SEN UNS sorreran es cae secs cases ence ca sence new semen eect nec scene eceecwecemeece 45 Reservat ONS cps scusetanadatevanscumetanscatevarscupecansenteta 46 PROVIEW S air a ee Seer a ee ome ener ae cSe ee e ner meneame Teer ae ee mere eer Rene eee eee ener mare err ae 47 BF UEUIN Gis ees cinrscinaceinrsianmatini vena cervins anna aE E aaa 48 ReE
173. eeessaeeseeeeseesaeesaeens 59 FIOW COl Catalogue sheer MUSIC etch nsctets a cairo a a este esen 60 How do Catalogue a DOCUMENT seiss 60 How do catalogue a picture ccecccecccceeecececeeese cece eeseeeeseeeseeeeseesseeesseeeseeeseeeesseesaeeess 61 How do Catalogue a website ecccceccceecceeeceeecceeeceuceceeceuceceueeceeessusesseeseaeesueeseeesseeens 61 ROW G0 Catalogue a 1EXUDOOK rerni E 62 How do catalogue an item which doesn t belong to a specific resource type 62 How do Catalogue an eBook ccccecccceccceeeeceeeeseeeceeeeceeeeseeeseueeseessueeseeeseeesaueeseeesaneess 63 What if make a mistake when cataloguing c ccccceeccseeeeeeeeceeeeseeseeeeseeeeeeeeseueeseeesaes 64 FIOW CO Copy a TESOUNCE Ss siccick naoes Suances waceictaseansicund anvcdetveneesiacayctaasbdentaaevodedeeceas eases 64 How do link and Un link resource ITEMS cccecceeccseeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeeseeeseeesaeeess 65 What other information is stored ON a resource FECOL ccseeccceeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 66 FIOOF Plan zca a E 72 How do l createa floor plan image cenni 72 How do add a floor plan record ccccccccecccececeeeeceeecaeceseeeeeeseueeseeessuseseeeeseeeseeesseesaeeess 72 How do add an individual resource to the floor plan cc eeccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeesees 74 How do globally add a selection of resources to the floor plan
174. el w to move it to the right hand column Ascending Descending Click Apply when B Apply hea you have finished Use these arrows to move up and down your selected fields Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 235 WW Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data mM is Exporting Data Whilst you are in any of the databases you can export the data on screen to a different format Currently the options are Comma Separated Values CSV and Tab Separated Values TSV How do I export data into a different format Search the database for the information you want to export and then click on the gP Export icon under the Records tab on the right of the screen The Export screen will then appear Highlight the format you d like to export to and then click Export Highlight the ir Soe format you d like Comma Separated Values CSV y Tab Separated Values TSY mae and then click Export When you have clicked Export you will need to select a location for the file to be saved to by clicking on Save or if you want to view it you can select Open File Download is file Do you want to open or save this file Select Open to see the file or Save to Ls Name export csv Type Microsoft Office Excel Comma Separated Values Fil c E a location to save It to From localhost While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially harm your computer If you do not trust
175. elds section later in this chapter Select the Security Group the borrower belongs to 96 od Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S Current Loans The Current Loans tab shows all of the resources currently on loan to the borrower You can change the layout of the current loans tab See Chapter 12 Customising Junior Librarian net section on Page Views Lists the pans s Reserations Past Loane resources e Tot oe qram 25 10 2007 14 0811 2007 0 Library 177102007 10 2710 2007 4 Library currently on loan to the borrower Odo Page 1 of 1 3 item 0000 Seve Chose Reservations The Reservations tab shows a list of resources that the borrower has reserved You can change the layout of the reservations tab See Chapter 12 Customising Junior Librarian net section on Page Views a Barcode 10663 Name Detale Advanced Cunert Laars Staameri Reserator Pait Loare Lists the resources o at 001 Doherty G 101 Thengs To Do With Your Computer 2 10 2007 the borrower has 030 1 Spiten H 1001 Questions And Answers 2510 2007 reserved 100 Children S Meals 25 10 2007 oO Page 1 of 1 3 tems 9000 Save Tire Past Loans i E The Past Loans tab shows a list of the resources the borrower has previously taken out on loan You can change the layout of the past loans tab See Chapter 12 Customising Junior Librarian net section on Page Views e s Barcode 10663 Name Datat
176. electronic documentation collectively SOFTWARE PRODUCT By installing copying or otherwise using the SOFTWARE PRODUCT you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA If you do not agree to the terms of this EULA you may not use the SOFTWARE PRODUCT SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE Copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties protect the SOFTWARE PRODUCT The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is licenced not sold The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is owned and copyrighted by MLS and its third party suppliers Your Licence confers no title or ownership in the Software and is not a sale of any rights in the Software MLS s third party suppliers may protect their rights in the event of any violation of these Licence Terms INTRODUCTION The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is comprised of any or all of the following components i the core file components li MLS Database Scripts and source code iii MLS Database Schema iv MLS Database Stored Procedures v MLS Image Files vi MLS Documentation vii MLS Online Documentation This EULA describes your rights with respect to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT and its components The following terms govern your use of the specified SOFTWARE PRODUCT unless you have a separate written agreement with MLS 1 GRANT OF LICENSE This EULA grants you the following rights Standard Use You may install and use one 1 copy of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT on a single computer and on a s
177. ent information can be imported into Junior Librarian net by placing a CSV file containing student information onto a blank floppy disk This information can then be imported using the Intake facility built into Junior Librarian net The first line of the CSV file must contain the name of the fields you are importing The data must be comma separated and be qualified by double quotes The field names that must be used are as follows they can appear in any order within the text file Field Name Description Required MangementSystemID Unique number which identifies the borrower in your administration system Yes Surname Surname of the Borrower Yes Forename Forename of the borrower Yes DateOfBirth Borrower s date of birth Yes Gender Gender of the borrower Yes TutorGroup Tutor group the borrower belongs to Yes YearGroup Year group the borrower belongs to Yes LogonName The logon name you want the borrower to have when accessing Junior Librarian net Optional Password The password you want the borrower to have non active directory linked borrowers Optional Barcode The barcode you want the borrower to have Optional Title The borrowers salutation Optional Address 1 The first line of the borrowers home address Optional Address2 The second line of the borrowers home address Optional Address3 The third line of the borrowers home address Optional Address4 The fourth line of the borrowers home address Optional Address5 The fifth line of the borrowers home add
178. eo Video appears here OVOe P LF Page 1 of 1 1 records Look For Tape Replace Click Replace Type Tape here Close Please Note The search will only be done in the selected field i e Media Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 162 WW Chapter 10 Maintaining My Library mM iS How do I mark a resource as missing lf a borrower has lost a resource while on loan or a leaver has left with a resource still on loan to them you may want to mark the resource as missing and return the resource from that borrower s record There are various places in which you can mark a resource as Missing all of which are listed below Resources and Current Loans Page Find and highlight the resource you would like to mark as missing Click on Missing beneath the Records section to the right hand side of the screen Missing Export Missing Export Print Sort Print Sort Return Recycle Bin Renew SOs F VY Resources Page Current Loans Page On the Missing screen specify a Reason Missing by either selection an option from the drop down list or by typing in a reason manually this field works like other fields in record cards where if you have typed in a value manually that value will appear in the drop down list the next time You may also wish to enter a Cost of Replacement and select whether you wish to Return the resource We do suggest you choose to Return resource this will re
179. ere Category Start Date End Dats 18 03 2009 18 03 2010 gt E Source E hh amp LA E Ba Z U ae x x 1S al A O Sid iE Do Change layout font add Mo lt il il ne II i ico a F ize Tar Oe Format Font 5 images and more from this toolbar A council has said claims that literacy and numeracy levels in its secondary schools are among the worstin Scotland are very misleading A spokeswoman for Dumfries and Galloway Council said the data from S2 pupil tests did not tell the full story The statistics released under the Freedom of Information Act show the number meeting minimum requirements for reading writing and maths has dropped Clir Sandra McDowall said the authority was working hard to tackle the issue Enter article The figures showed Dumfries and Galloway had seen standards fall in reading writing and maths text here l l i However Ms McDowall who chairs the education committee said it was not a fair representation of the region Improve standards Itis very misleading and am sorry that it has caused such concern to parents she said 0000 This news article will now be available to view by clicking on the newspaper on the Home screen To turn the pages of the newspaper place your mouse of the top corner click and pull the page over Again please remember you have to refresh the home page for changes
180. ered into each field To save you having to find and edit each individual record you can use Data Tidy to apply settings of your choice to both previously entered borrower and resource records and any that are entered in the future How do I apply the settings for Data Tidy Make sure you are in the screen that you d like to apply the Data Tidy settings to e g Resources or Borrowers From the menu bar at the top of the screen click on Settings and then Data Tidy amp Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited Database Schedule Modules Tools Security Setings Help Password Manager Module Settings gt Barcodes Resources BM vss s74 GuMaAND Junior Librarian XR Data Tidy Borrowers 1746 574 ANDERSON P Feks Select Settings Language 6g or su cimo e and then Data a EEIN Tidy Tutor Groups 1748 574 CARTERG Restrictions Reservations 1750 574 WATERSJ ina ANDS Current Loans Printing gt 1751 574 CHISHOLM J 2i Reminders 1753 574 ASIMOV G General ER Past Loans bj a 1754 574 BELLAMY D BOTANIC MAN Z If there is a tick in Do not tidy uncheck this box so that you can select the settings for that field Click the drop down arrow at the end of the Field box and select the first field that you would like to choose your data tidy settings for Select the Data Tidy options you want
181. ers question marks which represent any character and percentage signs which ignore a character The mask you set up can be a combination of all 4 symbols Please Note There are some exceptions to using the symbol These will be covered later in this section How do I set up a resource or borrower barcode mask consisting of numbers only From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Settings and then Barcodes Click on the Barcode Masks tab at the top of the screen You will see that there are already some barcode masks which have been set up for you The top one is for a resource barcode which has a barcode consisting of 6 numeric characters The second one is for resource barcodes which consist of 5 numeric characters and the last one is for borrower barcodes which consist of 4 numeric characters To set up a new mask click New Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 32 Chapter 3 Settings m Is Barcode Masks Automatic Barcodes Masks which Description Modification Mask have already Galaxy Resource HHHHHHHHHHHI A Click New to been set up are MLS 6 Digit Value Resource HHHH create a listed here MLS 5 Digit Value Resource 4H H MLS 4 Digit Value Borrower 4 new mask QOVe 0 Page 1 of 1 4 records Use this facility to define the barcodes that are used for both Readers and Catalogue items in your library i Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 33
182. ersion 11 4 275 Chapter 19 Third Party Products m Is Once you are happy with the appearance of the page view navigate to the Home Page and click on Search on the signpost Click on to bring up the Books with Quizzes view you have just created Click on the Books with Quizzes view Search All the resources with corresponding quizzes will be displayed These resources are easily distinguishable by the Accelerated Reader icon which is displayed in the bottom left hand corner ALONE ON A WIDE WIDE SEA michael oe at ike Ea i A a En z a i Accelerated Reader icon Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 2 6 Chapter 19 Third Party Products m Is Importing Book Data How do I import resource records into my catalogue You can import resource records in MARC21 or UK MARC format graphers Magnun Simpsoi Tempes Tempes Make sure you are in the Resources screen From the menu bar at the top of the screen click on Tools and then Import select Marc 21 from the list of file types and then click Browse to browse to where your quiz list file is stored Click Import Please select a file Carel Press LinksPlus Accelerated Reader Quiz List Click Browse to select the location of the marc file Filename C Users helen Desktop UKLF lt j Browse Click Import to import resources Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 277 Chapter 19
183. es and then click Save For more information on ways to search your catalogue see Chapter 15 Viewing Library Data How do change a borrower s PIN lf you change a borrower s PIN you must ensure that the system is updated to reflect the change 2 Edit Open up the borrower s record card by highlighting it and clicking on Type the new barcode into the Barcode field at the top left of the screen and then click Save How do delete a borrower To delete a borrower from the library highlight the record and then click onthe Remove icon under the Records tab on the right of the screen Deleted borrowers will be moved to the Borrower Recycle Bin To access this click on the Bj Recycle Bin icon under the Records tab on the right of the screen borrower back to the borrower clicking on the icon under the lf you change your mind you can restore the database by highlighting the record and then Records tab A Restore Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 166 WW Chapter 10 Maintaining My Library mM S How do l edit a tutor group If you would like to change some details on a tutor group record simply find the tutor group in the Tutor Groups database and then click PET to open up the record card Make the necessary changes and then click Save How do delete a tutor group To delete a tutor group from the library highlight the group and then click on the Remove icon under the Records tab on the right
184. eseeseeeesseesaeeesaees 268 How do complete a StOCKCNECK 00 0 0 cccceccccceececeeeeeseeeceeeesseeeeseeeesseeeeseeeessaeeeseeessaeeees 269 What happens to completed StockChecks cccccccceececeeeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeeseeeesseeesseeeseeeeas 270 Chapter 19 Third Party ProGucts scsscecsceccsevcccdssedeencoveviecdsvedercsnerseansvededsnsnerseecsvedeesneversuecerncos 271 Accelerated Reader QUIZ ZS sxc sees 271 What are Accelerated Reader QUIZZES oiaoi ai ese onal 271 How do find out which of my resources have quizzes ccceccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaneeseees 271 How do print out Accelerated Reader labels ccccscccceeceseeeceeeeceeeseeeeeeeeneeesaueesaees 274 How do find Resources with AR Quizzes in the Home Page cccccsseeceeeeseeeeeaeees 275 IMPONG BOOK al a epeacevener aces eseeacevesenasenaneyacevesenactaantpace a 277 How do import resource records into My catalogue cccceccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeeseees 27 7 How do import resource records into my custom catalogue ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseees 278 BUCS FS esana a ETa E E O E 280 VV aL IS SINKS PIUS erra hiecuseentoceadehteduseehbacuanehies seen oacparedcasstaboesuetetienpse tcl 280 How do import a LinksPlus WebLinks file 2 0 0 cece ceeceeeeeceeeseeesaeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeeaees 280 EV Signed STO IES cra a a a 281 What are ITY SIgNEd STONES rssi na a T T viasedtty a ret asides aus 281 How do get ITV Signed Stor
185. esource If you change your mind and wish to remove a resource from the list of Checked Items simply highlight it from the list in the Checked Items screen and then click on the 5 icon Un check The resource will then be removed from the checked list and placed in the Missing Items list How do remove a resource from the StockCheck You may wish to completely remove a resource from the StockCheck perhaps because you do not want to include it at this time You can remove a resource whilst in any of the screens Checked Items Missing Items and All ltems Highlight the resource which you want to remove and then click on the QO icon Please Note The resource will only be deleted from the StockCheck Remove How does Flagging work It is possible to select more than one resource at a time in StockCheck by turning on the Flagging function You can use Flagging in all three screens Checked Items Missing Items and All Items and it enables you to either check un check or remove multiple resources from the StockCheck depending on which screen you are in Click on the icon Flagging Then simply highlight each resource on which you would like to perform the action Once all resources are highlighted click the Check Un check or Remove button depending on the action you wish to take Description Stock Check 05 May 2010 Checked ER Check Un check Remove Bulk Scan Download Complete Checked Items Missing Items A
186. esource Identifier method from the Finger Print drop down list Borrower Identifier Resource Identifier Barcode Barcode RFID Enter password and click Save ar Sa Se Se Se Password Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 31 we Chapter 3 Settings m S Barcodes All new resources and borrowers who are added to Junior Librarian net will be allocated a barcode A barcode mask must be set up beforehand so that Junior Librarian net can recognise the borrower or resource when the barcode is scanned Please Note various barcode masks are added to the system as default upon setup to help you get started on using your library as quickly as possible However barcode masks for barcodes such as SLS barcodes will need to be set up by you manually Every barcode whether it s for a resource or borrower consists of characters These can be numbers Numeric letters Alphabetic or a mixture of both letters and numbers Alphanumeric By looking at the barcode it s not always possible to see what characters it consists of some barcodes contain hidden characters For this reason we recommend that you use the Notepad program on your computer to scan in the barcode which will show all of the characters When creating a mask symbols represent the characters of the barcode that you want to scan These symbols are hashes which represent a numeric character stars which represent alphabetic charact
187. esource is currently unavailable Notes allows you to record information on the resource record purely for viewing by anyone who accesses the Grown Ups section For example if a book is returned to the library damaged you may want to write a note to remind yourself to replace it after completing your next stockcheck Photograph Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 69 WwW Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S The Photograph tab displays any photograph of the resource either one you have attached manually or one which is being obtained from Discovery Online Barcode 4 Tithe Detads Advanced Loans Reservations Sunmay Photograph Linked liens Click Browse to search for an image to add to the resource Browse Update Export Delete gt OOQ C Bock of the Week Save Close Linked Items The Linked Items tab shows any resources which are linked to this one and also enables you to link your resources together For example you may have catalogued a website relating to Harry Potter and you want this to be linked to your Harry Potter books Please see section on How do l link unlink resource items earlier in this chapter Barcode 1 Title Details Advanced Loans Reservations Summary Notes Photograph Linked Items Floor Plan Title HARRY POTTER AND THE HALF BLOOD PRINCE Rowling J K Fiction http International cover art for Harry Potter http www teachervision fet
188. essueeceeesseessueenaees 201 How do I change a security group s permissions ccceececceeeceeceeeceeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeseees 203 How do change the security group for an individual borrower c cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 204 How do change my password cccccccceecceeecceeeceececueccueeceueeseuecsueeseeseueesuseseeessueenanes 204 ACUVS DING CIONY ccicnoa a a E a a 205 WV MALS ACUS DIKCC OM Lenine al doasts oto icce tet tela atsnite alana tesee el tiie el iiaabet deat 205 How does Active Directory work within Junior Librarian net cccseccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseees 205 How do Configure Active Directory Linking for Junior Librarian net ccccceeeeeees 206 How do link Junior Librarian net borrowers to Active Dir CtOry cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 207 How do check that the scheduled task has run Successfully ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 209 How do know which borrowers are not linked to Active DireCtory cccceseeeeeeeeeeees 210 How do import Active Directory details into Junior Librarian net cccceceseeeeeeeeeees 211 Chanter 13 TAVMO Data i iieaoe n a a aa aaa 214 Data Cleanse Replacements uscisse a a aaa 214 What is data cleanse replacements ccccccccseccceeeceuceceeecneeceuceceeeceucessueeeseessueeseessaes 214 How do I apply the settings for data cleanse replaceMentS ccccscccceeeeseeeeeeseeeeseees 214 Data Cleanse CIN OVC
189. est Mee Hae doch Pn nous 100 Greatest W Hardback gt 42718 4 Seche Johnson Patncia 100 Greatest Manmade Wonders Hardback O53 NS Milegton J 100 Gaastions And Answers Ponies And Horses Pagartback A 5592 1001 Facts About Wild Animals bone Sd Local Firmat The Advanced Search box will then appear Select the arrow underneath Boolean to change the Boolean search criteria and then select which Field you d like to search by clicking on the blue box at the end of the field Select the Operator type by clicking on the drop down arrow and then lastly type in the search criteria in the Value box The examples below will give you a better understanding of how Boolean logic works Click this arrow to Advanced Search Type the word s change the Boolean Operator Value you d like to Boolean search E search for here option aw Y Title Including w Harry Potter Field Table Operator Value Use these arrows to change the order of the searches you ve requested Once you ve clicked Add the search criteria will appear here Click Add to add a your search Click Apply when criteria you are happy with the search criteria within the box Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 226 WW Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data mM is Boolean And When using AND in your search the results you get will contain all of the words you have entered The results will not include those records which contain only one of the words
190. et to find the information you need How do I use quick search A Quick Search means you can type a word into the Quick Search box and the system will perform a search for the word in whichever table you are in The Quick Search box is located at the top right of the screen A Meegeren Marne reee Erpa prora by Mire vera Teoterey rete be beim pes airs Bodi Type the word s 3 2 you d like to ee F ae search for here P and then click Go d f a iP y Nig HE i le m Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 222 NV Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data mM is Which fields will it search The default fields which are searched in the Resources screen are Author1 Author2 Authors Author4 Class Composer Director Editor Keywords Level Manufacturer Series Summary Title Please Note If you wish to change the default fields which are searched on a view please contact the helpdesk on 0161 449 9357 lf you perform a search in a screen other than Resources the fields searched will depend on which ones you have in your view For example If you are performing a Quick Search in your Borrowers screen and the fields which are visible in this view are Barcode Surname Group Name and Year Group only these fields will be searched Ead mi Ee Cate ye Chee a Sant Con Pe To i oe P az PA 1k e Biroji Simaia Forbana Groug iama Tear Groep Ma aouibes 4105 Abid Imr
191. fer all of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT including all component parts the media and printed materials any upgrades this EULA and if applicable the Certificate of Authenticity and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA 3 ALL RIGHTS NOT EXPRESSLY GRANTED HEREIN ARE RESERVED BY MLS 4 TERMINATION Without prejudice to any other rights MLS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA In such event you must destroy all copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT and all of its component parts 5 COPYRIGHT All title and copyrights in and to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT including but not limited to any images photographs animations video audio music text and applets incorporated into the SOFTWARE PRODUCT the accompanying printed materials the accompanying online materials and any copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT are owned by MLS or its suppliers Copyright laws and international treaty provisions protect the SOFTWARE PRODUCT Therefore you must treat the SOFTWARE PRODUCT like any other copyrighted material You may not copy the printed or online materials accompanying the SOFTWARE PRODUCT Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 2 X mis 6 LIMITED WARRANTY MLS guarantees that a during a time period of forty five 45 days starting at the same date of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT acquisition the SOFTWARE PRODUCT will work and operate conforming to the terms and conditions of the provid
192. fferent part of the school To save you having to manually change this on each resource you can use the Quick Replace function You must first search for the records you wish to change See Chapter 15 Viewing Library Data section on Searching databases Once you have just the records you wish to change on screen from the menu bar at the top of the page select Tools and then Quick Replace v Database Schedule Modules LOGS Security Settings Heip Barcode Clas QD Export amp Flagging gt Title zope 746 57 R i Select Tools rai wo Th Quick Replace on ee and then Add Keywords Quick Replace Arete gt 1747 574 sookofiheweek WILDLIFE OF FA Br 1748 574 vawe WILDLIFE IN TOWNS Floor Pian Tutor Groups 1750 574 Calendar WILDLIFE OF WOODI 2 Edt Rerrernders 1751 574 BIOLOGY Current Loans vhniesnts scala zi gt 1753 574 ASIMOV I is there life on other pl OD i54 574 BELLAMYD BOTANIC MAN Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 160 W Chapter 10 Maintaining My Library mM iS The Quick Replace box will then appear Quick Replace works by looking for one piece of text and then replacing it with another Select the specific field you wish to make changes to by clicking the box at the end of the Field line If you have searched for specific records to be changed make sure you select the Filtered Records range Choosing All Records means that the changes will be m
193. fields you d like to appear in the reminder and then use the arrows to select them HE Date Due C Days on Loan bO Fie Rete i fissue Time L O Loan Period H Machine Name bO Overdue A preview of the how the fields will look on the reminder is shown here 2 153 Fiction Resoff Meg 1805 2007 153 Fiction Blume J 18 05 2007 0 Fiction Colfer Eoin inn Onn 111 nps RAamilinn ad K Just In Case Starring Sally J Half Moon Investigations Haru Potter amp The Philnsonher S Stone Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 and Save Close ICONS Highlight the field you d like to move and then use these arrows to change its location on the grid When you are happy with the reminder text and the grid click Save 138 Nyi Chapter 7 Loans m l S How do I specify what format the reminder is sent in As well as being able to change the content of your Reminders you can also specify what format it will be sent in i e email print or both You can also choose who the reminder is sent to i e borrower or guardian For example You may want your Reminder 4 to be emailed directly to the borrower s guardian Select the reminder that you want to edit from the reminder list Click on the Options tab at the top of the Edit Reminders screen and then click the drop down arrow next to Send to and select who you want this reminder to always be sent to e g Guardi
194. fmpenelbAbbediions required fields P S Click Browse to browse to where the live media is stored Click the drop down a arrow to see a list of sndaq GOND EDOD z keywords You can jump to a specific word by typing in the start of the word Click Save when you have finished To Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 58 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S How do I catalogue music e une l From the New Resource screen click on the veg icon Audio Follow the instructions at the beginning of this section on how to enter the resource s barcode Please note that with items other than Books you are not required to enter an ISBN number Once the resource record screen appears click in each field in which you wish to add information There are drop down arrows next to most fields on the screen Clicking these means you can select from a list of previously entered information Click Save when you ve finished Details Enter the resource details by filling in the required fields Click the drop down arrow to see a list of keywords You can jump to a specific word by typing in the start of the word Click Save when you have finished Aad EGE How do I catalogue a musical instrument From the New Resource screen click on the Icon Musical Instrument Follow the instructions at the beginning of this section on how to enter th
195. for you e Edit the scheduled task e Stop a scheduled task Some scheduled tasks can t be changed These are e Error Log e Audit Log How do edit a scheduled task From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Schedule and then View Tasks a Management Microsoft Internet Explorer prow Schedule Modules Descovery Database Click Schedule and then View Tasks Cwectory Services Rerenders Date Tidy wy y ia mM The Schedule screen will appear which lists all of the tasks you have asked it to run Highlight the task you want to edit and click the P Edt icon under the Records tab on the right of the screen Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 183 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis AE TETI Leite Ft Hodules ri Ti 4 a vie RAT FF Highlight _ Page of i j recordi Des crip Last Aiia Wawi Rui Ciates Mosid gi the task Resources bed Houde Keapang fee 9 03 00 yo u d like to Discovery Onine 164M 2009 04 38 1TOKR009 04 38 edit AR Quiz list impart 01 05 2005 00 00 Tular reap Cereal Laas 2 os Click Edit to ese open up the e task settings The screen showing the settings for the task will appear Make the changes you require and then click Save Repeat this for each task you d like to edit Tells you when the task was last run Last Run 16 04 2009 E Select when Start Date 12
196. ge the default restriction group as long as you have created others to something more suitable to that particular Tutor Group or individual To create a new borrower restriction group click on the Settings tab and then Restrictions from the menu bar at the top of the screen Management Microsoft Intemet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited Database Schedule Modules Tools Secunty Setings Help d OSICT iene ie De el Barcode Class Author Barcodes Resources r b laniata Junior Librarian Click on Settings ra Data Tidy and then Borrowers 574 ANDERSON P Fields Restrictions Language Q 574 GILMAND fa i Tutor Groups 574 CARTERG Restrictions Reservabons 574 WATERS J ae ANDS THE Current Loans Past Loans Print 574 CHISHOLM J eee Reminders 574 ASIMOV G Cencral ER PLANE 574 BELLAMY D BOTANIC MAN Daranrstinan E AAAA el A AANRAAI M AAi Yi r a AA a For more information on Restrictions please see Chapter 6 Restrictions Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 45 Chapter 3 Settings m Is Reservations Click on Settings and then Restrictions It is within this area that general settings for Reservations are set Management ssh a net end ere iied Database hedule Module Security Setings Heip mne pa BaSouIGOS ii SE Password Manager A Module Settings gt Barcode Class a Eacode Cass Aulhor nnnm Resources E is 574 GILMAN D X gt 1746 574 ANDERSON P
197. gjgement Sram 1D all records into the 7 EREN borrower database Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 213 Ww Chapter 13 Tidying Data m Is Chapter 13 Tidying Data This chapter will explain how to make changes to the data you have entered into Junior Librarian net and how to stop certain words from being entered If more than one person has been responsible for cataloguing resources data entry may be different in respect of case or punctuation The Data Cleanse Replacements section tells you how to replace words which are entered into the catalogue with a word of your choice The Data Cleanse Remove section tells you how to stop words being entered into the catalogue The Data Tidy section tells you how to apply the settings for tidying your data and how to schedule a time for the tidy to take place Data Cleanse Replacements What is data cleanse replacements When entering resources or borrowers into Junior Librarian net especially if more than one person has been in charge of this you may have differences in the way that some words have been entered For example the word U F O may have been entered onto a resource record but you want it to be written as UFO Data Cleanse Replacements is a database which you can add words to along with a replacement word This means that when a resource or borrower has been added to the catalogue and includes a word listed in Data Cleanse Replacements the word is auto
198. h standard and ones you have created will vary depending on the database you are in The Page Views facility in Junior Librarian net allows you to customise the display in each of the databases by setting your own default view MLS have already set up a number of standard views within each database for you to utilise these are called System Page Views However you can create your own Views containing the fields and data you wish to display How do I create a new view Once you are confident about searching the different databases see Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data you will be able to create your own Views To access Page Views click on More under the Page Views tab on the right of the screen Make sure you are in the database you want to create the new view for i e Resources Dalahase Schedule Modules Teale Fenurity r SLI Ce Resources X 1745 Borrowers e 1747 B er Tutor Groups e 1760 e e 1751 Current Loans gi 1763 Past Loana ha n a 1754 Reservations gt 1767 2 e 1758 ND i a 1760 La 1769 e 1772 a 1774 e 17T e 1777 gt 1778 E e 1783 gt iTi e 1767 gm p amp Pod Barcode Class Author ILMAN D GILMAN D CARTER G WATERS J CHISHOLM J ASIMOW BELLARY D LOGVINOFF A CHINERY Mi WELSON R PERRY P BARRETT M ALDERTON D DE SARIGHE 5 WATSON A MORRIS D WHALLEY M MORRIS D MORRIS D PIA fl PENNY M WILLAMS B 1 SCHAUE
199. have their Mobile Numbers entered into the borrower record These numbers have to be entered in a specific format with the leading 0 replaced with a 44 E g 07123456789 would become 447123456789 they must also contain only numeric characters with no spaces Barcode 1363 Details Advanced Forename Susan Surname Lumley Title Miss Date of Birth 31 07 1993 Group Name 5 5 House Ethnicity Address Guardian 1 Address Telephone Work 0000 Current Loans Guardian 2 Name Statement Reservations Past Loans Notes y Gender Female X E Age x Year Group v m Set NA Photograph Postcode Mobile 447820000000 Email Enter the Mobile Number into the Mobile field If assistance is required in changing the format of mobile numbers in Junior Librarian net please contact the MLS Help Desk Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 286 mis Chapter 19 Third Party Products How do Schedule Text Message Alerts Go to Settings Module Settings SMS Settings On the Forms tab select the options for which you would like Text Message Alerts to be sent In the example below Enable SMS Reminders and Enable SMS Statements have been chosen Forms i Biling Housekeeping Define sending time limits SMS account Select SMS provider Truancy Call Sender masks Reminders Library Enable SMS reminders Statement Library Enable SMS sta
200. he system default language Click Modify to change the fields for the highlighted language 41 ae Chapter 3 Settings m S At the top left of the screen under the Section drop down list select which section of Junior Librarian net you wish to change the fields for To change Field Names make sure this has been selected ZA Section Field Names v Select the section that you would like to edit the fields for Guardian 1 Edit Date Added Machine Name Notes Address 3 Edit Address 2 Edit otes Table names address Week Days deressi Message here e g Field Page View address 1 Edit Address Enumeration Address 6 Names 5 Currency Symbols Address S Address Validation Messages Address Fingerprint Stored Year Group Recycled Serial Number Reminder Number Page 1 of 23 433 items Les Save Cancel k Cg A list of the fields you can change will then be shown The original name is listed under the Source heading any modification name is listed under the Edited heading To change a field name highlight the field in the list i e highlight Recycled to change to Deleted Click the Edit option next to the field name that you want to change The cursor will flash next to the field name Type the new name e g Deleted and then click Save at the bottom of the screen Click Save again on the main languages page Please note
201. he My Books page where you search page may Reserve resources Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 150 wa Chapter 8 Reservations m S Please Note If the student is not yet logged in they will be requested to scan or type their barcode number into the login box which will pop up upon your first attempt of dragging an item into the My Stuff treasure chest Login Barcode Username Please enter your barcode number to login As soon as the student has successfully logged in the resource will be placed into the My Stuff treasure chest Once the student has filled their My Stuff treasure chest with whatever resources they wish click on the My Stuff treasure chest for a link to the My Stuff page e PE User ANDY O BRIEN 1001 Facts About Wild Animals Print Reserve Yee Print All or Remove t Reserve All resources here Remove All Drag resource into Reserve to reserve the item Resources currently stored in the My Stuff area Drag items into Review to review the resource 2 NA O oN fo e l m aaa A a To Reserve the resource the student simply needs to drag the item into the Reserve treasure chest Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 151 Nae Chapter 8 Reservations m Is The second way to reserve a resource is by logging into the My Books screen lf the student is not logged in already they will be presented with the login screen as displayed below
202. he resource type you are cataloguing you will be given the option of either scanning or typing the resource s barcode and or the ISBN EAN onto the system The following instructions demonstrate how to scan the ISBN of a book and the barcode you have allocated to it using the barcode reader Depending on the resource type you are cataloguing these options will differ Please Note When cataloguing Live Media and Websites as these are not physical resources you won t be given the option of adding a barcode Instead you will be taken straight to a blank resource record card where you can start adding the resource s details Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 53 wa Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S ka Scan the EAN ISBN barcode of the book using the barcode reader Resources Please scan or type the barcode you are Em e r a assigning to the new resource S pokni aapa pa E If the item you are cataloguing has an onl EAN ISBN then scan or type it as well ne then click continue i i BRA A Se aa oes phd ge ta h Ni EAE i EAN ISBN Barcode Auto Scan the barcode label of the item you are cataloguing or click Continue Cancel Auto to allow the system to nominate a number If the book does not have an EAN ISBN click Continue You will be taken to a blank resource record card where you can add the details manually Once you have scanned or typed the resource s barcod
203. his task click on Schedule and View Tasks Database schedule Modules Tools Security Settings Help Description Last Run Next Run Status Message el tel ie Resources 7 ae External Media Download 26 11 2009 00 00 gt Running Importing 54 orroa House Keeping 20 11 2009 00 00 Once the download has completed successfully navigate back to the Resources screen and click on More beneath the Page Views heading on the right hand toolbar Scroll through the available list of page views to find the newly created Signed Stories view beneath the SearchStar sub heading a Reference Religion and Mythology 2 E Resources with Price Delete Romans Select LO 22 Signed Stories Default Liddle Import Export 5 6 Use this facility to create alternative views of the data you are currently viewing You can change the fields colours and fonts amongst other things Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 282 WW Chapter 19 Third Party Products m S How Can the Children View Signed Stories in the Silverlight Home Page Simply by clicking on the Signed Stories icon wherever available If the icon is greyed out it means that that particular resource does not have a signed story linked to it To search specifically for Signed Stories click on Search and Views to locate the view containing all resources with Signed Stories Please note this page view is created as descri
204. i 2 Right Click on any report in the list and select the option New Easy Adhoc Export Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 87 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m Is 3 From the list click on Surname Preferred Forename Date of Birth Gender Date of Admission Class and Roll No You must click on these in the SAME ORDER as they are listed here ya oe So a T 5 Code wr lett Le Gabel View r ee recess saci 4 Click OK 5 Inthe screen that appears change TAB to CSV and put in the title Junior Export so that your screen looks like the one that appears below Please make sure you tick the Omit Titles option 6 Click Save Report 7 Inthe list of reports the report we have just created should appear Click on it 8 From the destination box in the middle of the screen click on Export File 9 Now click on All Current Pupils 10 Phoenix will now ask you for a filename Type in students csv and click Save Ensure you take note of where it is saving the file It will prompt you to launch an application Select the option Do Not Launch Application and click OK 11 Minimise Phoenix using the button 12 If you wish to edit the data make sure you edit it in Notepad Please do not edit it in Microsoft Excel as you will lose the correct file format Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 88 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S Other administration systems Stud
205. ick on Settings Password Manager Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited Click on Settings Password Manager Schedule Modules Tools Security Settings Help Password Manager Modde Sefings gt Barcode Class Author Barcodes Data Tidy 19168 Fiction Pilkey Dav Flee pants Hardware 123583055 7914 BBC Language Files tl Page Views as S123583073 7914 BBC ee fies Reservations Renews Current Loans 5123584239 Fiction Morris Mark Ghost Past Loans ta J4 The Complexity tab on the Password Manager window displays three options each for both the Borrower and User Manager accounts Prrting Referers 5123578624 Fiction Swallow Jai Genera Peace T CtVEEONAN Eietian Quelle lamas Minrctas Wiha Danar x Complexity Global Update V Borrower Weak Strong Complex W User Manager Weak Strong Complex Apply Close The requirements for each option are listed below Weak Minimum of 5 characters in length Strong Minimum of 8 characters in length containing at least 1 number Complex Minimum of 8 characters in length containing at least 1 number and both upper lower case characters Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 29 Ww Chapter 3 Settings m Is The Global Update tab on the Password Manager window displays options for Logon Names Pa
206. ictions Age restrictions can be overridden Prevent loans to overdue readers Select the settings you want to apply here Click Save to save the settings Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 133 Chapter 7 Loans m S Chapter 7 Loans This chapter explains how to manage and view your loans The Current Loans section tells you how to view your current loans and how to return and renew them from the current loans screen The Editing Loan Reminders section tells you how to change the text and layout within each of your reminder types The Sending Loan Reminders section explains how reminders work how to send out loan reminders to your borrowers using various methods and how to schedule a time for your reminders to be sent out automatically The Past Loans section tells you how to view both your current and past loans and how to delete any past loans data you no longer need Current Loans How do I view all current loans To view the full list of current loans click on the 2 icon from the tool bar on the left of the screen Current Loans How do return resources from current loans As well as using Circulate you can also return a resource from the Current Loans screen Find and click on the loan you d like to return and then click Feturn under the Records tab on the right of the screen To return multiple resources click X Flagging Under the Records tab and click on each resource Once y
207. ictions on any of your resource records place a tick in Apply age restrictions to activate this setting A General Borrowers Resources C Allow reference books to be issued F Remove closed days from days overdue V Remove closed days from fine calculation V Apply age restrictions F Prevent loans to overdue readers S ave C lose Click on the Borrowers tab As you can see there is a restriction group already set up called Normal which is the Default group To create a new group click Add General Borrowers Resources Restrictions groups are listed here System Default Normal v Click the arrow ailable Restrictions to select a new Norma _ default group Click Add to create anew Edit Delete restriction group Save Close Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 118 ww Chapter 6 Restrictions m S Type a name in for the restriction group you are creating e g Borrowers and then click Add q O PRUGA GT EFT TPE EaR Ba r 1 Description Boronwers mm The next screen is where you can specify the allowances you want this restriction group to have Type these in and then click Save Adding Resource Type Restrictions will be covered later in this section Description Borrowers Maximum Allowance 3 Specify the standard allowances and loan period here Maximum Reservations 3 Loan Period 14 Resource Type Restrictions Resource Type Cri
208. ide of the screen Navigate to the Current Loans tab of the Borrower record highlight the resource you would like to mark as missing and click on the Barcode 6 Name Details Advanced Current Loans Statement Reservations Past Loans Barcode Title Issue Date Loan Period Date Due Total Renewals Location 2628 Tales of Beedle the Bard the 25 02 2010 80 17 05 2010 0 Library Highlight the resource you wish to mark as Missing Click on the Mark as Missing button on the bottom of the screen gt a Page 1 of 1 1 records Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 164 WW Chapter 10 Maintaining My Library m iS On the Missing screen specify a Reason Missing by either selection an option from the drop down list or by typing in a reason manually this field works like other fields in record cards where if you have typed in a value manually that value will appear in the drop down list the next time You may also wish to enter a Cost of Replacement and select whether you wish to Return the resource We do suggest you choose to Return resource this will remove it from the Borrower s record when placing the resource in the Recycle Bin and will avoid future confusion as to the whereabouts of the on loan now missing resource You can use this facility to mark resources as missing and if required charge the cost of replacement to the borrower Tithe Tick the Return Author resource optio
209. ier in this chapter If you want to senda Click here to send reminders to specific reminder click re borrowers who have overdue Output Selected Reminder EAA items only Only and select the minder 2 reminder you wish to send Select how you wish the reminders to be sent If you want the last reminder to be printed again for those readers who have already Ee Cenete resiaciers tor aneriue Ma received it make sure you click eee When you are happy this box before clicking a Se eee Ene with the settings click Generate aa Generate Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 147 Chapter 7 Loans Past Loans How do view past loans To view the full list of past loans click on the of the screen Past Loans miS icon from the tool bar on the left The Past Loans database shows both current and past loans To view just past loans click on more under the Page Views tab on the right of the screen Double click on the Past Loans view How do I delete a past loan Find and click on the loan you d like to delete and then click on the the Records tab on the right of the screen To delete more than one past loan use Flagging See Chapter 16 Viewing Library Data section on Flagging for more information Delete Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited Database Schedule Modules Tools Security Issue Date Return Date Class Author
210. ies recan 281 How Can the Children View Signed Stories in the Silverlight Home Page 006 283 Text M ssage Alers irirna a E R 284 What are Text Message Alerts cccccccseeccececesceceeeceuseceecsueeceueeseeseusessueeseessueeseeeseas 284 How do Setup Text Message Alerts cccccccecsecceceeeeceeeeeseeeeseesessaeeeseusessaeeeseeeesseeees 284 How do Schedule Text Message Alerts cccccccceecccseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeesesesseeeeseesesaeeesees 287 How do check if the messages have been sent successfully ccceececseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 290 CUI K VGWacatcsccesece accor cee E A 291 What Ie CICK VIOW epean E bakit apseustionsnasiethts 291 How do Import ClickView into Junior Librarian net ccccccccceeceseeeeeceeeesaeeeeseeeeeseeeens 292 How do Borrowers view ClickView Videos in Junior Librarian net ccccccesseeeeeeeeeees 294 How do Borrowers search ClickView Videos in Junior Librarian net cccceceeeeeeeeeees 295 mis MLS END USER LICENCE AGREEMENT This Licence Agreements lets you install the product for one 1 Site on one 1 domain IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This End User Licence Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and MLS Micro Librarian Systems Limited for the MLS product identified above which includes computer software and may include associated media printed materials and online or
211. illips Steve STAFF 0 i i 26 01 2009 0 Lord Loss Phillips Steve STAFF 0 Resource item click 26 01 2009 0 Charlotte s Web Underwood Pete STAFF 0 on Renew to renew the 26 01 2009 0 Elephant Wellyphant Winter Alison STAFF 0 it em 26 01 2009 0 Cowcumbers Pipplewaks And Altigators Smith Laura STAFF 0 26 01 2009 0 Flat Stanley Lloyd Colin STAFF 0 News 17 02 2009 0 Harry Potter amp The Goblet Of Fire O brien Andy STAFF 0 a Reminders 10 02 2009 0 Mr Perfect Turner Gemma 7WIL 0 amp Flagging Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 111 Chapter 5 Circulate m Is Multi Return Multi Return provides an option which enables users to return multiple resources in a much more efficient way Click on Multi Return from the signpost on the Home page Simply scan the barcodes of the resources you want to return 7 A Le Simply scan the Resource s barcode into this box once scanned the resource will show as returned and will be listed in the area below Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 112 WwW Chapter 5 Circulate m S What happens if the resource I scan isn t on loan If you are in Multi Return and are returning a lot of resources you may have a resource which isn t actually on loan If you scan a resource which isn t on loan a message will appear on screen to let you know Simply put the cursor over the l to see the error message For this particular error the message will read Coul
212. imum Renewals 2 Acquisition Cha nge Maximum Reservations 2 Date 1 E restrictions for the Maximum Fine 1 ene E Fine Rate 0 02 Test resource here See Chapter 6 Not allowed to Restrictions for Cl Year Group 0 information Ever Geo 7 M Year Group 8 Cl Year Group 9 Cl Year Group 10 Cl Year Group 11 vj Q Q C Book of the Week Loans The Loans tab shows all current and past loan information for the resource You can change the layout of the loans screen See Chapter 3 Settings section on Page Views es Tells you when Detads Advanced Loans Resrvanc s Sumana Phoragsaph Linked Mert Shows which borrower the resource is the resource is r ies due back currently on loan to If ee see Tam ee p 27 11 2005 1606 006 166 SMALLEY Te Jay the borrower field is ora 14 07 2005 9 Tennent Daniel 2S DABS g Termert blank the resource O02005 07 11 2006 i O Brien 2A 1712 2001 1 OBnen isn t on loan 5 05 2005 10 0 2006 166 SMALLEY 1 OBne aie g lag A full list of 1303 2007 1 OBnen current and past loans is displayed here OOQ La QOO l Sook of the Week Save Close Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 67 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S Reservations The Reservations tab lists all of the details of the resources current reservations You can change the layout of the reservations screen See Chapter 3 Settings section on Page Views Barcode 1745 Title LIFE ON THE SEASH
213. in for more information on the reminder default output settings Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 49 WwW Chapter 3 Settings m Is General The General menu option allows you to change the image that appears on the home page for Junior Librarian net From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Settings and then General Barcode Class Author x Te 1745 574 GILMAND Borrowers P 1746 s74 ANDERSON P IS ANC amp 574 GILMAN D Tutor Groups 1748 574 CARTERG La gt 1750 574 WATERS J ID THE Page Views Restrictions Reservations Click on Settings sumaa d th Current Loans a 2 1751 574 CHISHOLM J General ieee gt 1753 574 ASIMOV i 4 amra ows rme aaner mararun aana Click on Browse to browse to the image before clicking Upload and finally Save Interlace My Account Click on Browse to browse to the imaae Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 50 Chapter 3 Settings m S Interface switching To choose between Junior Classic and the Beach Scene interfaces follow these instructions Click on the Interface tab _ Logo Interface My Account Default Application Junior Librarian NET Home Page Style Eclipse net Silverlight Click on the drop down ee arrow and choose the Junior Librarian net Classic d i d i f f Key Stage 1 amp 2 Beach Scene esire interface trom Bess the list Click on the Save b
214. inder 2 and so on Choose the type of reminder you want to edit by clicking the drop down arrow Select the reminder from the list and then click Edit Click Add to create your own Select the reminder bs type you wa nt to edit The reminders listed below are shown in their spective as order i e the respective ascending order i e the top reminder by clicking the arrow 4 will be sent first then the next one on the list and and s forth Individual reminder The reminders are listed in Reminder 2 the order that they will be Remnant Delete Click Edit to open up the I Edit Reminder screen Reminder 4 sent to your borrowers Click Delete to delete the reminder Click Save to save any Use these arrows to change the changes you ve made order that the reminders are sent Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 136 Ww Chapter 7 Loans m S The Edit Reminder screen will then appear where you ll see three tabs Reminder is where you can change the text which appears in the reminder and add images such as the school logo to the reminder Grid is where you can change the fields which appear on the reminder and their position Options is where you can specify the format that the reminder is sent in and who it is sent to To edit the reminder text select the Reminder tab at the top of the Edit Reminders screen The text which has a box around it can be changed to any of the fields
215. inder to be printed and emailed a reminder PDF document will appear on the screen for you to print and an email will be sent to the borrower s email address automatically Again if you don t want to print your reminders at that time click the cross to close the document and then print from the Output Recycle Bin when you are ready What if the borrower s email address is wrong or missing If you have specified the reminder to be sent by email but the address is wrong or missing the system will automatically send the reminder to the email address entered in the reminder settings screen For more information on the email reminder settings please see Chapter 3 Settings section Reminders Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 140 Chapter 7 Loans m S Sending Loan Reminders Before you send out your loan reminders you ll need to make sure that the text inside each reminder is displayed in the way you want the order in which each reminder is sent is correct and that the format for how and who you want to send the reminder to is correct See sections above on How do l edit the text in my reminders and How do specify what format the reminder is sent in Individual and group reminders are sent automatically using the Schedule however they can also be sent manually to individual borrowers Please see section How do I print reminders to individual borrowers for how to do this How do individual reminders work Indi
216. ingle company You must disclose and reveal to MLS the name of the company on which the SOFTWARE PRODUCT will be installed and used Use means storing loading installing executing or displaying the SOFTWARE PRODUCT 2 DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS Support Services MLS may provide you with support services related to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT Support Services All support services will be provided via an annual support contract starting the same day that the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is supplied MLS may use such information for its business purposes including for product support and development MLS will not utilize such technical information in a form that personally identifies you Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 1 mis License Term Verification MLS reserves the right to check all Licensees to verify compliance with this EULA In order to verify this compliance you understand and acknowledge that the SOFTWARE PRODUCT may collect and send back information to MLS about the location where the SOFTWARE PRODUCT has been installed This information is entirely restricted to the IP address where the SOFTWARE PRODUCT is installed no other information will be collected or sent back to MLS Confidential Information The term Confidential Information means any information or material which is proprietary to MLS whether or not owned or developed by MLS which is not generally known other than by MLS and which you h
217. ions listed in the reservations database ccccecseeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 153 How do deleted reservation sirsenis onien a Heiethiwendsiats tadenhewendsbens tes 153 How do automatically delete reservations ccccceccccseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseueeeseeeeseeeesaneenees 154 Contents V Chapter 9 ROVICWS cinni 155 Making FIO VIGW S sscpoer ienaa ora sist wpesmnens wand ouvuceanscsp tease ETNEA EET 155 How do borrowers review resources ccccceeccceeeceeeeceeeeseeeceueeseeecseeseueeseeesueeseeesseeesaes 155 MANAGING REVIEWS ossaa aAA 157 How do VIEW reviEWS sorserien enone 157 How do approve a review ccccceccceeccceecceuceceeeceuceceueccueecsuceceeecsueeseuessueessuseseeessusenaess 157 How do I delete a review sass rari ood fae Ara costae vor case lanes Seinen d tasu seit denhoealanuse gous 158 How do add my OWN review QUESTIONS cccccseececeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaaueeseeeessaeeeseeeaeeeesees 158 Chapter 10 Maintaining My Library cccccsssseeseeseeeeeeseeseenseeeeeneeseesseeenenseseenseesoeasensoens 159 Making Changes TO RESOUICES ccccscseeseseeeseseeeneeeenseeneneeeeaseeneneeneaseneasesoeneeoeaneenenesooanes 159 FOW d0u Callan existing resource V ton vescc wasn a a x ean mates aoe 159 How CO GElele a TESOUICE Zia RER a 159 How do change the accession number of a resource ss sssessesrrerrrerrrrrrresrrrsrrrsrrrn 160 How do make global changes to selected re
218. ions to my borrower restriction groups 6 120 How do change the default borrower restriction group ccccccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 122 How do change a tutor group s borrower restriction group ssssssnossererrnrerserrrnrrrerrnne 122 How do I change an individual borrower s restriction group ceecseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 123 How do I globally set resource restrictions cccceccceeccceeeeseeeceeeeceeecseeeseueeseesaueeseeesaes 124 How do I set restrictions for individual resources sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 126 Restrictions example table Ssnan R 127 Contents iV OS ANS CA oaslease stigmata cancata canna cup auca gama am tacenacade am aueda car quutagnneunacesausdiau aualenusqudaenantand antis 131 How do mark weekends and closed days cccscccssccceeeceececeueeceeecsueecueeseeessueeseeesaees 131 How do force a return date for resources cece ceccceececeeeeeeeecaeeeseeeeeeeeseueeseeeseeeeseesaees 132 FIOW OO QO NOLS ais chasse a oa lalateis ata eae siete ease a 132 How do exclude closed days from fines ANd overdue s cccececeeeceeeceeeeeeeseeeseeeneenes 133 Chapter 7 COaNS orca ca ee faeces orto erect etcetera a tenwermucceved ce vewecau ance stuceeneemwacouaetaceeveusats 134 GUPFE NU EO ANS moa RA 134 How do View all CUIFENTIOAINS ss tsscnsy erate cease ydeyawea esky xan A 134 How do return resources fro
219. is displayed in the way you want the order in which each reminder is sent is correct and that the format of the reminder is how you want it to look When you install Junior Librarian net there will already be some default reminders set up for you You can edit or delete these as you wish From the menu bar at the top of the page select Tools and then Edit Reminders Z Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limite Database Schedule Modules Toots Security Settings eee peen Oe i Resources 2 impor Barcode Clas a Export Title 1745 574 Quick Replace LIFE ON THE S Aad Keywords Borrowers 1747 574 Book of the Week WILOLIFE OF F Select Tools Br gt 1748 srap WILDLIFE IN TC and then Edit jeri Floor Pian Reminders smart La 1750 574 Calendar WILDL Edit Reminders gt 1751 574 BIOLOGY Current Loans dosana EA 1753 574 ASIMOVI is there life on a The Edit Reminders screen will then appear The drop down arrow next to the Add tab enables you to select a different type of reminder e g Individual Group or Memo The reminders for each type are listed in the order they will be sent For example In individual reminders you may have your Reminder 1 as the gentlest reminder and reminder 4 as being the most severe This means that once a borrower has received Reminder 1 the next time the reminders are scheduled to be sent that borrower will receive Rem
220. ish TEEG00T Mache LESTI Cuan l z TAT e i eT Core Low inaug Co co Dumi Wed DIEE DEE Cumi WET B A RAL ume Pustioass 6 GOT tita ide Gus iti Teor ve a Guest TEGO SAC Rieck AAC Bleck toe Beeni kDOT Mackerel Marcas er TROT A ai ues THRO Misciacram Maccoem feet Tibit gere DOSE er THERIOT We al TUHOT WII al TET my Maranon a Pera he HY BG ea TTT AAS i EST TET For ke ner LTT F oF TA oT CO LO ner TE TOOT Palaces bent Macropis Suet WABI TAs 1987 Ti 1HE Mira W TT TWIT hs 153 Tari eHO ATES BTEC Tikri TTT UFOs UPC Cikri Tet Tiri IiHIETIOT Wi w Cikri meno UFO UFG ET TETOOT The Ih Tikrit TEOT i fet Dikri ihieHoT tra 1h ET iNET AAC Black ASC Black Guat Cine page sew A Repase of Tarpe Hites Peonerted blade SET Aiii Once you have added the words to the Data Cleanse Replacements database you then need to specify which fields within the resource borrower record that you want Data Cleanse Replacements to apply to Make sure that you are in the correct screen that you want to enter the settings for i e Resources or Borrowers In the screenshot below the Resources database has been selected Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 215 W Chapter 13 Tidying Data m iS From the menu bar at the top of the screen click on Settings and then Data Tidy Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited Database Schedule Modules Tools Security Setiings Help S
221. ish between the different types of barcodes which will be scanned as your library becomes more established Click OK when you have finished XI Sescription SLS 5 Digits OK Select the type of description for a aaa anil barcode here e g the mask here Mask Reese Resource or Typea Modification Mask Borrower Return the Value Definition Help The system uses barcode masks to identify the barcodes as and wy scanne scanned The Mask provides a format definition for each individual barcode whilst the m modification mask tells the system if and how you want to format the Type the sy bols ine n reodes which correspond The Mask itself should be made up of Letters Digits and any of the following character placeholders to the barcode here Numeric Alphabetic 7 Any The Modification Mask can be made up of any Letter Digit or any of the following placeholders 7 Any Character Remove Character What if my barcodes include a letter which is different on each barcode You may have a situation where you have some barcodes which consist of alohanumeric characters where a different letter has been included in each one For example 123A4 234B5 276V9 In this case the mask would be because it is better to use the symbol as this indicates that the letter could be any letter between A to Z Not using the symbol would mean creating 26 different masks Please Note
222. itoring software assessment in wide use by primary and secondary schools for monitoring the practice of reading and it is created by Renaissance Learning Currently there are two versions a desktop version and a web based version Renaissance Place Please Note Renaissance Learning no longer support the desktop version of Accelerated Reader Because of this Junior Librarian net is only compatible with Renaissance Place Once a book has been read the borrower has the option of taking a quiz Junior Librarian net doesn t store the Accelerated Reader quizzes however it does give you a list of the books in your library which do have quizzes available Please Note in order to use quizzes from Accelerated Reader it is imperative that you have purchased these quizzes they do not come as part of the package when purchased with Junior Librarian net only the list of the books which have quizzes available are free If there have been no quizzes purchased no quizzes will be available How do I find out which of my resources have quizzes To find out which of your books have quizzes all you need to do is import the Accelerated Reader master quiz list into Junior Librarian net The master quiz list is a list of all Accelerated Reader Quizzes provided by Renaissance Learning By importing this list into Junior Librarian net it adds the Accelerated Reader information to all of the books in your catalogue which have quizzes You are then able to vie
223. ked aooo Created 05 05 2010 Completed 06 05 2010 Not Checked ce Click each tab Print to view and or print the list of ed Iter ems Missing Items resources Time Resource Type Barcode Title Author Class Media Location Recycled Datei Cli ck th e 57 2 baal 10036 Montmorency Updale Eleanor Fiction Audio Library a 10007 King Of The Middle March Crossley Holland Kevin Fiction Audio Library Print Icon to 2479 Hat Full Of Sky A Pratchett Temy Fiction Audio English Department print a list of Q 10002 Hat Full Of Sky A Pratchett Terry Fiction Audio Library resources 57 15001 Half Moon Investigations Colfer Eoin Fiction Audio Library LJ 10050 Gruffalo Song And Other Songs The Donaldson Julia f62 742 Audio Library 05 05 2010 13 57 04 LJ 10020 Girls In Tears Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library 05 05 2010 13 57 01 10048 Diamond Girls The Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library 1 of 10 e h Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 270 Chapter 19 Third Party Products m S Chapter 19 Third Party Products This chapter explains how third party products can be used in conjunction with Junior Librarian net The Accelerated Reader Quizzes section tells you how to import the quizzes you ve purchased from Renaissance Learning into Junior Librarian net and how to view the quiz list information Accelerated Reader Quizzes What are Accelerated Reader Quizzes Accelerated Reader AR is a daily progress mon
224. kiop oo rplan PING amp 0090 x Alaan hikes Desorption Floor Plan 1 Floor Plan ii conan Fire Exit You are here Browse Update Export Deigy gt Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 78 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m Is How do delete a floor plan record From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Database and then Floor Plan 16 Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by h ee cL LS Bi Schedule Modules T ols E Resources W Tutor Groups Barcode Class Author b Current Loans Select Database and 1745 574 GILMANT a Pact Lown 1747 574 GILMAN then Floor Plan 1748 574 CARTER 1750 574 WATERS 1751 574 CHISHOL 1753 574 ASIMOV 574 BELLAMY 591 LOGVINO 562 CHINERY 562 WILSON I Highlight the floor plan record that you want to delete and then click on Remove under the Records tab on the right of the screen Highlight the i Soence Lad 2 as 6 floor plan en een s s Click Remove you d like to I an o delete gt TEE aosF7 p E e ugl e ij i eel page ore Li n ek A Tred ites Pretend Mote OF The floor plan record will then be removed to the Floor Plan Recycle Bin If you want to restore it click on screen Recycle Bin under the Records tab on the right of the Highlight the floor plan record from the list and then cli
225. l Information section tells you what you ll need before being able to use Label Print The Printing Labels section tells you how to print the different types of barcode labels for your resources and borrowers Technical Information What will Label Print do LabelPrint is a program designed to offer users of Junior Librarian net a facility to print their own bar code labels for resources and borrowers These can be replacement labels for those lost or damaged or extra labels for new stock It will also print labels without bar codes for example classification spine labels Which printers will it work on Any laser ink jet or bubble jet printer but please ensure your printer is working with the correct driver installed We recommend your printer is set to Best Quality and not economy or draft mode See your own technical support if this is not the case Which labels should buy It is assumed you are printing on to A4 sheets with removable sticky labels There are many different shapes and sizes of labels available from any stationers or office supplies outlets Avery labels are probably the most common and several of the more popular configurations of Avery labels are automatically selectable within the software However any label type should work but may have to be described in terms of the dimensions etc before they are added to the built in list see below LabelPrint comes with various predefined label templates Plea
226. lass Media Location l O according to the 00 00 00 Ga 10013 Best Friends Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library 05 05 2010 13 56 57 2554 BestFriends Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio English De search results 05 05 2010 13 57 01 CJ 10048 Diamond Girls Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library 05 05 2010 13 57 04 CJ 10020 Girls In Tears Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library Checked Items Missing Items All Items Please Note Only resources which you have chosen to StockCheck will show in a search If you want to cancel the search simply click on the o icon Cancel Search Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 266 Chapter 18 StockCheck m S How do I download data from a portable barcode reader The most efficient method of scanning your resources is by using a portable bar code reader The main advantage of a portable bar code reader is that you scan the barcode label whilst the book is still on the shelf so you do not have to bring the book to the computer to be scanned All the numbers stored in the portable barcode reader can then be downloaded through a cable included in the package Portable bar code readers can be bought outright or hired for one week which is usually enough for most libraries Please contact MLS for the prices and availability of portable bar code readers for sale or hire Once you have finished scanning the barcodes with your portable barcode reader you
227. lect from a list of previously entered information lf you are cataloguing a book and it is either very old or very new Discovery Online may not hold the information at that time If that s the case you can either enter the details manually or wait until Discovery Online holds the information Please be assured that Discovery Online does get updated If you wish to change any information which has already been entered simply highlight it and then type the new details Click Save when you have finished What should I do with school library service books If you borrow books on long term loan from your School Library Service it is usual to add these to your catalogue with an indication as to their owner On the Owner field type School Library Service It is possible to use the existing SLS accession barcode in the book if it already has one How do catalogue a film A From the New Resource screen click on the TN icon Film Follow the instructions at the beginning of this section on how to enter the resource s barcode Please note that with items other than Books you are not required to enter an ISBN number Once the resource record screen appears click in each field in which you wish to add information There are drop down arrows next to most fields on the screen Clicking these means you can select from a list of previously entered information Click Save when you ve finished The Date Added field will automatically be
228. ley Holland Kevin Fiction Audio Library A 05 05 2010 13 57 16 gt 2479 Hat Full Of Sky A Pratchett Terry Fiction Audio English Department 10 13 57 13 CJ 10002 Hat Full Of Sky A Pratchett Terry Fiction Audio Library 0 13 57 11 gt 15001 Half Moon Investigations Colfer Eoin Fiction Audio Library 13 57 CJ 10050 Gruffalo Song And Other Songs The Donaldson Julia 782 742 Audio Library GJ 10020 Girls In Tears Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library _Diamond Girls The Wilson Jacqueline Fiction Audio Library The time and date that the resource was scanned is shown here Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 262 Chapter 18 StockCheck m S What if do not have the resource barcode to scan There are two options if you do not have a barcode reader or a barcode to scan First open the Bulk Scan screen by clicking on the 3 icon Bulk Scan Type the barcode into the box and press Enter on the keyboard Click Apply and Save to check the resource Scan Enter a barcode aie Scan or type resource 10048 barcodes 15001 10007 Click Apply to check them in StockCheck Once the resource has been found you may manually check the resource by highlighting the resource the list and then click on the O icon Check The resource will be added to the list in the Checked Items screen Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 263 i Ww Chapter 18 StockCheck m S How do I un check a r
229. like to change Set the system default views below Resources All Resources Borrowers Borrowers Tutor Groups All Records Current Loans All Records Past Loans All Records Reservations All Records Reviews All Reviews Eq Click on the sub tab General Borrowers Resources you d like to change Past oan Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 43 wae Chapter 3 Settings m S The Page View Edit screen will appear This is the same screen you ll see when creating and editing the standard page views See Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net for more information Make the required changes to the view and then click Save To see the changes open a borrower record and click on the tab you ve edited Repeat this for each tab that you d like to edit X Descnpton Category Layout Available Fields Visible Fields Column Settings N Borrowers a Q Caption Class iz Author F 5 Title Alignment Left be O Address 1 oe Reserved J Address 2 sea a Background Colour v O Address 3 O Address 4 Q O Address 5 O Address 6 Betiance MIA ed w Make the required changes and then Preview click Save ss Author Title Date Reserved Eq Refresh Preview Save Close For more information on Page Views please see Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 44 Chapter 3 Settings m S Restric
230. ll Yourself Visual ads Reserve All R Remove All Drag the resource into one of these treasure chests Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 240 WwW Chapter 15 Silverlight Home Page mM iS What other information is shown on a resource record in Silverlight Home Page The Summary pane will be populated with information from that resource record Click on What Other People Have Said to read any reviews written for that resource Also click on want to write a review to write a review for that resource or Show me where it is to view where the resource is in the library via means of a floor plan Summary The Summary pane gives a brief description of the resource usually taken from the synopsis on the back of the book Lord Loss There s a ripping sound followed by snaps and crunches My hand turns The door opens Hell is revealed When Grubbs Grady first encounters Lord Loss and his evil minions he learns three things the world is vicious magic is possible demons are real He thinks that he will never again witness such a terrible night of death and darkness Shan Darren Reviews There are two Reviews icons which allows you to write a review for that resource and I want to write a review What other people have said which allows you to read reviews which f have been written for that resource simply click on tok k Andy O brien the name of the student who has written the review
231. ll Items Seeing Stone The Crossley Holland Kevin Audio Supernaturalist The Colfer Eoin Fiction Audio Tape 01 The Kitchen Warriors Aiken R Fiction Audio Tape 03 The Secret Garden Bumett F H Fiction Audio Tape 04 Help I m A Prisoner In A Toothpaste Factory Antrobus J Fiction Audio Tape 05 Lizzie Dripping amp The Witch Cresswell H Fiction Audio Tape 08 The Worst Witch Strikes Again Murphy J Fiction Audio Tape 15 From The Dead amp Man Size In Marble Nesbit E Fiction Audio 4 Pra 45rcods P gt Fl m X Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 264 WwW Chapter 18 StockCheck m S How can I search for resources in StockCheck It is possible to search for specific resources in StockCheck by using the Quick Search function At the top right of the main StockCheck screen type the search criteria into the Quick Search box and then click Go For more information on Quick Search please see Chapter 15 Viewing Library Data Checked if Not Checked 49 Description Stock Check 05 May 2010 Created 05 05 2010 Complete S e a a Print Flagging Check Un check Remove Bulk Scan Download Complete jacqueline wilson Checked tema l Missing amai All Items search criteria Checked Date Time Resource Type Barcode Title Author Class Media Location and then click 05 05 2010 13 56 52 LJ 10013 Best
232. log in if they have not already done so The below screen will appear showing books which they have borrowed By simply dragging the resource into the Review treasure chest a window will pop up in which they may enter their review details and star rating for the resource Fireweed Ye Print All Either click on the resource then click More to be given the option to write a Review Or simply drag the resource into the Review treasure chest Click on Once the resource has 2 i Home to been dragged into this navigate chest a Review back to the window like the one Home page shown below will appear Review Font size and type options are chosen here vite rre dete A Review of Fireweed by Farzana KHAN ki What was the book website or resource about Write down what the item was about and what you learned Was it interesting What made you smile about it Wa a Text Colour and Smilies Did you enjoy it are chosen here review Overall did you enjoy it details are typed in the Would you recommend it white window above Would you recommend it to a frien 4 z mat al Say Se ZN A da IYN Excellent Star ratings are selected here by simply clicking on the desired star Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 24 mis Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net Grown Ups Click on Grown Ups to log into the librarian s area of the software A Login box as sh
233. login credential details and click on Librarian Only 4 Please note that your default username and password is NOT the same as that you may have used in Junior Librarian 3 Each site is allocated its own unique login credentials which will be emailed to each individual site These must be kept confidential N B If you do change your password in future please make sure you use a secure password preferably consisting of numbers and both higher lower case letters Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 Chapter 1 Getting Started m i S Prerequisites Machine Spec Please note it is advisable to be logged into the PC as an Administrator in order to install any prerequisites and configure Internet Explorer Please make sure you are running Internet Explorer 7 0 on every machine you wish to run Junior Librarian net from Below are the machine specifications required for running Junior Librarian net Library PC 1 5 GHz Dual Core CPU or Other client PC s better with 1GB RAM 1GHz Single Core CPU or Free USB ports for hardware better with 512 RAM 400MB of free disk space for scratch disk and IE plugin Internet connectivity Minimum 512K ADSL or equivalent broadband connection 1MB or above recommended Please note this is what is required for our application alone If you are sharing this connection with lots of other people or applications you may find you require a faster internet connection Installi
234. m current loans c cc cceccceccceeeceeeceeeseeeceeeseeeceeeteeseeesaeees 134 How do renew resources from current IOANS cccccccseeeceeeeceeeceeeeseeeeseeeeeueeseeesaneesaees 135 What does each resource colour code MEAN ccecccseecceeeeceeceeeeeceueeseeeceueeseueeseeesaeeeney 135 Editing Loan REMMICGGUS as secsrascceevereceneeeseeczsvesscqcsendctapesesecenneecezeceverenwcasacetanewevocusseessaceevens 136 How do edit the text in My reminders ceccceeecccesceceeeeeceeeceeeeceeeeseeeesseeeenseeeeseeenees 136 How do specify what format the reminder is sent in sccceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeees 139 What happens if have specified the reminder to be printed c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 140 What happens if have specified a reminder to be printed and emailed 0ccc8 140 What if the borrower s email address is wrong OF MISSING ccccceeeceeceeeceeeaeeceeeaeeeaes 140 Sending Loan REMINGOES ot scecentesdec aes ceee ester a ante acers 141 How do individual reminders work cccceccceecceeeceecceeeceeeceeeteeeceeceeessueeeeeeeeteeeseeesaeees 141 How do apply the settings for scheduled reminders ccccccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeceeseeesaeees 141 HOW do group reminders work cccceececeseccceeeeceeeecceececseeeseeeessueeseueeesseeesseeeeneesensaeeens 143 How do apply the settings for group reminders ssessseesnsserrres
235. matically changed to the one you ve specified as the replacement How do I apply the settings for data cleanse replacements From the menu bar at the top of the screen click on Database Lookup Maintenance and then Data Cleanse Replacements Management Microsoft Intenet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited Dalavabe ScheGule Modules Tools S curity Senngs eored Select Database etol Lookup w Maintenance and then Data Cleanse Replacements reput The Data Cleanse Replacements screen will then appear This will be empty if you haven t already added any words Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 214 NV Chapter 13 Tidying Data mi Click the add icon under the Records tab on the right of the screen Type in the word you want to replace and its replacement Click Save Repeat this for each new word you want to be replaced Type in the word that you want to replace and its replacement here Word wiii then click Save Details Replace With wwWIII 0000 The word and its replacement will now be listed in the Data Cleanse Replacement database where you can edit or delete it if you wish Tirta Shame Ara Flaplce MAIE U m eet ROOT AS eed AS Lived Ciit Tae a imeat OP oua Cassa icra ae You can edit or koran ireo But bul Tuit TOT a of Carat d h d if TG00T Macdonald hiacdanaid Guit an e ete t e wor 73 TOT ci co Jur Te gegio Macra Macra unia i you w
236. move it from the Borrower s record when placing the resource in the Recycle Bin and will avoid future confusion as to the whereabouts of the on loan now missing resource You can use this facility to mark resources as missing and if required charge the cost of replacement to the borrower Title Author Specify a missing Barcode reason Tick the Return resource option to return the resource from the borrower s record Reason missing Damaged Cost of replacement 6 99 Click Ok when Return resource In you have finished Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 163 WwW Chapter 10 Maintaining My Library mM iS Once you click Ok the resource will be moved to the Resource Recycle Bin To access the Recycle Bin click onthe Reeyclesin icon on the main resources screen under the Records tab lf the resource turns up at a later date you can simply restore it back to the main catalogue by highlighting it and then clicking on the restore icon To remove it from the catalogue completely click on the amp bette icon from within the Resources Recycle Bin Please Note you will be unable to Delete the resource from the Recycle Bin if you have not returned the resource from the Borrower s record Borrower s Record Card From the Borrowers screen within Management highlight the Borrower s record you wish to edit and click tat on beneath the Records tab on the right hand s
237. n Don Don Sermon God will Women s omen s H Au u udae Pro v x Aeka A Cry For Help ay In Court A Day In the Life A Design Project Understanding oung People of a Stay at ETNE Nit Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 294 Chapter 19 Third Party Products m Is How do Borrowers search ClickView Videos in Junior Librarian net Enter your search criteria in the Search box as displayed below Search for animals Turn off all other media types in the Filter area by clicking on them in order for just ClickView media types to be displayed Simply click on the resource and Go to Site to start playing the video 1946 1985 Growing Up In Australia Series The 40 year penod anter WWII Saw a great many changes in the lives of Australian youth culminating in the emergence of a new sub group teenagers Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 295
238. n net User Guide Version 11 4 115 Chapter 5 Circulate m S Warning messages From time to time when you try to carry out an action the system will show warning messages Whatever you are being warned about can be overridden except if a borrower has been banned If a borrower tries to take out a Reference item a message will appear giving the option to issue the resource anyway Please note This facility needs to be enabled by clicking on Settings and then Restrictions in Grown Ups Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 116 Chapter 6 Restrictions m S Chapter 6 Restrictions This chapter will explain how to apply the settings which will control your borrower s loan allowances The Setting up Restrictions section explains how restrictions work and how to set up and apply loan restrictions to your borrowers and catalogue items The Calendar section tells you how to mark days in the calendar when the library is closed and how to force a return date for your resources Setting up Restrictions How do restrictions work Restrictions in Junior Librarian net work similarly to Active Directory permission settings This means that you create different borrower restriction groups set up the permissions for those groups and then add your borrowers to whichever group you want them to belong to One of the main benefits of this is that you can create as many restriction groups as you wish all with different
239. n on the Output table see the section What happens after I ve applied my reminder settings Please see section How do specify what format the reminder is sent in for how to choose the reminder format for both group and individual reminders Use the calendar to select a date you d like your reminders to start Place a tick here to select Individual Reminders Pe eee Choose the ndini aay interval period Run the schedule fortrightiy on a Type the time you d like here seat neenbite ot al the rem i nders to ru n If you would like the reminders to be sent now put a tick in this box After that the next time they are sent will be on the date and time that you ve specified above OKRES PON When you have chosen SAAREEN your settings click Save Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 142 Chapter 7 Loans m Is How do group reminders work Group reminders are sent to tutors so that they can remind the borrowers in their group to return their overdue resources In the same way that you can edit individual reminders you can also edit your group reminders However group reminders work differently to individual reminders in that you can only schedule to send one group reminder at a time How do I apply the settings for group reminders Before any reminders can be sent out you ll need to choose your reminder settings From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Schedule and then Reminde
240. n the white box To perform your search click on Apply When using Boolean And only the resources with both keywords of magic and wizard will be shown If a resource contains the keyword of magic but not wizard it won t be shown Likewise if a resource contains the keyword of wizard but not magic it won t be shown _ _ Boolean Operator And Keywords J Equal to vl Field Table Operator Value Click Apply to perform your Keywords Resources Equal to Magic search Keywords Resources Equal to wizard Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 228 WwW Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data mM is Boolean Or When using Or in your search the results you get will contain either or all of the words you have entered For example You may want to conduct a search of your resources to find all books which have a keyword of magic or wizard and resources which have both of these keywords Under the Boolean drop down menu select Or Boolean Boolean Field Or Keywords Ez A mm Me keywords O Last Borrowed i List ol gm Last Borrowed Any Co O Last Updated iv Under the Operator field click the drop down arrow and select Equal to By selecting Equal to you are saying that you only want to search for the exact word you specify and not any words which include that word Boolean Field Operator Or Keywords CJ Including v Eq
241. n to return the resource from the borrower s record Specify a missing Barcode reason Reason missing Damaged Cost of replacement 6 99 Click Ok when Return resource Fj you have finished e Once you click Ok the resource will be moved to the Resource Recycle Bin To access the Recycle Bin click on the E Recycle Bin icon on the main resources screen under the Records tab lf the resource turns up at a later date you can simply restore it back to the main catalogue by highlighting it and then clicking on the icon A Restore To remove it from the catalogue completely click on the Delete icon from within the Resources Recycle Bin Please Note you will be unable to Delete the resource from the Recycle Bin if you have not returned the resource from the Borrower s record Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 165 WW Chapter 10 Maintaining My Library mMm 3 Making Changes To Borrowers and Tutor Groups How do edit a borrower If you would like to change some details on a borrower s record simply find the borrower in the Borrowers database and then click _ to open up the record card Edit If you have the borrower s PIN to hand you can type this into the Go to box lf you have the borrower s barcode to hand you can type this into the Quick Search box select the Go To option and click Go Highlight the borrower Edt click to open up the borrower s record card Make the necessary chang
242. n views which show the information that you require Page Views is covered in greater detail in Chapter 11 The Restrictions section explains how restrictions in Junior Librarian net work Restrictions are covered in greater detail in Chapter 6 The Reviews section explains how you can create your own review questions for when a borrower reviews a resource that they have read Reviews are covered in greater detail in Chapter 9 The Printing section tells you how you can set up Junior Librarian net so that anyone who wants to print information out in My Books has a limit on the number of records they can print The Reminders section tells you how to set up your email reminder settings Reminders are covered in greater detail in Chapter 7 The General section allows you to upload an image i e your school logo to appear on the home page of Junior Librarian net This is also the place to switch interfaces for the home page between Junior Classic and the Beach Scene Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 28 Chapter 3 Settings m Is Password Manager Password Manager is the area in which the password strength for Borrower s user accounts and User Management user accounts is set It is also the area in which you can apply a Global Update to all Borrower s usernames and passwords in the system This new feature takes a matter of minutes instead of having to change usernames and passwords in each record manually To enter cl
243. nd sound They believe that the reading of books with a child is one of the most important and enjoyable ways of spending time together With Signed Stories deaf children can watch and listen to wonderful books with their family friends or teachers allowing them to share all the joy of stories together How do get ITV Signed Stories ITV Signed Stories are freely available to everyone on the internet however Micro Librarian Systems have integrated ITV Signed Stories with your Junior Librarian net library system for easily accessible use in and around your school via SearchStar To import ITV Signed Stories simply go to Schedule External Media Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided Database Schedule Modules Toois Discovery News Directory Services Reneuers Schedule and External Media Data Tidy Accetermed Reader Guz Lis Veblris mport External Meda Statements y is 3 a View Tass Tick both options displayed in the screen below and click Schedule to begin the Signed Stories import now Options Signed Stories Use this facility to get lots of great books in sign language with subtitles Hearing family and friends can listen to the stories too You can all watch together p T Run Now 2 Schedule Close _ Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 281 Chapter 19 Third Party Products m I S To check the status of t
244. necessary e f your Identikit has a rubberized membrane on the scanning area the guarantee does NOT cover this This membrane is an integral part of the thumbprint scanner and should not be tampered with in any way Please do not damage the membrane the rubberised surface you actually touch Please inspect it for any cuts scratches air bubbles etc Unless you contact MLS before using IdentiKit we will assume the Identikit scanner is in perfect working order Keep the membrane away from heat moisture or sharp objects e g finger nails The membrane cannot be repaired or replaced If it is damaged a completely new device will be necessary for which a charge will be e The guarantee does NOT cover the cable Try not to stretch the cable If it is too short please buy a USB extension cable from a local supplier please make sure any extension cable is no more than one meter in length e The guarantee does NOT cover the USB plug attached to the end of the cable When you plug it in a USB socket check you are inserting it in the correct way round and do not force it DO NOT PLUG THE CABLE IN UNTIL AFTER YOU HAVE INSTALLED THE SOFTWARE MLS reserve the right to charge for repairing or replacing a unit even under warranty if there is evidence of misuse Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 100 Chapter 5 Circulate m S Looking after the Identikit The Identikit scanner was originally de
245. ng Silverlight lt is a requirement of the software for you to have Silverlight installed on the machine which you wish to run Junior Librarian net from A link to install Silverlight becomes available as soon as you try to access Junior Librarian net alternatively if you wish to download this manually beforehand please click on http silverlight net getstarted and click on the link to Install Silverlight Silverlight Runtime INSTALL NOW Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 7 Chapter 1 Getting Started m Is Unlocking Circulate Please follow the below instructions in order to use Circulate without installing the plugin if you are only using a barcode reader on your PC rather than an IdentiKit fingerprint scanner Launch Internet Explorer and enter the URL for your Junior Librarian net website Click on the Log On button from the home page Log in using either the administrator or librarian login credentials Click on Circulate from the book the alert will pop up as shown below gt MLS Hardware Support Do you want to unlock circulate on this computer Click Yes Close Circulate and Log Off to disable Librarian Only functions This PC is now set up to allow resources to be issued and returned without having to log into Librarian Only This is handy if you want to allow student librarians to issue and return books from that computer as it poses no security threat to your student resource data If y
246. ning them with the barcode reader This may be useful should your barcode reader be out of order Allow printing allows you to print from Circulate lf Allow a reference item to be issued is select the ability to bypass the default restriction of referenced items not being available for issue is given lf Enable Auto Returns is selected the only information required to return a book within Circulate is the Resource s barcode number Allow a user to Undo a Mistake is a useful function which allows the librarian to click Undo should they have issued or returned incorrectly In order to Issue or return multiple resources to a student at a time the librarian is required to enter a Multi Issue Return Password It is within this window that the password is set Change the time to Clear circulate system messages after __ seconds io fit with what is convenient to the libaray Circulate and Review Allow keyboard input Allow printing Allow a reference item to be issued Enable Auto Returns Allow a user to Undo a Mistake Fj Multi Issue Return Password password Clear circulate system messages after 3 seconds i L 3 rs Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 37 Chapter 3 Settings m S Data Tidy What is Data Tidy When entering resources or borrowers into Junior Librarian net especially if more than one person has been in charge of this you may have differences in the way that some words have been ent
247. nn een as er cee mens mere pete men E arcmen amen ect 100 ldent ki Sgn a a 100 Looking after the IG ntikit ccccecccseeceeeeceececeeeceececeueeceeeceuseceueeseeeceusesseeeeeessueeseessaaes 101 Identikit minimum system requirements ccccecccseeccececeecceeeceucecuecsueeceuseseeessuessusenaees 101 How do install the IDK software 0 0 ec cccccceccceeeceeeteeeceeeseeeseeeceeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeesaeees 103 How do import my Junior3 fingerprints ccc cceccseecceeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeceeeceeeeseueeseeeseueeaeeesaees 104 How do I register a fingerprint cccccccsccceececeeeceuceceeecceeceueeceuecsucesueseueessuseseeessusesaees 105 ldentiKitand Data Protection wcscnhecied ale cctenhecaadniaccitehhecadanieedtehteciad nied dtehheciadanteddeehoecncs 106 SING CNEUEN 107 FIOW GG ISSUC A TESOUNCE oessa ea a aa A a a a a a AE 107 FIOW GO FelUIN a FESOUICE pununa E T E Nandi 110 How dO 1 renew GTCSOUICE eni a R A 111 Muti PROTON sisse a ERa ETETA 112 How does a borrower reserve a resource ccceeccseecceeeeceeeeeececeueeseeeseueeseueeseeesaueeseesanes 114 VV eIMINGIMCSSAGCS mensamen a T O 116 Chanter 6 FRESIGICUONS ciiisean ine a a a aa aiaa 117 Setting UD RESIFICGHOINS sacininiics a 117 How d restrictions WORK Peossuineieneiia ene s a taterlaededebenetal 117 How do I create my own borrower restriction groupS cccceecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseees 117 How do add resource type restrict
248. ns Summary Notes Photograph Linked Items Floor Flan Details Check this resource has a Summary here Title OUTCAST RFID Series Chronicles of Ancient Darkness Bk 4 Date Added Author PAVER MICHELLE Recycled Date Missing E Missing Reason Lewel Class Fiction El Fiction C Reference Publisher Orion children s books Illustrator F F Supplier Owner Location Library Copies Status Description Subject EAN ISBN Publication Date 06 09 2007 Hardback 9781842551738 Price Genre E Keywords ES F Media Edition Fantasy Out of Print mee Fiction Select this resource as being Book of the Week here e 0000 aaa Edt Does W Book of the Week Save Close Tick the Book of the Week tick box at the bottom of the resource record and click Save to save your changes Please Note The book summary from the Summary Notes tab will be displayed with your Book of the Week on your Home screen The summary is usually pulled from Discovery Online however on occasion Discovery Online doesn t have a summary available for the book If this is the case you may wish to enter the summary yourself before clicking Save on this record that way your Book of the Week article will look more substantial The summary is always taken from the blurb on the back of a book so can be easily copied from here Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 176 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Lib
249. ns with j n eac h i diate e l m me E aaa 5 Fichon Ageing LE Harry Potter And The Half Blood Prince Hardback Library data ba se Th ese may access to Ficten Byars Widright Fax e Paperback Library a ee case bcnn aean change according to the that EEE 4 10 Tapsan Frank Codon Mathemabes Study Dictionary Paperback data base yo u re i n data base wf gt 11 Fkiwen Blume Talag OF A Fowth Grade Nothing Papeiback Aeservacons 3 12 Fiction Alcock W Sieger To The Ses God Hardback Special lil gt i3 Fiction Pratchett Te Woe Free Men The Paperback L Watarahip Down Paperback Spacia You can access gt 15 Superidge Papeiback the Tools 16 Madagsce Kiria Novel Paperback Library O ptio Ns fro m iT Arabe nd Mortimer Hardback Library a screens gt 18 Draam Thing The Hardback Scianos Lab 1 Items in the catalogue shown in Black indicate it s available to issue Blue means it s on loan Green Click here to see the views you have set up and to add new ones The views will vary depending on the screen you re in See Chapter 15 Viewing Library Data for more information means it s been reserved Red mean it s on loan and overdue Read IT The Read IT signpost is a direct link to the Digital Readit website Digital Readit is an information skills program which embeds literacy and ICT into the curriculum It is the ideal solution for the development of information skills across the Foundation Stage KS1 and KS2 J
250. o has been assigned to the Borrowers restriction group wants to take out a piece of Hardware The loan period given is 14 days which has been taken from the Borrower Restriction Group setting This is because although you have set up a Resource Type Restriction for your Films with a media type of Video the borrower is taking out Hardware instead In this case the Resource Type Restriction is ignored even though it is the lowest of the three Loan Period Restriction Restrictions BRG RTR GRR IRR Given Setting Used Maximum Allowance a a 3 MSA 14 BRG Maximum Reservations 3 a a SLA Loan Period 14 f 2 MSA Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 129 Chapter 6 Restrictions m S Example 7 You have created a Borrower Restriction Group a Resource Type Restriction for your Books with a media type of Paperback a Global Resource Restriction for your Books and you ve selected a Harry Potter Paperback Book out of the catalogue and changed its individual restrictions A borrower who has been assigned to the Borrowers restriction group wants to take out the Harry Potter Book The loan period given is 6 days which has been taken from the Individual Resource Restriction setting This is because whenever a Resource Type Restriction has been set for the resource type you are issuing the Borrower Restriction Group loan period is ignored As you ve also set an Individual Resource Restriction for the book you are issuing the Global Resource
251. ockCheck all of your resources they will all be listed on this screen In each tab under Totals at the top of the screen you can see how many resources have been Checked and Not Checked Lais Description Btock Check 05 May 2010 Checked o Created completes TJ not checked 0 Cou Ors ora ars Print Flagging Check Un check Remove Bulk Scan Download Complete Ouic Searc Shows the number of checked and not checked resources here Checked Items Missing Items All Items Checked Date Time HAsource Type Barcode Title Author Class Media Location Recycled Date Missing These three tabs show different sections of your StockCheck Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 260 Chapter 18 StockCheck Scanning resources into StockCheck ve mis When you are ready to start scanning your resources firstly ensure you are in the Checked Items screen Description Btock Check 05 May 2010 creses Created 05 05 2010 Completed a E Print Flagging O9 Check Un check Checked Items Missing Items All Items Swe Bulk Sca Download Q Remove G Complete Each scanned Checked Date Time Resource Type Barcode Title Author Class edia Location Recycled Date Missing Click
252. of resource The Unlink Resource button is very useful when cataloguing a series of encyclopaedias for example When cataloguing resources with the same ISBN the resource records become linked or joined together This means that any change made to one record is then replicated to all of the other records with the same ISBN number and any reservations placed on one of those resources will replicate to all copies of that book While this is useful should you be cataloguing 20 of the exact same book it can become a nuisance if you are cataloguing 20 encyclopaedias which each have a different title To remove this link simply click on the Unlink Resource button Please note that this will mean any Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 66 od Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S reservations made on that resource will now only be on that particular resource not any of the others in that series Restrictions allow you to edit the restrictions for the individual resource record These are covered in greater detail in Chapter 6 X Barcode 1 Title Change the resource Details Advanced Loans Reservations Summary Notes Photograph Linked Items Floor Plan If you have added any Openg Roszourco Ives Sustem Fields Custom Fields they will Book Y Text 1 show here See Bara Custom Fields section Restrictions nen later in this chapter re rae for information Lock Restrictions TEES Loan Period 14 Text 5 Max
253. olib co uk ieplugin exe A Security Warning box will pop up asking if you want to run or save this file Click on Run File Download Security Warning X Do you want to run or save this file Name ieplugin exe Type Application 25 3MB From supportfiles microlib co uk gt j While files from the Internet can be useful this file type can D potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not s the risk run or save this software whats th Once the file has successfully downloaded another Security Warning box will pop up this time giving you the options to Run or Don t Run Click on Run l Do you want to run this software Name ieplugin exe Publisher Micro Librarian Systems Ltd E More options While Files From the Internet can be useful this file type can potentially harm your computer Only run software from publishers you trust What s the risk Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 9 Chapter 1 Getting Started m l S The InstallAware Wizard for MLS Hardware Support Setup will load Click Next on the first and second screens of the Wizard V Ei MLS Hardware Support InstallAware Wizard ag mi x Welcome to the InstallAware Wizard for MLS Hardware Support Setup Before you install this program we recommend that your Back up your system Close all open programs To complete this installation Windows might require restarting after you finish this wizard
254. on Generic Once the resource record screen appears click in each field in which you wish to add information There are drop down arrows next to most fields on the screen Clicking these means you can select from a list of previously entered information Click Save when you ve finished Click the drop down Enter the a Poa arrow to see a list of resource details by filling in the required fields Junior Librarian net User Guide keywords You can jump to a specific word by typing in the start of the word Click Save when you have finished Version 11 4 62 Chapter 4 Creating My Library How do I catalogue an eBook mis From the New Resource screen click on the e Icon eBook Once the resource record screen appears click in each field in which you wish to add information There are drop down arrows next to most fields on the screen Clicking these means you can select from a list of previously entered information Click Save when you ve finished Title Details Advanced Summary Notes Photograph Linked Items Details Title Series Author Class Colour Publisher Publication Date URL Document Details Filename Mime Type Size Browse ii Update lOpen Delete Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 Date Added 26 01 2010 Recycled Date Level Subject Genre Keywords Add Edit Delete Close 63 Nyi Ch
255. on Modules and then StockCheck Modules Label Prit Pocket Librarian a P ipa Click Modules StockChec Highlight the StockCheck that you would like to edit and then click Edit on the right of the screen This will then take you into the main StockCheck screen o FLEE S i 5tock Check 05 May 2010 Stock Check 30 April 8 1 Stock Check 29 Apnhw Stock Check 29 April Break Stock Check 29 April HARD Stock Check 29 April Ref Stock Check 29 April Test Stock Check 29 April Test Stock Check 29 Apnil Test3 Stock Check 28 Apnil 6 Click Edit to edit the highlighted StockCheck Note You can also delete an uncompleted StockCheck from this screen if it is no longer needed Highlight the StockCheck to be deleted and then click on Delete and then Yes oe a k c a Yes Junior Librarian net User Guide If you delete this stock check it can not be recovered Permanantly delete this stock check no Version 11 4 268 Chapter 18 StockCheck m S How do I complete a StockCheck Please Note Once you have completed a StockCheck it is not possible to make any further changes so be absolutely sure you have nothing further to do on the StockCheck before you Complete Once you have finished entering the barcodes you are ready to complete the StockCheck From the main StockCheck screen click on the al icon Complete By default any
256. ons 2 vee Spine Labels Dewey Author Ye ven ec Spine Labels Dewey vise oc Spine Labels Multiline Dewey Au vee i Spine Labels Subdivision of Dewey Renaissance Learning with Quiz N A Spine Labels Author Year Spine Labels Dewey Author Og Og mm um Woolwich Spine Labels Author FIC _ ull p Import x Click on the Printer icon to print Junior Librarian net User Guide TE Find v Quiz No 0 Magnum Landscape Magnum Photographers Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 And That s When It Fell off Rennison Louise Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 100 Best Album Covers Thorgerson Storm Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 100 Greatest Natural Wonder Cranfield Ingrid Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 100 Ways to Take Better Phol Busselle Michael Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 1000 Things You Should Kno Farndon John Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 101 Poems by 101 Women Greer Germaine gt 1 145 mw RD amp amp Quiz No 0 Simpsons The Simpsons C Quiz No 0 Tempest Quiz No 0 Tempest Groening Matt Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 Startled by His Furry Shorts Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 Startled by His Furry Shorts Rennison Louise Book Level 0 Points 0 Quiz No 0 100 Great
257. ons Minimum Age C tock Restrictions Loan Period Not sllowed to Maximum Renewals m a Maximum Reservations Maximum Fine Fine Rate Photograph Linked Items Custom Fields First Published 91 10 1998 OA Select All x The Custom Field you ve created is shown here Clear All e 9000 Cl Book of the Week Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 Save Close 99 Nae Chapter 5 Circulate m Is Chapter 5 Circulate This chapter will cover all of the features of Circulate The section Identikit will tell you how to register your borrower s fingerprints so that they can use Identikit to take out resources It will also detail the warranty information the minimum requirements which your pc must have to use Identikit and also how to look after the scanner The section Using Circulate details how to issue and return your resources how to renew and reserve them and also how to check the status of a resource It will also explain how you can add messages to your borrower s accounts from the circulate screen When issuing and returning your resources certain warning messages can appear What these messages mean will also be covered in this section Identikit Warranty e MLS guarantee the Identikit device for 12 months e This starts from the date you receive it and not the date you start using it e This guarantee covers parts and labour for a repair or a complete replacement unit if
258. or students to borrow or return books Multi Issue and Multi Return can be accessed by both the teacher librarian and the student librarians once they have logged in Scan or Key in the barcode label inside the book Follow the instructions on the screen to either issue or return a book Once you have scanned the barcode label inside the book scan the student s barcode label or have the student place their finger on the IdentiKit if purchased If they already have this book on loan it will be returned If they do not have this book on loan the book will be issued to them Search Search is a facility for both the students and the librarian to use in order to search for resources within the library There are two ways to search from the Junior Librarian net Classic interface Visually or with Text After performing a search the book shelf interface will list the search results Visual searching Click on Enquiry A and the main window for visual searching will appear Choose to perform the search using categories such as A Z of authors titles and genres the Cloud the Wheel or with an Advanced search Simply click on any of the visual search icons to begin searching in that area of the library Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 13 Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net Click on the Cloud button to search from a number of suggested titles authors and keywords These are pre defined by the top twen
259. or wanting to do this could be that you ve set up a restriction group for your borrowers called Borrowers which is the default and one for your staff which is called Staff You have specified a higher resource and loan period allowance when creating the Staff restriction group Go into the Tutor Groups database by clicking on the 8 icon from the menu bar on the left of the screen Tutor Groups Find and highlight the Staff tutor group from the list and then either double click on itor Edi click to open the record card Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 122 w Chapter 6 Restrictions m l S Under the Restrictions section click the drop down arrow and select the restriction group that you want the tutor group to have and then click Save Once you have done this everyone in the Staff tutor group will belong to the restriction group you have selected If you add a new borrower to this group they too will automatically belong to the specified restriction group unless you manually change them 7 4 Details Move To Members Details Custom Fields Group Name STAFF fear Group Form Tutor Email Fines Active V Select the Staff Restrictions restriction group Default Borrowers from the list Default Borrowers Click Save when you have finished 8B 0000 eaea How do I change an individual borrower s restriction group Once you have specified a default restriction group to which ever
260. ory a E Dore Local intranet Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 231 Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data When would I use flagging UJ mis There may be occasions when you want to print out a bibliography of selected titles for some or all of your library users For example if you are asked to produce a list of books dealing with astronomy it may be that all the books listed in a keyword search for astronomy are not relevant to your needs You will then need to flag the items required before printing the final list Firstly using the Advanced Search search for a list of records which will form the basis for your final list e g Keywords including Astronomy Then click on the i Flagging menu will appear click on flagging by mouse icon under the Tools tab on the right of the screen A Small Click on each record that you d like to select As you do this the record will become highlighted lf you change your mind simply click on the record again and it will be de selected Once the flagged items show click on Show Flagged Only under the Records tab on the right of the screen This will remove any un flagged records from the screen leaving you with just the flagged ones Click on each resource that you d like to select Resouces YE Botrowers Tutor Groups Current Loans Past Loans G4 Reservations Statement Reviews Done Junior Librarian net User Guide
261. ou can click Auto to allow the system to allocate the next available number Click Continue A blank Borrower card will appear Fill in the required details and then click Save x Fill in the Barcode 11454 Name Ab Use Notes to borrower s Details iano add any details making notes about sure you enter the borrower their Surname and Group Year Group details Group Name VE Year Group 8 L Curent Loans Statement Reservations Fast Loans Forename Rudy Notes Surname Abdullah Tithe Gender Male Date of Birth 11 02 1990 T Age House Set Ethnicity White Address Guardian Guardian 2 Fhotograch The Address Diii field is optional YAussell Avenue Click Modify to adda Use the photograph of Guardian tabs Postcode MS25 SCW the borrower to add details Telephone Mabile about the Work Email borrower s i Modi guardian s Modify Click Save yf when you rave finishec Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 83 A Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S How do I add a photograph of a borrower From within the borrower s record in the Details tab click on the Modify tab on the right of the screen Click Browse to browse to where the photograph is stored Once the location of the photograph is listed click on the Update tab The photograph will then show in the box Click Close PS Photograph Click Browse to browse to where the photograph is stor
262. ou need tt Tel 44 0161 449 9357 Option 1 Fax 44 0161 449 0055 E mail support microlib co uk Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 4 Chapter 1 Getting Started m Is On the Web The quickest and easiest way to contact us is through the online MLS Service Area www microlib co uk MyMLS Here you can Search our comprehensive knowledgebase Comments and Suggestions If you have any comments or suggestions for ways to enhance any of our products you can contact us using the above details Note All suggestions will be considered for future development In the past several years the suggestions that our customers have made have played an integral part in our development This feedback enables us to develop the system to meet your needs Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 5 mis Chapter 1 Getting Started Getting Started with Junior Librarian net 1 Open Internet Explorer 2 The URL for your Junior Librarian net website is based on your MLS User Number please see examples below 2 1 If your user number is 98757 the URL would be http U098 757 juniorlibrarian net 2 2 If your user number is 12 the URL would be http U000012 juniorlibrarian net The User Number is always padded out to be 6 characters long by using 0 s prefixed by the letter U J To access Management you simply need to click on Log On enter your login credentials see following point for
263. ou only use a Barcode Reader and do not use Active Directory linking you are now ready to use your Junior Librarian net Hosted library system If you do use Active Directory linking or use IdentiKit RFID or Security Gates at school please continue reading Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 8 Chapter 1 Getting Started m Is Installing the Hardware Plugin for IdentiKit IMPORTANT ONLY IDENTIKIT HARDWARE THAT IS COMPATIBLE WITH DIGITAL PERSONA PLATINUM EDITION DRIVERS WILL WORK WITH JUNIOR LIBRARIAN NET IF YOUR IDENTIKIT USES DIGITAL PERSONA GOLD EDITION DRIVERS YOU NEED TO PURCHASE AN UPDATED IDENTIKIT Installing the Hardware Plugin is a prerequisite if you wish to issue or return books from a particular computer using the IdentiKit device Please Note e We suggest that installation is carried out by an ICT technician e Installation should only be performed at the PC where you issue books e Ensure you are logged on as Administrator with full permissions e If you are using an Identikit device plug it in before you begin the installation You will be prompted to install the plugin when you log into the Grown Ups area on the signpost on the Home page Click here to install it When you accept the prompt a PDF document will display on your screen detailing where to download the plugin from and how to install it Enter the below web address into your Internet Explorer Address bar http supportfiles micr
264. ou ve highlighted all of the resources you want to return Return click Click on the 7 resource you d k k gq ____ Click Return like to return dl ie a a to return the highlighted resource Click Flagging pene au to select more g Bea mee ut than one i resource at a time Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 134 Chapter 7 Loans m Is How do I renew resources from current loans You can renew your resources from the current loans screen as well as using Circulate Find and click on the resource you d like to renew and then click Renew under the Records tab on the right of the screen To renew multiple resources click Fleaging under the Records tab and then click on each resource Click on the resource you d like to renew Click Renew to renew the highlighted resource Click Flagging to select more than one resource ata time What does each resource colour code mean When you are in Circulate each resource will be colour coded depending on its status These are Black Resource is not on loan and is available to issue Green Resource has been reserved Blue Resource is on loan Red Resource is on loan and is overdue Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 135 Chapter 7 Loans m Is Editing Loan Reminders How do edit the text in my reminders Before sending out your loan reminders you ll need to make sure that the text inside each reminder
265. ource type maximum allowance restrictions can only add up to 3 When you have set restrictions in this way the Loan Period for the resource type will always be chosen against the standard restriction loan period How do I change the default borrower restriction group If you want to change the default restriction group click the System Default drop down arrow select the required restriction group from the list and then click Save Any borrowers who belong to the default restriction group will be automatically changed as well as inheriting the allowances which have been given to the new default group e s General Borrowers Resources Click the arrow to select a new default group The new System Default Normal restriction Available Restric gt Borrowers Normal group is listed here Click Save Ada Edit Delete when you have finished How do change a tutor group s borrower restriction group When you first start using Junior Librarian net all borrowers and tutor groups will belong to the default restriction group Once you have specified a default restriction group to which everyone belongs to it s possible to change the restriction group for your individual Tutor Groups First make sure you have created a restriction group that you want these borrowers to belong to See How do I create my own restriction groups earlier in this chapter An example f
266. ow to add your borrowers manually into those groups This section also covers how you import your borrower s details using your school s own administration system and what to do if your school has borrowers in mixed year groups The section Custom Fields explains how you can create your own fields within a resource or borrower record Cataloguing Resources The Resources database is where all of your catalogued items are stored To access Resources click on the i icon from the left of the screen in Grown Ups Resources Where do I put the barcode labels Every item should be given an Accession number starting from 00001 The bar coded sticky labels included with the package for new users represent these numbers and should be attached onto each item Extra labels can be ordered if necessary e We recommend you insert the labels on a white or light coloured background if possible This will insure that there is less chance of the barcode reader not reading the label e Since the bar code reader is a non contact device it is not necessary to laminate the labels for protection e We advise that the labels should be inserted as each item is catalogued Items already catalogued can then be recognised because they have a label e Number your resources from 00001 upwards It does not matter to the system what order your resources are numbered in or whether there are any gaps Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 52 ws Chapter
267. own below will appear into which you will need to type your login credentials x Multi Return Multi Return is only accessible once you have logged into the Grown Ups section Multi Return allows you to return a large amount of books without the requirement of a corresponding Student s barcode This comes in handy when you have a large pile of return books dumped on your desk Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 25 Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net m Is Multi Issue Multi Issue is a facility for issuing multiple books to one student Once you have initially scanned in the student s barcode you are not required to scan it in again Every book barcode you scan after that is issued to that student There is an Undo facility should you wish to reverse the issue of a book All books issued will show along the bottom toolbar of the screen Self Issue Self Issue is a facility which allows students to use Borrow amp Return on a computer without having to log into Grown Ups first To turn on Self Issue load the Junior Librarian net site and log into Grown Ups Click on the Welcome signpost following by the settings icon An option to Enable Self Service will become available at the foot of the list of options Simply place a tick in that box ENABLE SELFSERVICE K Once this box has been ticked Borrow amp Return will automatically load as soon as your Junior Libra
268. pe their barcode number into the login box which will pop up upon your first attempt of dragging an item into the My Stuff treasure chest Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 114 Chapter 5 Circulate m Is Login Barcode Username Please enter your barcode number to login As soon as the student has successfully logged in the resource will be placed into the My Stuff treasure chest Once the student has filled their My Stuff treasure chest with whatever resources they wish click on the My Stuff treasure chest for a link to the My Stuff page e PE 5 User ANDY O BRIEN fect fico Sim Search for ia 1001 Facts About Wild Animals Print Reserve Yee Print All or Remove ef Reserve All resources here Remove All Drag resource into Reserve to reserve the item Resources currently stored in the My Stuff area Drag items into Review to review the resource ee se 87 i _ Jr i ae i gt Ah e ee e nia The student may add as many resources to your My Stuff area as they like However it is important to remember that this area is emptied each time the student logs out The My Stuff page is the only page in which the students may write Reviews They may write reviews for resources they both have and haven t borrowed Reviews are not available for public viewing until they are approved by the librarian This is discussed in greater detail in Chapter 10 Reviews Junior Libraria
269. pter 13 Tidying Data mi Data Tidy What is data tidy When entering resources or borrowers into Junior Librarian net especially if more than one person has been in charge of this you may have differences in the way that some words have been entered into each field To save you having to find and edit each individual record you can use Data Tidy to apply settings of your choice to both previously entered borrower and resource records and any that are entered in the future How do apply the settings for data tidy Make sure you are in the screen you d like to apply the Data Tidy settings i e Resources or Borrowers From the menu bar at the top of the screen click on Settings and then Data Tidy Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited Database Schedule Modules Tools Secunty Settings Help Vode setine gt d Barcodes Time stamp Word Us Junior Librarian Resources 12 06 2007 AS level AS Level Date Tidy FR 12 06 2007 O U P OUP Gul Fields Select Settings and 12 06 2007 But but Gul Lang age Bo rrowers 12 06 2007 of of Gull Dean Views then Data Tidy 6g 12 06 2007 Macdonald Macdonald Gus Restrictions 12 06 2007 cd CD a Tutor Groups 49 06 2007 Macro Macro Gu Reviews gt 12 06 2007 Mackey Mackey Gu iad 12 06 2007 Xi x Gu a Current Loans 12 06 2007 Coi COI G Reminders 2i 12 06 2007 DIEE DEE Gy Gs General 12 06 2007 RAC RAC Guest Past Loans 12 06 2007 1900 s 1900s
270. r 0 Stormbreaker Underwood Pete 0 Harry Potter And The Chamber Of Secrets QUIGLEY John 0 Girls In Love O brien Andy 0 Clay Moseley Emma 0 Deep Trouble Goosebumps ith Laura 0 Manfred The Baddie Steve 0 Lord Loss Click on Return to return the selected resource 0 Charlotte s Web Highlight the 0 Elephant Wellyphant 0 Cowcumbers Pipplewaks And A resource yo u 0 Flat Stanley with to return 10 02 2009 0 Mr Perfect A M M OO iyo Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 110 Chapter 5 Circulate m Is How do I renew a resource There is no Renew functionality outside of the Grown Ups section of Junior Librarian net Resources are renewed from the Current Loans screen in Grown Ups by highlighting the resource and then clicking on the Renew icon beneath the Records tab on the right of the screen gt nt Loans we yy A Ue Page 1 of 1 15 records Date Due Days Overdue Title Surname Forename Group Name Reminder Number 17 02 2009 0 Harry Potter And The Prisoner Of Azkaban O brien Andy STAFF 0 26 01 2009 0 Stormbreaker Underwood Pete STAFF 0 17 01 2009 0 Harry Potter And The Chamber Of Secrets QUIGLEY John 10CLL 0 16 02 2009 0 Girls In Love O brien Andy STAFF 0 16 02 2009 0 Clay Moseley Emma 7COL 0 26 01 2009 0 Deep Trouble Goosebumps Smith Laura STAFF 0 Once yo u have 06 02 2009 0 Harry Potter amp The Philosophers Stone O brien Andy STAFF 0 h IQ hl IQ hted the relevant 11 02 2009 0 Manfred The Baddie Ph
271. r This will contain all Current Loans and Past Loans for the student User GEMMA TURNER Disaster With A Dog So Small A Ghost Dog Harry Potter amp print all Fiend The Goblet Of F Crass Displayed here are all Current and Past Loans Click on the resource then More then Draga want to write a resource into review to write a the Review raviaw far tha itam treasure chest to review Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 155 WW Chapter 9 Reviews mMm iS If you have chosen to click on the resource and then More you will have to option to click on want to write a review as shown below Other stuff I want to write a review Show me where it is Show me similiar resources Review Font size and type options are chosen here A Review of Fireweed by Farzana KHAN What was the book website or resource about Write down what the item was about and what you leamed Was it interesting What made you smile about it Was there a message Note your ideas here Did you enjoy it Overall did you enjoy it Would you recommend it Aleatid wens recommend it to a friend Star ratings are Text Colour and Smileys EN L selected here by are chosen here review a simply clicking on l Excellent l details are typed in the the desired star white window above A shortcut to get to the Review page as shown above would be to simply drag the
272. r May An resource that you d gt 006455 FIC As Bali Unjarranged Mamiage like to flag 007579 373 092 Steale Philip 1 December 1955 Rosa Parks and her Protest for Ciil Rights o0e214 3 Kennedy Ludovic 10 Rillington Place Pow Fic Henry O 100 Selected Stories 006628 937 Macdonald Frona 100 Things you should know about Ancient Rome gt 009231 769 09 Bailey Steve 100 Years of Physical Education 1899 1999 ESANEAN e OES 749 32 Fiell Ch rlotte 1000 Gare cross S078 Singleton Glen 101 Cool Science Expanrnents zi 007579 958 064 Malam John 11 February 1990 The Release of Nelson Mandela Past Loans 007141 Fic Finnis A Editor 13 Again ji gt 003531 297 Macdonald Fiona 16Th Century Mosque W 0001 909 62 Hills Ken 1910 The When Flagging is Reservations 000191 909 62 Sharnan Margaret 192 The 000195 909 82 Hills Ken 1940s The selected It appears Guanes 000194 909 62 Tames Richard Lawrence Amos 1960 s The highlighted here 000181 909 82 Campling Elizabeth 1970 s 2 006311 331 13 HayekFA 1980 s Unemployment and the Unions Reviews e 001064 973 Steedman Scott 19th Century Frontier Fort 006249 385 3 Macdonald Fiona 19th Century Ra wey Station 009241 628 914 Branstord Sandy 2001 a Joke Odyssey 006680 821 Andrew Sarah Editor 2001 A Postry Odyssey 0101 745 4 McDemnott Catherine 20th Century Design 009249 9739 Preston Daniel 20th Century United States History s 000117 909 82 Adams Simon 20th Century a visual hist
273. r data is formatted the place or click on the same calendar icon Data Tidy The schedule will start on the date specified at 18 00 to stop performance loss in the system Start Date 08 11 2007 Le For more information on Tasks and how to edit the time and date the Data Tidy takes place see Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net section on Schedule Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 221 WU Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data mM is Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data This chapter explains the different ways you can view your library data The Searching Databases section explains how to do a basic search of your library data and how to perform a more advanced search using Boolean logic The Flagging section tells you how to select more than one record making it possible to view delete and print a selection of items all at the same time The Page Views section explains what a view is and how to create your own views so that you can see your data in the way that suits you The Sorting Data section explains how you can sort each field within any of the databases i e Resources Borrowers and Current Loans etc into ascending or descending order The Exporting Data section tells you how you can export your data into a different format The Printing Data section tells you how to print out your data from any of the databases Searching Databases You can search any of the databases in Junior Librarian n
274. r delete it if you wish Chapter 13 Tidying Data ee aD Ve Vu ww Page f of 1 f records r Tune siame Word User Name Ge Resourc 1 009 P Administrator ae ABvasced Search Re Sorsewere Recor 4 E a ta Tutor Groups 2 Dette J Expon D am Current Loans Son 2 Past Loans BE wes Ww a Fugaeg aaa te row 2 Sl More c Reviews Dene J Trusted sites Protected Mode Off 10 Once you have added the words to the Data Cleanse Remove database you then need to specify which fields within the resource borrower record that you want Data Cleanse Remove to apply to Make sure that you are in the correct screen that you want to enter the settings for i e Resources or Borrowers In the screenshot below the Resources database has been selected From the menu bar at the top of the screen click on Settings and then Data Tidy Database Schedule Modules Tools Secunty Setings Help ne ee eel Time stamp Word Replace With Us Select Settings 12 06 2007 AS level ASLevel G FR 12 06 2007 O U P OUP G and then Data 12 06 2007 But but G Tid Borrowers 42 06 2007 of of Guill pegs Views i re 12 06 2007 Macdonald Macdonald G Restrictions 12 06 2007 cd CD G Tutor Groups 42 06 2007 Macro Macro G wen 12 06 2007 Mackey Mackey Gy 12 06 2007 Xi X G CurrentLoans 12 06 2007 Coi col 2i 12 06 2007 DfEE DEE 12 06 2007 R A C RAC Guest Past Loans 12 06 2007 1900 s 19
275. r ener a Flin ied Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 click under the 80 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m Is Click Export at the bottom of the screen Description Fiction Floor Plan 3 p F Librarian 2 Floor Plan l namane You are here Co Fita C Fena O Fiction es E Fietign Entrance Browse Update xfort Delete ej g QOQ Save Close Click Save and select a location for where you want to save the image to File Download Security Warning Do you want to open or save this file hs Name cd04d287 70ae 45af bd56 b28ceSa5cle5 bmp Type Paint Shop Pro 7 Image 9 46 KB From localhost potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not Y While files from the Internet can be useful this file type can open or save this software What s the risk Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 81 Nyi Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S Adding Borrowers How do create a new tutor group Before you can manually add your borrowers you need to create the tutor groups to which they will belong Make sure you are in the Tutor Groups database by clicking on the r icon Tutor Groups Click au under the Records tab on the right of the screen A Blank Tutor Groups screen will then appear pa If you have Enter the Detais Move To Members added a ny details of the Details Custom Fields borrower
276. r you to link your catalogue resources together so that when your borrowers are searching the catalogue they will be able to see items which might also be of interest An example for wanting to do this could be that you have a book in your library on the RSPCA as well as the RSPCA website It would be very useful to you and your borrowers if the two resources were linked together Using the example above first find and go into the book on the RSPCA and then click on the Linked Items tab Click on Find Resource or if you know the barcode of the resource you want to link type it in the box and then click Find Resource m lt r Barcode 1 Tithe Dalai Advanoad Loya Aacerebons Gunman Hotere Photogeph Linked hem Plone Pisn Tete Autor Class WAL Y HARRY POTTER AND THE HALF BLOOD PRINCE Rowling J E Fiction hiipi Intemational cover art for Hary Potter hiipi teacherasion fa Cl ick on Fi n d Y HARRY POTTER amp THE GOBLET OF FIRE Royaling J K Fiction http HARRY POTTER amp THE GOBLET OF FIRE Foal LK Fichen hip Reso u rce O r type Harry Potter lesacon http wen hoen gE oe m the barcode of Y HARRY POTTER amp THE PHILOSOPHER S STONE Rowling J E 005 bttp HARRY POTTER AHD THE PRISONER GF AZKABAN Firravling JE Fiction http the reso u rce yo u amp Harry Potter ounpanon ite wee Rechignaher cor E G Harry Potter http www Stonesfromhew Wa nt to be lin ked in the box 4 DJQ Page
277. rarian net WwW mis Once the resource record has saved successfully click on Book of the Week from the Tools menu Click on Book of the Week from the Tools menu 574 ASIMOV is The Book of the Week window will open showing the book that you have chosen to be book of the week To make this the active book of the week highlight the record by clicking on the title of the book Once it shows as blue click the Activate button Current Future books of the week Click the Activate button to activate the selected book as book of the week Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 177 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis Click Yes when the below window pops up a k Make the selected item the active book of the week As this is the first book of the week you have selected you will more than likely see the below warning pop up This simply means that no further books of the week are scheduled Click Ok to this warning zax fo books of the week defined To define books of the week edit the resource record and tick the book of the week option and click save You will see that your book of the week has now moved from the Future books of the week window to the Current window This means that this book is now currently book of the week and there are no future books of the week scheduled Current Book of the Week shown here Current joutcast F
278. rce screen click on the Icon Website Once the resource record screen appears click in each field in which you wish to add information Type the URL of the website here Enter the resource details by filling in the required fields Click the drop down arrow to see a list of keywords You can jump to a specific word by typing in the start of the word Click Save when you have finished Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 61 Nyi mis Chapter 4 Creating My Library How do I catalogue a text book From the New Resource screen click on the gD Icon Text Book Once the resource record screen appears click in each field in which you wish to add information There are drop down arrows next to most fields on the screen Clicking these means you can select from a list of previously entered information Click Save when you ve finished P S Photograph Linked liema Flot Plan a Click the drop down 7 arrow to see a list of om i keywords You can ES s diame jump to a specific word by typing in the Maths Mathematics start of the word Click Save when you have finished d n Jut of Print a Addi Ect Delete How do I catalogue an item which doesn t belong to a specific resource type If you want to catalogue resources which don t fall under any of the main resource types you can use the Generic type From the New Resource screen click on the a Ic
279. reate Mobile Favorite Send to OneNote Internet Options This tool details the progress and completion of the Active Directory scheduled task Directory Services Status Junior Librarian net User Guide Scheduled True Last run on 19 04 2010 at 08 30 Domains 1 tom 24 03 2010 12 15 MLS AD Syne Server Started 24 03 2010 12 15 Service Un Version 11 4 209 wa Chapter 12 Security m S How do I know which borrowers are not linked to Active Directory When you link your borrowers to Active Directory using Directory Services borrowers who couldn t be linked can be searched for in the Borrowers database Click on Advanced Search at the top right of the screen Perform a search by selecting New Active Directory Linked Equal to False This will bring up anyone who is not linked to Active Directory You can then ask your IT technician for a list of Active Directory Logon Name s for the borrowers who couldn t be linked Once you have these you will need to manually link the borrowers See previous section ne Anitan Feci Sparsi ni Yalus daw w Active Directery Lriced wal Fraual to wv Fals lak able Opal ator Value GO Ade Ect Ramowa Remm Al For more information on searching please see Chapter 15 Viewing Library Data section on Searching Databases Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 210 we Chapter 12 Security m S How do I import Active
280. resources which you haven t checked in will be marked as Missing and placed in the resource Recycle Bin If you have checked or scanned any resources which were previously placed in the resource recycle bin these will be restored into the main Resource table If you wish to deselect any of these options un tick the relevant option s When you are happy to proceed click Complete This routine will complete the stock check After completion you can no longer alter the stock check x Mark items as missing l Restore previously recycled items _ Return resources currently on loan Your StockCheck is then finished Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 269 WwW Chapter 18 StockCheck m S What happens to completed StockChecks Once a StockCheck has been completed it stays listed in the Tools StockCheck screen for you to view when you wish Highlight the StockCheck and click Edit on the right of the screen Highlight the Stock Check 30 April 8 1 StockCheck Stock Check 29 Apnhw and click Edit Stock Check 29 April Break Stock Check 29 April HARD Stock Check 29 April Ref Stock Check 29 Apnil Test Stock Check 29 April Test Stock Check 29 April Test3 Stock Check 28 Apnil 6 You can view the list of checked missing and all items in the StockCheck lf you want to have a paper copy of each list click the PB icon Print Description Btock Check 05 May 2010 Chec
281. ress Optional Address6 The sixth line of the borrowers home address Optional PostCode The borrowers postcode Optional Email The borrowers email address Optional TelephoneNumber_Home The borrowers home telephone number Optional TelephoneNumber_Work The borrower work telephone number Optional TelephoneNumber_Mobile The borrower mobile telephone number Optional LibrarySet The borrowers library set Optional Ethnicity The borrowers ethnicity Optional House The borrowers house Optional DateExpires The date the borrower is automatically recycled Optional DateAdded The date the borrower was added to the administration system Optional Photograph_Filename The path amp name of the borrower photograph Optional RFID The borrower RFID ID Optional Guardian1_ Title The guardian1 s salutation Optional Guardian1_Surname The guardian1 s surname Optional Guardiani_Forename The guardian1 s forename Optional Guardian1_Address1 The first line of the guardian1 s home address Optional Guardian1_Address2 The second line of the guardian1 s home address Optional Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 89 Chapter 4 Creating My Library Guardian1_Address3 Guardian1_Address4 Guardian1_Address5 Guardian1_Address6 Guardian1_ Postcode Guardian1_ Email Guardian1_TelephoneNumber_Home Guardian1_TelephoneNumber_Work Guardian1_TelephoneNumber_Mobile Guardian2_ Title Guardian2_ Surname Guardian2_ Forename Guardian2_Address1 Guardian2_Address2 Guardian2_Address3 G
282. rian net site is loaded giving students the ability to issue and return resources To turn off Self Issue simply reverse this process Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 26 A single click mis Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net Librarian Only Librarian Only is the area in which you will manage your library system itself This section as well as all other sections mentioned in this chapter will be covered in more depth at a later stage in this guide Below is a brief description of various functions within the Librarian Only area Click here to search the database you re in You can click the Advanced Search Click Help to access the option to perform a more icons on the help topics and to access Click these arrows to detailed search See Chapter menu bar to version details move through the pages 15 Viewing Library Data for access extra of your records more information settings Click these Saart 1 Fichon Rosing JA Harty Potier amp The Goblet Of Fira Paperback Library on any of the ae ar gt 2 M6 Roming JE Hary Potter amp The Phiosopher s Stone Hardback Library The options InN the Records he left i 4 Fiction Rowing JEK Hary Pottar And The Prisoner Of Azkaban Paperback Library area enable you to pe rform t e e t gives bender 5 Fitton Ageing JE Hany Potter And The Chasster Ol Secrets Paperback Library ce rta i n a ctio
283. riction on an individual resource in your catalogue perhaps because it is a book which is in higher demand than the rest so you want the loan period to be less Click on the uii Resources icon on the left of the screen Find and highlight the resource you want to set the restrictions for from the list and then either to open the record card double click on it or click Edit Click on the advanced tab at the top of the screen Place a tick in the Lock Restrictions box and then enter the restrictions you d like the resource to have Click save when you have finished If you change your mind and would like the system to ignore the resource restrictions simply take the tick out of Lock Restrictions and any restrictions will become greyed out Barcode 20006 anced Details Adv Resource Type Enter the Minimum Book age for a borrower to Public Notes be able to take out the resource Put a tick in Lock Restrictions Loan Period Maximum Resery Enter the restrictions you d like this Minimum Age Maximum Renew Yi Lock Restrichons Loans Title Reservations Summary Photograph p s Linked Items Custom Fields v A CO Book of the Week First Published 01 10 1973 Select All Clear All Save Close resource to have If you want to restrict any year groups or groups from borrowing this resource select these here
284. rld You ll notice that there are only limited options available in Silverlight Home Page for students compared to the Grown Ups login which have access to Grown Ups Multi Issue Multi Return etc This is because student login permissions are designed to be used by any students wanting to view the library s resources aS opposed to wanting to make any changes to it User account security is covered in great detail in Chapter 13 Security How do I open Silverlight Home Page Once you have launched Junior Librarian net See the Getting Started with Junior Librarian net section of Chapter 1 Getting Started you are in the Silverlight Home Page Without logging in you will have access to Search the library catalogue view News items by clicking on the Newspaper Top Ten resources by clicking on the books on the towel and New Resources added to the system by clicking on the hot air balloon In order for the student to start using the library in a more interactive way they need to Login o 7 Login Username Barcode Students may login either by using their barcode a username and password or the identikit Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 238 WW Chapter 15 Silverlight Home Page mM iS Using Silverlight Home Page How do borrowers view resources Once the borrower has logged into My Account there are various different ways in which they can view resources Read the captions below for further detail
285. rowse to the location of the ClickView file you need to import This file is usually available from the following location ClickView Server c Program Files ClickView ClickView Library ClickViewDataFeed xml Once this file has successfully been located click on Import to begin the import Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 292 Chapter 19 Third Party Products m Is Import Flease select a file typ Marc 21 Carel Fress LinksPlus Accelerated Reader Quiz List Click View Filename Browse This file has been scheduled for import to check it s status click View Tasks from the schedule menu o To check on the status of the import navigate to Schedule View Tasks The best way to find and play a video if you know what you are looking for is to search for it Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 293 a Chapter 19 Third Party Products m Is How do Borrowers view ClickView Videos in Junior Librarian net On the Home Page click on the Search option on the signpost This will take you to the Search box click on the Views button to display page views available for searching See Page Views section in Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net for further information Search Click on the ClickView page view displayed above which will navigate you to all available ClickView videos Search Search for ia 1901 1945 1945 1986 eco on 60 Second Australian Australian i n
286. rrrnsrrrrnrrrerrrrnerrrerreen 143 What happens after I ve applied my reminder settings ccccceccecceeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeees 144 How do I print reMinders ccccssscccceececeeeeeceeceneeeeeeesecseeeeeseeessueesseeeenseeessaeeeneesensaeeens 145 Whaica memo Used TOL ies err lost trae nantes eh oe lesa eRe ahd ea oe tsi ea 146 How do I send reminders to individual DOrrOWEIS c seccceeeeseeeceeeeceeeeseeeseueeseeesaueeneues 147 Past E0aN Sice deed teeta ren dea eeien ences ie E 148 FIOW Ol VIEW pastloans 7 desnucss Spent cant toucel trent sane caniceld can a namie 148 How do delete a past loan ccccccccescecsseecceececeeeeeeeeenseeeeeesessucessseseteeessaeeeneesensaeeens 148 Ghapter g RESCEV ALOIS ciipiescesavedccaceoceaiantansccaandnapunsyeecadenodsasandsuanacenodsnsnntsemacseandsnsasneeeatyuesarc 149 MAKING ESCIV ALIONS aro a a en Poet eeaereeteeenaeies 149 How GO reservations WOIK 7 esi ctor tirecdeceislbene nene s e dae dislsban e tat 149 How does a borrower reserve a resource cceeccceecceeccceeeccuceceuseceeeceueecueeseeessueeseessaess 150 The second way to reserve a resource is by logging into the My Books screen 152 How do reserve a resource for a DOrrowWer oc cecc cece sce eecceeeeseeeeeeeeueeeeeeseeeseeeaueeaeeeseeses 153 Managing RESCIVallOnS ispscnron anra 153 How do VIEW reservations cnirrnin a E at eoe seat Steeda at epecseat eed 153 How long are reservat
287. rs EG Management Microsoft Intenet Explorer provided by Database Schedule Modules Discovery Directory Services Reminders Data Tidy Select Schedule and then Reminders 574 GILMAN 574 GILMAN 574 CARTER an The Reminders screen will then appear where you can choose which settings you d like For example You may want to set your group reminders to be sent once per week on a Sunday morning at 10 00 00 The start date is 28 06 2007 This means that when the reminders are due the Schedule will send the reminders to the form tutors who have an email address entered in the tutor group record It will also send the reminders to the Output table in the form of a PDF document When you come into the library on the following Monday all you ll need to do is go into the Output screen and print the reminders Place a tick errenda here to select teinana Use the calendar to Group sich ihede Snahiidal maisina select a date you d like your reminders to start The date you wish the remmders to start Reminders The time you would like the reminders to run Run the schedule weekly on 4 Run the schedule fortnightly on 5 Run the schedule monthly on the day of the month ni ast reminder when lirat reached Type the time eae waa you d like the E schedule Group Reminders reminders to run Choose the interval period here If you would like the reminders to be se ae sent now put a ti
288. s Please Note The information shown in Search Views depends on the views which have been created specifically for the Silverlight Home Page For more information on Views see Chapter 12 Customising My Library Software section on Page Views wah nn re J di 7 User ANDY O BRIEN Group STAFF Home Search for Borrowed 0 aesaad 0 Enter search ordue criteria to locate resources Click here to see newly added rASOLIFCAS Click on Search to view various available page Click views for searching here to view details of Click on My Books to view books you Click on have chosen to save Reviews to for future loaning or see resources oo reservations you have reviewed or are waiting to be reviewed Click here to see the Top Ten resources To view a resource from the Home Page simply click on the resource once to expand the view and then click on the More icon to open the record Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 239 UJ mis If you like the resource and would like to add it to My Stuff simply click and drag the resource into the My Stuff treasure chest Chapter 15 Silverlight Home Page Then click on the treasure chest to enter My Books where you can Reserve the resource or put it in your queue for Reviews a a Aa User ANDY O BRIEN wei foa Dro My Books Search for Sams Teach 2 Print A
289. s in Junior Librarian net What is user manager User Manager is the area in which you can set up users which you either don t want as borrowers in Junior Librarian net or you wish to have access to the Grown Ups area within Junior Librarian net This means that rather than someone having to add themselves as a borrower to gain access to the system they can just use the logon details for the user manager group they belong to For example You may want your IT technician to be able to access Junior Librarian net however you don t want them to be listed as a borrower You could set up a new user in User Manager called IT Technician and give them the permission settings you want them to have This means that when they click on Log in on the Junior Librarian net home page they would enter the username and password for their user account If you don t want to be listed as a borrower simply create yourself as a new user making sure that you belong to the Security Group Administrators See How do I create a new user account below lf a user forgets their password you can go into their account in User Manager and change the password Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 198 Chapter 12 Security m S How do I create a new user account From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Security and then User Manager A Mana eya ien oft Ir z A s yume F ided by Micro Librar y n Sy e aj pai a gt Valabase Sched
290. s on the move z B Tas Fasi sd as Se elec Click Add to add a new Custom Field Custom Fields 2b Resouces Aa ater Soe Click the drop down arrow at the end of the Table field and select the relevant database you d like to add the custom field to Type the Field Name and then the Data Type for example Text Number or Currency etc Click Add when you have finished Click the arrow to select which database you want to add the custom field to Type the name Settings Fields of the custom field you want to add here a Table Resources Field Name First Published Data Type Text Eo Click the arrow and select the format you want the custom field to be in Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 98 Chapter 4 Creating My Library mis The Custom Field you ve created will now be shown underneath the relevant table You can delete or rename it if you wish Custom Fields 4i Resources m C First Published ba Borrowers zo amp Tutor Groups Add Close When you create a new Custom Field it can be accessed by clicking on the Advanced tab which is located on the individual resource or borrower record card Click the Barcode 20006 Title Advanced tab Advanced Loans Rezevators Summaty Resource Type Book v Public Notes Book not available please see librarian Notes Replace at next stockcheck Restricti
291. screen click the Settings tab and then Language Database Schedule Modules Tools Secunty Settings Help EEN Resources EL Passoa Manage Module Settings gt bi he hell Barcode Class Author Barcodes Resources e 1745 574 GILMAND anior Lirerin 3R Data Tidy Panes gt 1746 574 ANDERSON P Fields Language Page View s lt Q gt 1747 574 GILMAND Tutor Groups E 1748 574 CARTER G La 1750 574 WATERSJ Current Loans 1751 574 CHISHOLM J 1753 574 asmovi 7 gt 1754 574 BELLAMY D gt i755 591 LOGVINOFF A Restrictions Reservations Reviews Printing Past Loans BOTANIC MAN Reservations ANIMALS ON THE MOVE Select Language ANDS THE ER PLANET The Language screen will then appear Under Installed Languages a list of languages which are included in Junior Librarian net is displayed As you can see from the screenshot below only English is listed If your school is based overseas you will more than likely have more than one installed language Select the Language under the Installed Languages heading and click on Modify to change field s for that language N i It iat byte bet Language Lists the languages currently installed in Junior System Default Language English Installed Languages ll Languages Save Cancel Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 Click the arrow to change t
292. se note if you are using style J8658 this is not suitable for barcodes When buying labels we advise e Buy labels which are suitable for your printer e lf you are printing barcodes make sure you use labels with a white background e To guard against wastage print a test page first or use plain paper the test page will show guidelines which will not actually be printed when you print the labels e Scan the test barcode label to make sure that it beeps e Ensure you insert your labels in the printer the correct way round If it prints over the label borders then this is probably the case Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 248 W Chapter 17 Label Print m iS Printing Labels How do print library cards for borrowers When Label Print is launched if the background list displays your whole catalogue or borrower database then the entire range will be printed Within Grown Ups open the Modules menu from the top menu options Place your mouse over Labelprint to expand the sub menu From the sub menu click on Card Print Tools Security Setli Click on Card Print to Card Print print library cards for Genarabs Barcodes P your borrowers Te U a Cision ee i i In the General tab of the Card Print screen below either individually select the groups for which you wish to print cards by selecting Selected Groups and individually ticking the group boxes Or choose to print for all groups by leaving All Groups selected
293. select Settings and then Reviews Security Settings Help Modules Lools GILMAN D 574 ANDERSON P NS AND I Click Settings 574 CARTERG and then Reviews 574 GILMAN D ND THE 574 WATERS J 574 CHISHOLM J 1753 574 ASIMOVI Past Loans t 1754 574 BELLAMY D BOTANIC MAN ER PLAN Type the questions you d like your borrowers to answer making sure you do so for both your Fiction and Non Fiction items if needed Click Save when you have finished Click here to an change the Seton Nonfiction You can screen to E sue Gia A Y e a a amp change the Fiction or 4 GA B Ain U ae xi j t bt layout using Non Fiction Format Font 7 Size Ta Oye the Tools here Type your review questions here Click Save when you SES have finished D For more information on Reviews please see Chapter 9 Reviews Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 47 WW Chapter 3 Settings m S Printing Its possible to restrict the amount of pages which are printed from My Books From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Settings and then Printing 574 GILMAN D Barres gt 1746 574 ANDERSON P amp 1747 574 GILMAND CHGIeOn Settings and Tutor Groups 1748 574 CARTERG then Printing 2 1750 574 WATERS J Current Loans z gt 1751 574 CHISHOLM J Re a 1753 574 ASIMOV 7 E 1754 574 BELLAMY D BOTANIC MAN
294. servations How do reservations work When a resource is on loan it s possible for other borrowers to reserve it for when it is returned lf there are multiple copies of a resource all copies will be reserved The advantage of this is that if all copies of the resource are out on loan the first copy to be returned regardless of its accession number can be issued to the first person who has reserved it rather than them having to wait for a particular copy to be returned Reservation information is stored in the Reservations database See the section How do view reservations below Please Note The only exception to the above is if more than one person reserves the same resource and there are several copies on loan If this happens the first resource to be returned gets reserved for the first person who made a reservation The second resource to be returned is then reserved for the second person who made a reservation This process continues for all Subsequent reservations and resources which are returned When a resource is reserved and then returned to the library using Circulate an Adobe Reader window opens where you can print the reservation slip You can then insert one part of the slip inside the register for the form tutor to give to the borrower who has reserved the resource and the other part inside the resource ready for collection Click the print icon to print the reservation slip Junior Librarian net User Guide Version
295. signed for office use assuming only a limited number of scans per day However it has recently been improved to withstand a heavier load We have many users who have used the scanner now for several years on a daily basis without a problem It is vital that you look after your scanner If you do not then you will eventually experience problems A daily maintenance routine should be established e Atthe end of each day turn the scanner over so that the scanning area is facing downwards on a desk This will protect it from dust overnight and encourage any existing particles of dust etc to fall off the surface e To remove any surface grit stretch a length of sticky tape over the scanning surface sticky side down and then peel it off slowly Any grit or dirt should adhere to the tape and be removed from the scanning surface e The manufacturers recommend that you clean the scanning surface regularly with a dry cloth Do NOT use liquids of any kind Above all ensure all users are aware of the danger of damaging the rubberized membrane with their fingernails and the fact that a new scanner will be required if this is damaged Identikit minimum system requirements Identikit will only work reliably if your PC matches the following specification Windows XP or Windows Vista Internet Explorer 7 0 Minimum 1 5 Ghz Dual Core CPU Minimum 1 Gb RAM 400 Mb of free disk space USB 1 and 2 0 Sockets Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11
296. sing All fields Author will effectively run Keywords the query without f applying any filtering Series Classification O Genre Q Subject O Summary Gnoose howihe All of the words search phrase will be processed against _ O Any of the words any specific resource Or fields if chosen Exactly the phrase bove a O Asa phrase Starts with Fiction and Non Fiction Choose a specific type of book to be O Fiction only queried with the E L search phrase Non Fiction only Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 15 Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net m Is Search results on the Book Shelf After conducting a search either visually or by text the search results are displayed on a book shelf interface Depending on the number of results you can scroll right or left to view all of the shelves with the resources that met your search criteria Clicking on a given resource icon displays further information about it including the title or name author class and its availability in the library You may also filter sort print and export the results directly from the book shelf interface B EA Click on a iw resource icon to Click ona view more resource type to information filter it off the about it shelves of search results ROALD DAHL ILD DAW R Click ona badge to enter your account or view items
297. source records cccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 160 Using Quick Searchin QUICK REDIACE wsise e sects ews seem tele ciadswayeesesteesbadanevaestabebsbieectasabeebss 162 How do I mark a resource as Missing a sieiesiess sterstecaioraats oi one teed eo ah glared diana aloasteedieda 163 Making Changes To Borrowers and Tutor Groups cccccceeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeneeeeneeeeaneeeeneeeenees 166 FIOW OO ICGIl a Ol OW ON Sistecar agate etait ates ata nde cea A Wee eras 166 How do change a borrower s PIN ccccsccceeeceeeceeeceeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeenes 166 How do delete amp DOrrOWEN cccecccseccsececececeeeceuceceueccueecsucecsuecsusesseeesueessueeseeessusesanes 166 FIOW do ledit atuto OFOUD 4 suis 6 on ook ater Ghar a hae ion son oa ae Gnawa 167 HOw do l Gelete tutor group i rce idee iedceeehieceed 167 DISCOVERY ONG assisen ae a 168 What is Discovery Online ccccccsscccseeeeceececeseeeceeceseeeecsecessueeesssessueeessesensaeeeseesensaees 168 How do I choose which fields to update cccecccecccsececeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeseueeseeesaueeaeeesaees 168 How and when does my catalogue get UPAated ccccccccecceeecseeceeeceeeseeeseeeseeeeeesaeees 170 How do I update my whole catalogue ccccecccssecceeeceeeceeeeceueeseeeaueeseueeseeesaeessneesaees 170 What happens if the Discovery Online update fails cceccceeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaes 170 PIOUSCK
298. sswords and allows you to select to which Tutor Group s you would like to apply these changes Global Updat AE Select Logon Name values from the options listed Select more Tutor Group s than one Tutor Year 0 1F1 Group s by fee ar Al holding the Year 0 RH CTRL key and Year 0 STAFF Password highlighting the Year 1 1 2JH Custom Password required groups Year 1 1HB Year 10 10CLL Logon Name W Borrower Barcode Select Password Add Password values from the options listed Borrower 0 0 6 Year 10 10KDU O Borrower Barcode Year 11 11CSH Borrower Postcode Ctrl Click to select multiple tutor groups This utility will only update borrower records with no existing logon details Please Note The Global Update utility will only update borrower records which have no existing logon details Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 30 Chapter 3 Settings m Is Module Settings SIP2 Server To enable the system to work with SIP2 compatible terminals click on Settings then Module settings and SIP2 Server Enter the Borrower Identifier and Resource Identifier settings Select the relevant Borrower Identifier method from the drop down list Finger Print Management System ID UPN Username and Password Password SIP Server Select the relevant R
299. st barcode it requests is a Borrower s barcode rather than a Resource barcode vo f Le The Borrower icon requires a Borrower s Barcode fingerprint Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 108 WwW Chapter 5 Circulate m S Once you have scanned the Borrower s barcode or fingerprint into the designated box the cursor will then move to the Resource barcode box and any books the borrower currently has on loan will be shown along the bottom of the window Tie 000i Harry Potter amp The Goblet Of F Resource after resource may be scanned here each one listed along the bottom of the Multi Issue window Should you accidentally issue the incorrect book again you are able to use the Undo function button which will undo the last action performed Once the Borrower s maximum allowance has been reached a warning will pop up and no further resources may be issued Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 109 WwW Chapter 5 Circulate m S How do I return a resource From Borrow amp Return scan the barcode label inside the book The system will automatically return the book xford fat matics Returned NB You can also return a resource from the Current Loans screen in Grown Ups by highlighting it and then clicking on the Return icon under the Records tab on the right of the screen gt ent Loar VI Date Due Days Overdue Title Surname Forename Group Name Reminder Numbe
300. t in the Borrowers screen Avery Mint Laser Labels L7651 System reports Barcode Labels Barcode Labels with Borrower Name Note how only templates relating to Borrowers are available Below is an example of Label Print in the Resources screen Avery Mint Laser Labels L7651 d B System reports BE Barcode Labels Barcode Labels with School Name Renaissance Learning Co oo Renaissance Learning Spine Labels Author Year Spine Labels Dewey Author Ye Spine Labels Dewey Author Spine Labels Dewey i WW mis 1h Resources Note how there are many more available templates when accessed from the Resources screen Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 255 Chapter 18 StockCheck m S Chapter 18 StockCheck This chapter explains how you can StockCheck all of your resources by using the StockCheck facility About StockCheck Scanning the bar code labels of shelved items will enable StockCheck to produce details of Missing items by comparing those scanned with the full official catalogue list Items currently on loan are kept as a separate list but are effectively treated as in stock You can identify shelved i e in stock items by scanning the accession number bar code label which was fixed in the resource when it was catalogued NOT the ISBN bar code on the back cover If this label is missing or unreadable you can use
301. t the section that you d like to edit the fields Machine Name Notes for here e g Address 3 Address 2 Field Names cadens Address 6 Address 5 Address 4 Section Field Names v Fingerprint Stored Edit Recycled Edit Days on Loan Edit Password Loan Period Artist Type Reminder Number Edit Allowance Date Expires Page 1 of 22 403 items Save Cancel l A list of the fields you can change will then be shown The original name is listed under the Source heading and any modification name is listed under the Edited heading To change a field name find the one you want to change from the list for example you may want to rename the Recycled field to Deleted Click the Edit option next to the field name that you want to change Your cursor will flash next to the field name Type the new name e g Deleted and then click Save at the bottom of the screen You will then be taken back to the main languages screen click Save The new field names will be shown once the IIS server has been restarted The edited The original field Eas field name is name is shown Section Field Names shown here here Date Added Machine Name Notes Address lt Address 2 i f Click Edit next Address di agent to the field you nent 2 wish to change Address 4 Fingerprint Stored Deleted Days on Loan Password dit Type the new Loan Period eal field name Type Reminder
302. t when a borrower comes to take out or reserve a resource the system will allow them the specific loan period and allowances which belong to the restriction group that they have been assigned to By setting your restrictions in this way you aren t giving your resources any restrictions so the system is relying purely on the borrower group restrictions The more complex restrictions will be covered later in this section Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 117 Ww Chapter 6 Restrictions m S To create a new borrower restriction group click on the Settings tab and then Restrictions from the menu bar at the top of the screen alabane Cchacide ee ap x Ualabase Scheaus opis Stag selings hep Detabase odes Ti 1 s Click on Settings Resources ER x S and then p ri e e porrowers Restrictions r v 4 t con i OTTE Peservebons Tutor Groups gt Fictian Rowdin Pervert POTTER AN Printing un tuses gt 8 Fiction Byars Pertancher 2 HT FOX THE 2 gt 11 Fiction Blume j TALES OF A FOURT ee gt 13 Fiction Pratchett Temy THE WEE FREE ME 7 gt 14 Fiction Ada Richard WATERSHIP DOVA Reservations E gt E von Blut SUPERFUDGE Statement gt 16 Fictio MADAGASCAR MO 2 gt 17 Fiction Aiken F ARABEL AND MOR Reveows a 38 Fiction Allen L MY AUNTS A BALL The Restrictions screen will then appear The first tab selected is General where you can apply the settings of your choice If you have set age restr
303. tements Reservations Library Enable SMS reservations Next you need to ensure that the layout for SMS Reminders is set out as you require it to be Navigate to Tools Edit Reminders Add Keywords B k ai iha Wisst Pinag Fia Pian Calendar Edit Rennders Baus soar Select Reminder 1 and click Edit Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 287 Chapter 19 Third Party Products m Is The reminders listed below are shown in their respective ascending order i e the top reminder will be sent first then the next one on the list and so on and so forth Individual Reminder 1 Reminder 2 ja Reminder 3 Delete Reminder 4 8 Click on the SMS tab shown below is the default format for a Text Message Reminder Please modify as you see fit Note the approximate length of the message is detailed on the top right hand corner this length is only approximate because the actual data replacing the values i e resource title may be longer than the value itself thus resulting in additional text messages being sent Description Reminder 1 Reminder SMS Grid Options Approximate message length shown here Reminder for Borrower Forename Borrower Surname of TutorGroup Name here Year lt TutorGroup YearGroup Dear Borrower Forename The item s you have borrowed is are now overdue Please return it them to the Library as soon as possible Thank you Library Manager
304. teria Allowance Loan Period i Q Page 1 of O 0 items you have finished Click Save when Once you ve clicked Save the new restriction group will be listed Repeat these instructions for each new restriction group you wish to create Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 119 lt Chapter 6 Restrictions m Is How do I add resource type restrictions to my borrower restriction groups It s possible for you to have different restrictions for each resource type in your catalogue and add these to the borrower restriction groups that you ve already created For example You may have already created a borrower restriction group called Borrowers For this group you have specified Maximum Allowance of 3 Maximum Reservations of 3 Loan Period of 14 This means that regardless of what type of resource is issued the above restrictions will apply You may now want to specify that any Films which are a media type of Video have the following restrictions Maximum Allowance of 1 Maximum Reservations of 1 Loan Period of 7 By setting these restrictions you can control the maximum allowance and reservations allowed on the specific resource types as well as allocating a separate loan period Click on Settings and then Restrictions from the menu bar at the top of the screen Management Microsoft Internet Eqptorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Lierwted Dalahkase Schedule Tade SGi sepNhJE Heip
305. the next four or five screens selecting the required fields SURNAME FORENAME When you come to the last screen ensure that Mail merge format is selected Click Create Close down Report Designer Screen click the cross in the top right hand corner Close the AD Hoc Manager Screen Select New Query and run the report for all Current Roll Click Print It will bring up a box saying Set Print File Name Name the file students csv Select and save the file to an external drive Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 86 i Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S Phoenix Student data can be easily imported from Phoenix by designing a report with the following fields ALL THESE EXACT FIELDS MUST BE INCLUDED SURNAME For details on how to design the report within Phoenix please refer to the Phoenix User Guide The report should be saved as a comma separated value CSV file to an external drive under the name students csv Sample of a Phoenix student file Surname Known As DOB M F Ad date Class Roll N Anderton Danielle 10 01 1991 F 05 09 1995 IMC 00664 Clarke Sam 18 07 1992 M 06 01 1997 LO 00769 Jones Charlotte 18 01 1995 F 07 09 1999 LT 00941 In most schools the following routine has proved successful though it may vary according to your version of Phoenix 1 In Phoenix Gold Go to the Pupils Reports menu then select the option Easy TEEI 2272
306. the source do not open or save this file What s the risk Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 236 U Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data m iS Printing Data You can print data from any of the databases in Junior Librarian net How do I print data Search the database for the information you want to print and then click on the g print icon under the Records tab on the right of the screen It s possible for you to restrict the pages which are printed from Enquiry Please see Chapter 3 Settings section on Printing for more information Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 237 WV Chapter 15 Silverlight Home Page m iS Chapter 15 Silverlight Home Page This chapter will explain how your borrowers can use Junior Librarian net by using the Silverlight Home Page application The Launching Silverlight Home Page section explains what Silverlight Home Page is and how to open it The Using Silverlight Home Page section explains how your borrowers use all of the functions of Silverlight as well as how to view their own borrower account details Launching Silverlight Home Page What is Silverlight Home Page Silverlight Home Page is the general home page for Junior Librarian net It requires Microsoft Silverlight to run this is covered in the Prerequisites section of Chapter 1 Getting Started As long as Silverlight is installed on the computer this page can be accessed by the students from any computer in the wo
307. then Import Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited Tools gn Circulate niana RESOL AE Schedule Modules Security Settings t Click Tools and then Import gt Resources 9 Ex FR 11470 7 yraphers Magnun Quick Replace Borrowers Add Keywords Pr 11334 F Book of the Week Simpsor a News Tutor Groups a 11549 giar Floor Plan Tempes gt Cabersdar Edit Reminders Current Loans e 11551 8 Tempes Housekeeping S Select Carel Press Links Plus from the list of file types and then click Browse to browse to where your quiz list file is stored Click Import Please select a file type Mare 21 Carel Press LinksPlus Accelerated Reader Quiz List Filename O Helpdesk Demo Data vWeb ore A message will then show telling you how many records were imported es Select Carel Press LinksPlus Click Browse to select the location of the LinksPlus file Click Import to import the links X 4 total of 3556 record s have been imported out of a A possible 3556 Please see the error log for information on failed records Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 280 Chapter 19 Third Party Products m Is ITV Signed Stories What are ITV Signed Stories ITV Signed Stories have made hundreds of children s stories available in British Sign Language and in text pictures a
308. tions How do restrictions work Restrictions in Junior Librarian net work similarly to Active Directory permission settings This means that you create different borrower restriction groups set up the permissions for those groups and then add your borrowers to whichever group you want them to belong to One of the main benefits of this is that you can create as many restriction groups as you wish all with different allowances For example you may have a restriction group for your staff borrowers and one for your standard borrowers giving the staff restriction group more allowances than the borrowers As well as being able to set up restriction groups for your borrowers you can also set restrictions for your resource types e g Book And the different media types within the resource type e g Paperback If you have set various different restrictions for your resources media types and borrowers the system will compare the loan period which has been set for all 3 and will take the lowest of them all This will be covered in greater detail later in this section Please Note There is a default restriction group set up when you first install Junior Librarian net This restriction group is called Normal and allows your borrowers to take out and reserve 3 resources for a maximum of 14 days Any existing borrower and any new borrowers who are added to Junior Librarian net will belong to the default Normal security group initially You can then chan
309. to take place If you would like to apply the Data Tidy settings to your existing resource borrower records either because it s the first time you ve entered the Data Tidy settings or because you have changed them you will need to schedule a date for this to take place Using the Schedule means that your records are updated on a date of your choice and by default at 18 00 hours This ensures that the performance of Junior Librarian net isn t affected From the menu bar at the top of the page click on Schedule and then Data Tidy Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited abase Schedule Modules Tools Securty Sefings teh cick on Schedule en Class Author and then Data Tidy puu 574 GILMAN D life on the seashi Discovery Direciory Services Rerenders Date Tidy 574 GILMAN D WILOLIFE OF FZ 574 CARTER G WILOLIFE IN TO 574 WATERS J WILDLIFE OF W The Schedule Data Tidy screen will then appear Type the start date for when you d like the Data Tidy to update your existing records You can also click on the calendar icon to select a date Once you ve selected a date click Schedule Clicking on Schedule adds Data Tidy to the Schedule as a Task You can view and edit the Task by clicking on Schedule and then View Tasks on the menu bar at the top of the screen Type a date for when you d like Data Tidy to take This routine will ensure all you
310. tor Group first then Surname Please see section How do specify what format the reminder is sent in for how to choose the default output settings How do I apply the settings for scheduled reminders Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 141 ee Chapter 7 Loans m Is Before any reminders can be sent out you ll need to choose your Schedule reminder settings From the menu bar at the top of the screen select Schedule and then Reminders Management Microsoft Intenet Explorer provided by Database Schedule Modules Tools Discovery Select Schedule and then Reminders Directory Services Reminders Date Tidy 574 GILMAN a View Tasks 1747 574 GILMAN Borrowers 574 CARTEF The Reminders screen will then appear where you can choose which settings you d like For example You may want to set your individual reminders to be sent once per week ona Sunday evening at 18 00 00 This means that when the reminders are due the Schedule will send the reminders according to their default output settings When you come into the library on the following Monday any reminders you have specified to be printed will be listed in the Output screen so all you ll need to do is print the reminders off If you have specified that they are to be emailed the borrowers will already have received their reminder emails provided a valid email address has been entered onto their record card For more informatio
311. tutor group Group Name 9S custom fields here Year Group 9 they will be mail rarssmith school co uk listed here Select the Fines Active 7 restriction type that the group Default Normal v will have here See Chapter 6 Restrictions for more information B OOQ Click save when you ve finished Please note that you cannot have two tutor groups of the same Group Name and Year Group You will need to repeat this process until you ve entered all of your tutor groups into Junior Librarian net Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 82 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S How do I add my borrowers manually Once you have all of your tutor groups on the system you can then start to add your borrowers Make sure you are in the Borrowers database by clicking on the ae icon Borrowers Click O acd under the Records tab on the right of the screen The Borrower New screen will appear gt Borrowers Please scan or type the barcode you are assigning to the borrower Click Auto to locate any available barcode Either enter the PIN you wish to allocate to the new borrower or click the Auto button to allocate the first available number Click Continue to Click Continue to edit the borrower s recor move to the Borrower record card N eere Continue Cancel Scan or type the barcode you are assigning to the borrower Alternatively y
312. ty Group drop down menu select the new security group that you want them to belong to and then click Save X Choose the security group Custom Fields Other Restrictions anned Default Normal v ye Save Close How do I change my password Once you ve logged into Junior Librarian net it s possible to change your logon password From the Tool bar at the top of the screen select Security and then Change Password Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Systems Limited Database Schedule Modules Tools Security Settings Help Change Password Click Security then Change Password 574 GILMAN D ife on the seashore 574 GILMAN D WILDLIFE OF FARK Br 574 CARTER G WILDLIFE IN TOWN Tutor Groups gt 1750 574 WATERSJ WILDLIFE OF WOO e E 1751 574 CHISHOLM J BIOLOGY Type your old Type your old password and then your new one then click Save password and then your new password x Old Password eeeceece New Password seseeesese Confirm Password eeeeseees Save Cancel Please Note If you are using Active Directory logon you will need to use the Change Password facility in Windows If you try to change it from the Change Password screen the following message will be shown Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 204 Chapter 12 Security m S Active Directory lf your borrowers are Active Directory
313. ty most popular searches Click on the Wheel button to conduct a random search from a variety of pre defined categories it searches resources that have Accelerated Reader quizzes attached to them io E Ge Advanced Any Interest Level y Fiction and Non fiction X Not sure what you want to read Click the wheel for some suggestions Click on the Advanced button to perform a search of specific fields in the library catalogue And Or Not Search tar b All of these words BUM All fields m And Or Not O Fiction and Non Fiction Fiction only Non Fiction only Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 14 mi Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net Text searching From the home page find the quick search area in the top right corner of the screen which is ready for search criteria to be entered by keyboard Type in your search Click here to start Click here to reset criteria your search your search Press ENTER on your keyboard or click on the white blue arrow button to start the search Clicking on the green button will reset the search box After typing the third character of the word or phrase into the search box a white box will appear to help fine tune the query if required Click and choose a All fields Close this box by specific resource Or clicking the white red field to be queried Title cross icon if not Q required Choo
314. type of Video and you have set a Global Resource Restriction for your Films A borrower who has been assigned to the Borrowers restriction group wants to take out a Film which is a Video The loan period given is 14 days which has been taken from the Borrower Restriction Group setting This is because it is the lowest of the three loan periods you have set Loan Period Restriction Restrictions BRG RTR GRR IRR Given Setting Used Masimum Allowance 4 J 3 MA 14 BRG Maximum Reservations a 4 3 SLE Loan Period 14 2 20 MIA Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 128 gt Chapter 6 Restrictions m S Example 5 You have created a Borrower Restriction Group a Resource Type Restriction for your Films with a media type of Video and you have set a Global Resource Restriction for your Films A borrower who has been assigned to the Borrowers restriction group wants to take out a Film which is a Video The loan period given is 7 days which has been taken from the Resource Type Restriction setting This is because it is the lowest of the 3 loan periods you have set Loan Period Restriction Restrictions BRG RTR GRR IRR Given Setting Used Maximum Allowance 4 4 J BJA T RTR Maximum Reservations 4 J J BJA Loan Period 14 E 2 BJA Example 6 You have created a Borrower Restriction Group a Resource Type Restriction for your Films with a media type of Video and you have set a Global Resource Restriction for your Hardware A borrower wh
315. u carters Talp Graepn 2 1750 574 WATERS J a 2 1751 574 CHISHOLM J Current Loans 2 rs 574 Asimov 1754 574 BELLAMY D BOTANIC MAN Past Loans i _ a rr brs AR A ER f AG Fe Ta Bes er The Settings Page Views screen will then appear Click on the Resources tab Click on the first sub tab you d like to change e g Loans Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 192 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net WwW mis The Page View Edit screen will appear This is the same screen you ll see when creating and editing the standard page views however only the Layout tab is available See How do I create a new view Make the required changes to the view and then click Save To see the changes go into a resource record and click on the tab you ve edited Description Lapout hO Loan Period bO Machine Name jf Recycled i T Renews Date Group Name bO Renewsl Time jal Return Tima lt Preview Issue Dale Return Date Barcode Surname Forename Group Name 19 11 1998 19 11 1998 10 11 1998 10 11 1998 v 2483 WESTWELL 2483 WESTWELL 02 07 1998 08 07 1998 2585 HEYS 21 10 1998 11 12 1998 2585 HEYS 12 11 1998 11 12 1998 36 BROGDEN 11 03 1999 13 04 1999 36 BROGDEN e available Field Visible Field cgiractions A Return Date Barcode H a Fine Rate Sum ame HOiesue Tene Forename Tammy 9NLL Tammy 9NLL David INLL Save D
316. u want your reminders to be shown on the PDF document and then printed in a specific order any sorting or record selection will need to be done first For example You may want your reminders to be printed in order by tutor group and then borrower surname This sort will need to be applied to current loans before clicking the reminders button To print individual reminders make sure you are in the Current Loans screen and then perform any searching you need Once you have the borrower s on the screen that you want to print reminders for click on under Tools on the right of the screen gt Reminders Choose the options you want by placing a tick in the relevant box Output selected reminder only means you can choose the specific reminder that you want to be sent Reprint last reminder when limit reached means that if any of the borrowers that you are sending reminders to have already had the last reminder they will receive it again This option won t be needed if you have selected Output selected reminder only Create reminders for overdue items only means that reminders will only be sent to borrowers who have overdue items The Output Options enable you to choose how the reminders are sent out You can use the actual reminder s default output settings or specify to print them or send them by email For more information on the reminders default output please see the section How do specify what format the reminder is sent in earl
317. ual to Field Table OTE occ than Greater than Including Beginning with Ending with Is empty Not equal to Add Not less than or Not greater than ev Not including Not beginning with Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 229 Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data In the Value box type magic Boolean Operator Field Table Operator Value Remove All Click Add to add this search criterion It will now appear in the white box Boolean Operator Or Keywords Equal to Il Field Table Operator Value The search criteria appears here after you Keywords Resources Equal to click Add Magic 6 Repeat the above instructions but type the word wizard in the Value box You ll see both search criteria is now detailed in the white box To perform your search click on Apply When using Boolean Or the resources with both the keywords of magic and wizard will be shown and also the resources which have either of those keywords x Advanced Searc Boolean Operator or kerora SlEqa F Field Table Operator Value Click Apply to Keywords Resources Equal to Magic perform your Keywords Resources Equal to Wizard search Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 230 W Chapter 14 Viewing Library Data m iS Flagging What is flagging Flagging is a way of selecting more than one record at a time Usually if you click on a record and then on another the first one you
318. uardian2_Address4 Guardian2_Address5 Guardian2_Address6 Guardian2_ Postcode Guardian2_ Email Guardian2_TelephoneNumber_Home Guardian2_TelephoneNumber_Work Guardian2_TelephoneNumber_Mobile UPN mis The third line of the guardiani s home address The fourth line of the guardian1 s home address The fifth line of the guardian1 s home address The sixth line of the guardiani s home address The guardiani s postcode The guardiani s email address The guardiani s home telephone number The guardian1 work telephone number The guardian1 mobile telephone number The guardian2 s salutation The guardian2 s surname The guardian2 s forename The first line of the guardian2 s home address The second line of the guardian2 s home address The third line of the guardian2 s home address The fourth line of the guardian2 s home address The fifth line of the guardian2 s home address The sixth line of the guardian2 s home address The guardian2 s postcode The guardian2 s email address The guardian2 s home telephone number The guardian2 work telephone number The guardian2 mobile telephone number The borrowers UPN See below for an example of a CSV file File Edit Format View Help Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional ManagementsystemID
319. ulate m Is Using Circulate How do issue a resource There are two different ways to issue resources to borrowers The first of which using Borrow amp Return is covered below From the Home page of Junior Librarian net click on the Borrow amp Return signpost You will then see the Circulate screen below Notice the resource icon this means you need to scanina Resource Scan the Resource barcode using the barcode reader The cursor will move to the next empty field in order for you to scan the Borrowers PIN Fingerprint Girls In Love Notice the Borrower icon is now showing meaning a Borrower s barcode fingerprint is required Please Note As long as you have selected to Allow Keyboard Input from within Settings Junior Librarian typing in the barcode is an option as well as scanning it Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 107 Ww Chapter 5 Circulate m S UNDO lf you have selected the wrong borrower or the wrong resource simply click on iga which becomes available once the book has been issued This will simply undo the last action taken within Borrow amp Return The second option when issuing a resource to a borrower is accessible only once logged into Grown Ups This is the Multi issue option which allows you to issue multiple resources to a borrower at once The first difference you will notice between Borrow amp Return and Multi Issue is that the fir
320. ule Modules 1ools Secunty Seun Heip saeou i _ Barcode Class Author Class Author User Manager Click User Resources Manager es 1745 574 GILMAN D life on the seashore or su cimo WILDLIFE OF FARML E 1748 574 CARTERG WILDLIFE IN TOWNS Tutor Groups 1750 574 WATERSJ WILDLIFE OF WOODI Los 4751 amp 7A CHIQHAI M I RIM NANAY You ll see that there are two default users already set up for you Click Add These are the Default groups The Administrator Group should only really be used for changing permissions or settings within the software not every day use Type the details for the new user making sure you select which Security Group you want them to belong to e g Administrator Click Save when you have finished Dotais Type the name of A the user here General Surname Forename Tick here if the L Banned Type the Logon Name user is Active Security for the user here Directory linked ee eT along with a password Logon Name Bob Password Select which Security Confirm Password Group you want them to belong to here Security Group Administrator 6 Junior Librarian net User Gui mm Chapter 12 Security m S Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 200 Chapter 12 Security m l S What is group manager Group Manager is where you set up the permission settings for each of your Security Groups Every borrower n
321. umber of interactive links that you can click on Access a feature of the system by choosing an icon or button from the book interface Click on Settings to choose from a selection of different icons and backgrounds log in required first Click on Other Libraries to visit MLSLibraries net and library catalogues outside of your school Other Libraries Settings Click in the quick Search box to begin searching for resources Click on Circulate to issue and return books Click on Reviews to write a descriptive review of a book you have borrowed Click Enquiry to browse through the library catalogue Click here to go to a list of new books in the library Welcome to Junior Librarian If you are not sure what to do then click me Jemo Site Click on Students and Click here to Click on My Stuff Librarian only Librarians here to go to alist Toggle to see what you ve to go into the should click Log visit the of the most sound on borrowed Librarian s On to access News popular or off reserved and management other features section of borrowed reviewed log in area of the available on an the books required first system individual basis library Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 12 wW S Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net m Circulate Circulate allows f
322. unior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 27 Chapter 3 Settings m S Chapter 3 Settings This chapter explains about the different ways in which you can customise Junior Librarian net Some of the sections are covered in greater detail later in the guide The Password Manager menu allows you to choose the level of security you would like to set for Borrower and User Manager passwords User Manager is covered in greater detail in Chapter 12 The Module Settings SIP2 Server menu enables the system to work with SIP2 Compatible Terminals The Barcodes section tells you about the relevance of setting up barcode masks to enable the system to read the different borrower and resource barcodes you will use The Junior Librarian Section explains how you enable disable settings as you see fit for your Circulate and Review screens Junior Librarian is covered in greater detail in Chapter 5 The Data Tidy section tells you how you can make changes to the data which is stored in Junior Librarian net Data Tidy is covered in greater detail in Chapter 13 The Fields section tells you how you can add your own custom fields into borrower tutor group and resource record cards Custom Fields is covered in greater detail in Chapter 4 The Language section explains how you can change the field names which appear in any of the databases Language is covered in greater detail in Chapter 11 The Page Views section tells you how you can create your ow
323. up the wrong data If this is the case leave the ISBN field blank and enter the data manually by clicking continue e lf an ISBN is entered the computer will search the Discovery Online database for the record which if found will close the Resources window and take you to the resources card to finish editing the record If no record is found you will go to blank resources card to enter the details manually Once the resource record screen appears click in each field in which you wish to add information When you are entering new books onto the system the information will automatically be taken from Discovery Online provided Discovery Online holds the information on that particular item The Date Added field If you select ee mr will automatically be imerarance Or ae cacao filled in with today s Ref as a class a seg aoaaa RRENA oaan date You can change tick will Series Mem E this if you wish automatically be placed in the Reference box Click on the arrow to see previously entered information D fa ln aa Anc EE Click the drop down Click Save Publication Date e G arrow to see a list of when you have a lt AS YOU LIKE 3 keywords You can finished cane 2 jump to a specific aegakrasT word by typing in the start of the word Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 55 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S There are drop down arrows next to most fields on the screen Clicking these means you can se
324. ups and click on Fingerprinting on the signpost On the Fingerprint Registration screen select the pupil s name from the drop down list Fingerprint registration Tutor group Borrower 7w O Basharat KHAN E Nikki HASTIE Adrian SHARROCK Gemma Turner gaiis Stacey CRUISE Sarah HARKIN Amy SHUTT You will be required to scan the same print four times Fingerp rint registration P Fingerpri nt registration Tutor group Borrower Tutor group Borrower 7WTL v Nikki HASTIE v SIDR 7 Jabar MOHAMMED WA z Please wait p Accepted T 4 prine required paN If the system is satisfied with all prints registration will be accepted Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 105 Chapter 5 Circulate m S IdentiKit and Data Protection MLS fully endorse the principle set out in the new Government s Coalition Agreement 2010 that permission from parents should be sought before enrolling students in a biometric system Our systems make use of a range of identification methods When a school chooses biometrics as its preferred method of identification we recommend that they e Engage ina full consultation process with students their parents or guardians staff and governors before implementing a biometric system e Offer an alternative identification mechanism such as cards or PIN for those wishing to opt out of using biometrics Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 106 Chapter 5 Circ
325. urce to someone else q uestions here Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 158 WV Chapter 10 Maintaining My Library mMm 3 Chapter 10 Maintaining My Library This chapter explains how to make changes to your existing resources and borrowers and how to update the resources in your catalogue using Discovery Online The Making Changes to Resources section tells you how to change details on your resource s records both individually and globally It also tells you how to deal with resources which have gone missing The Making Changes to Borrowers and Tutor Groups section tells you how to change details on your borrower s records and how to merge tutor groups together It will also tell you what you need to do to move your borrowers up to their new groups ready for the new term Making Changes To Resources How do edit an existing resource If you would like to change some details on a resource which has already been catalogued simply find the item in the Resources database and then either double click on it or click Edit the icon under the Records tab on the right of the screen If you have the resources barcode to hand you can type this into the Quick Search box select the Go To option and click Go Highlight the resource Click Egi to open up the resource record card Make the necessary changes and then click Save For more information on ways to search your catalogue see Chapter 15 Viewing
326. ure e oe fields only with no Extra fields aha chin a E details Z Publisher V Media Class V Publication D V Series V Price Click EF IC Tick this option to V Author Sedile update your entire V Update empty fields only i when you catalogue straight h D Force complete update are happy away using the F y 8 T Run Now with the options you ve specified settings Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 169 WW Chapter 10 Maintaining My Library mMm 3 How and when does my catalogue get updated Your catalogue records are updated using the Schedule Once you ve scheduled Discovery Online to run it will be added as a task to the Scheduler When the time comes for the Discovery online task to run resources in batches of 200 will be updated each night The schedule makes its selection by sorting all of the records in your database by the date they were last updated The scheduler will then update the records with the oldest Discovery Last Updated date with the most recent discovery images and summaries This ensures that your records are updated in a timely and orderly manner with the least disruption to your system To see the Discovery Last Updated date you ll need to create a new view in the Resources database and add the Discovery Last Updated field to it For details on how to create views see Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net section on Page Views
327. uthor Class URL HARRY POTTER AND THE HALF BLOOD PRINCE Rowling J K Fiction http to VETROVE IS p International cover art for Harry Potter http www teachervision fet h IQ hl IQ hted J cl ick W HARRY POTTER amp THE GOBLET OF FIRE Rowling J K Fiction http on Remove Link HARRY POTTER amp THE GOBLET OF FIRE Rowling J K Fiction http to remove the link Harry Potter lexicon http www hp lexicon org ir HARRY POTTER amp THE PHILOSOPHER S STONE Rowling J K 005 http between the two HARRY POTTER AND THE PRISONER OF AZKABAN Rowling J K Fiction http Items Harry Potter companion http www factmonster cor Harry Potter http www_storiesfromthg lt gt ALT O F Page 1 of 1 9 records Enter Your Linked Items Barcode aaa OQO CI Book of the Week To remove a resource link simply highlight the linked resource and click Remove Link What other information is stored on a resource record On each resource record card there are a number of different tabs The tabs you see depend on the type of resource record you are in You can click on each available tab to view the information stored Barcode 6 Title Detale Advanced Loans Reservations Summarny Notes Photograph Linked ltems Floor Plan Advanced The advanced tab holds extra information and settings which generally you will not need to access on a regular basis Resource Type allows you to change the type
328. utton to leave this area and save any changes made After choosing the desired interface from the list in the drop down box click on the Save button to close the window and save the changes that have been made Close the whole Librarian Only Management window and return to the Junior Librarian net home page Use the controls of the web browser to refresh the home page before expecting to see the interface switching taken into effect Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 51 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S Chapter 4 Creating My Library This chapter will explain how to add your resources and borrowers to the system We recommend that you add your resources first because this can take up the most time The section Cataloguing Resources starts off by explaining where you should put your sticky barcode labels accession numbers and the recommended order in which to add them to the system It then moves on to how you add a resource what to do if you make any mistakes and how to link resources together It also explains how to copy a resource s details and finally tells you what other information is held inside a resource record The Floor Plan section tells you how to create a floor plan and how to import it into Junior Librarian net It also tells you how to add the location of your resources to the floor plan and how to edit an existing plan The section Adding Borrowers explains how to add a new tutor group and then h
329. uture books of the week Future Books of the week shown here Use these arrows to order future books Close The book you have set as Current Book of the Week will expire after one week If there are no Future books of the week specified no Book of the Week will show In order to schedule Future books of the week follow the previous steps to add further books to the Future books of the week window Then once the current book has expired after one week the next book in the list will become Current Book of the Week Once that expires that will be deleted and the Junior Librarian net User Guide Version mo 178 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis next book will become the Current Book of the Week and so on You may order how they are chosen by highlighting the book and clicking on the s to the left of the window To view Book of the Week your students simply have to click on the newspaper icon on the beach towel displayed on the Home page Please note if you have only just created your Book of the Week the home page needs to be refreshed in order for the changes to take effect The front page will display the Book of the Week in the below format Take note of the summary and how it makes the article more substantial Hence the earlier suggestion of inputting your own summary if necessary Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 179 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis
330. vidual reminders are sent to your borrowers in the order that you ve specified in the Edit Reminders screen See section on How do edit the text in my reminders for more information he reminders liste be ow are snown i if Shows the order in respective ascending order i e the top reminder iA j first en the next one on the list and which the reminders will be f sent eer Edit lt eminger 2 J Reminder 3 Reminder 4 p Save Close The reminders will be sent according to their default output settings For example If you have specified that reminder 1 is to be sent to the borrower by email anyone who is due this reminder will receive it by email provided that a valid email address has been entered onto their enrolment record If no email address is present or if it is incorrect the reminder will automatically be sent to the email address which has been specified in the Settings Reminders screen If you have specified that reminder 2 is to be sent to guardian 1 and is to be printed a PDF reminder document will appear for you to then print and send to the guardian If you have printed a large amount of individual reminders i e for every student showing as overdue in Current Loans then the reminders will show as a single PDF document within the Output table Print this as described in section What happens if I have specified the Reminder to be printed This document will be ordered in terms of Tu
331. w a list of your books which have quizzes and also search for books which have for example specific book levels Please contact MLS on 0161 449 9357 to obtain the latest master quiz list Once you have the master quiz list follow the instructions below Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 271 WwW Chapter 19 Third Party Products m Is Make sure you are in the Resources screen Click on Tools and then Import from the menu bar at the top of the screen Click on Tools and then Import graphers Magnun Aad Keywords Book of the Week Simpsot Tempes Tempes Select Accelerated Reader Quiz List from the list of file types and then click Browse to browse to where your quiz list file is stored Click Import Select this file type Marc 21 Carel Press LinksPlus Accelerated Reader Quiz List Click Browse to select the location of the quiz list file Filename O Helpdesk Derno Data Acce Click Import to import Once you ve clicked on Import it will be added to the Schedule as a task e al This file has been scheduled for import to check it s status click View Tasks from the schedule menu Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 272 ww Chapter 19 Third Party Products m S For more information on the Schedule please see Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net section on Schedule Once the task has run click on More
332. w and enter the borrower PIN or place a pre registered finger on the touch pad if the IdentiKit system has been purchased The PIN might also be the borrower barcode number When successfully authorised the user s name will be displayed A list will be displayed of books previously borrowed Click on any one of these records before clicking on the Review this book button to be taken to the area to write a new review Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 17 Chapter 2 A General Overview of Junior Librarian net m S The user should write about the resource and make use of various formatting options such as different font styles colours and smilies to help explain the review Click on the Save button to keep changes to the review without finalising it Choosing this option will allow the user to come back and finish the review at another time Choose the Publish button to save and finish the review the user cannot return to make anymore changes to the review after publishing it Both options will send the review to the Reviews table in Management for the Librarian to acknowledge and approve it before it is actually published for all users of the library to see Details of acknowledging user reviews in Management can be found in Chapter 9 Reviews Reservations Firstly log into the system from the home page and conduct a search using any of the searching methods as described above Find a resource from the search results on
333. way that there is a drop down list of barcode lengths to choose from along with a tick box option to choose No Formatting Because the Generate Barcodes function allows you to generate both Resource and Borrower barcodes there is the option to select the length for each of these below The System Default school name enters the school name entered when registering the software The Custom School Name allows you to type your own custom school name in the box below Please note The school name will only be included if you tick Include School Name on the above screen Select the format by choosing from Resource these drop down lists Options 0 000 g No Formatting Borrower 000g No Formatting Click on Save to return back to the school name System Default Generate here Barcodes page Select preferred Custom School Name Custom School Name mr baa oo Save Close Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 251 Chapter 17 Label Print mis WW After clicking Save on the Options screen click Generate to generate your page of Borrower barcodes or Resource Barcodes Please Note In order to print Resource Barcodes you need to be on the In order to print Borrower Barcodes you need to be on the Click on the Print button to print these labels 03207 MANIRA 03212 BANEN 03217 T 03222 A 03227 Junior Librarian net User Guide MENAN 03203 TN 03208 EANNA 0321
334. which are listed in the Insert Field drop down list To change the field simply click on the text inside the box you want to change The box will become highlighted Click the drop down arrow next to the Insert Field tab and select the field you d like to appear in the box To add a field which hasn t already been used place your cursor where youd like it to appear on the page and then select the required field from the Insert Field drop down list To delete a field highlight it and then select Delete on your keyboard You can add your own text by placing your cursor anywhere on the page where you want the text to begin and then typing the required text If you have finished editing the reminder text and are happy with the grid click Save If you would like to change the grid see the next section If you wish to insert the current date before Click the arrow here to printing position the cursor where you want the select a new field to date to appear and then click Insert Date To appear in the reminder insert the time click Insert Time Use these options to cha nge the Description Reminder 1 format of the text Reminder Grid Options 7 To insert an image Insert Field Active Directory Linked Borrowers such as a school Source Fey 2 S Qe she Aix a a EANET logo click here and ja t5 aie z p jae 7 Ss eile He browse to where When you have Format Heading 3 Font
335. will be sent from The SMTP email address allows the librarian to send the emails from their own email address which then enables the borrowers to email a reply back This also means that they will get an email in the event of a reminder email being bounced back perhaps because the address Is incorrect Enter the email address of which General your reminders will SMTP Email Address noreply localhost be sent from The SMTP email address shown above is used to email reminders to your borrowers Change the page Should an email fail to be received for whatever reason orientation of the it will be returned to this email address i Also if you attempt to send reminders by email only and email reminder a borrower guardian does not have an email address in here the system the generated reminder will be emailed to this address instead Select how you would like to Sort your reminders here Select how you would like to Group Landscape Portrait your reminders here sToup reminders by Tutor group name v Sort reminders by v Click Save when you x have finished You can also change the page orientation of the email reminders here how you wish to group the reminders grouping by Tutor Group Name is handy when printing emailing group reminders and how you wish to Sort Reminders Click Save when you have finished Please see Chapter 7 Loans section How do I specify what format the reminder is sent
336. will need to download the information into StockCheck You should download after each scanning session From the main StockCheck screen click on the icon Download Follow the instructions on screen and then click OK CipherLad 8000 Oo On your CipherLab 8000 portable bar code reader e Ensure the aade is conmected to your pc s Ensure the reader is turned on Select option 2 Upload Data e Click OK to contnue Your data will then be downloaded into StockCheck Once the download is complete click OK If you have scanned any barcodes which haven t been recognised in your StockCheck you will be presented with a list Click Copy to Clipboard to enable you to paste the list into a document i e word Click OK to exit this screen Download Report There were errors with some barcodes from the download All other barcodes have been Lists the processed into the stock check barcodes it was Barcode not found 20906 unable to find in Barcode not found 20905 Barcode not found 20907 your Barcode not found 20908 StockCheck Click Copy to Clipboard to enable you to paste the results into a document Click OK to exit this screen Copy to Clipboard Fan seneneneneeeeeeeennneeneneneeen Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 267 Chapter 18 StockCheck mis How do edit a previously started StockCheck From the menu bar at the top of the screen in Management click
337. y is not a valid entry for a forename The gender field must begin with M or F so M F Male and Female are all valid entries The Grown UpsSystem ID is a unique number from which you can identify a pupil on your school administration system If you have entered borrowers on your system already ensure that their names are spelt correctly The program tries to intelligently match to see if the people you are importing exist on the system already Once you have created the CSV file copy it to a floppy disk or pen drive memory stick under the name of students csv Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 91 Chapter 4 Creating My Library m S How do import my student file into Junior Librarian net Once you ve created the CSV file which contains all of your new and existing borrowers you ll then need to import this into Junior Librarian net Before you do this you ll need to manually move your leavers to the Recycle Bin There are two ways of doing this You can go into each Tutor Group record click on Move To tick Leavers and then click Save If you have a lot of groups which you need to mark as Leavers this method is too time consuming Instead if you do a search in Tutor Groups for the groups you want to mark as Leavers for example Year 11 s Once all of your Year 11 s are listed highlight one record and then click Remove under the Records tab on the right of the screen An option to remove Selected Records or
338. y Data mMm is Tip If you are doing a single word search and don t want to find other words which include your searched word e g searching for plane and its returning planets you can put quotes and Spaces around the word e g plane Example search without quotes lf you want to find all resources where the words Planet and Earth appear but not necessarily together type in Quick Search Planet Earth and then click Go In the screenshot below the search has brought up 10 resources where the words Planet and Earth appear together and separately ian 124 l Spx p E ea a Type Planet Ne 091 Os s 2 ea Earth here and h 72 wil f Ear t renne l z Far Ean usd Kno A Q copy then click Go 190 Me Pis gt cot 3 gt 1427 Co i P Epai 2 272 Baltw Praree j fi ae rangi 4 Tonte ga Quise SIA oeoa Laba Are 5 Od ine Minus Using the minus symbol in front of a word enables you to exclude that word from the search results Example search using minus If you want to find all of your Non Fiction History books type in the Quick Search box History Fiction and then click Go When the search is performed see screenshot below it will bring up all resources which have the word History in them but will ignore all resources where the word Fiction appears in any of the default search fields gt 6140 Septerde r ET
339. y highlight the field in the Visible Fields tab and then choose the settings you want under Column Settings Type a new name Ba for the column field here Description DVD s Category General v Layout Record Selection Appearance Select the fields Change where the you d like to see in Available Fields Visible Fields Column Settings SResouces A A C columns appear on at ae i O arist hss the page here ignlignting them E author 2 Author i Title from the Available HE Author 3 IMedia Fields list and then E Author 4 s Format Change the colour of using the arrows to i Averege Reading Icon Size the column here h O Barcode move them across L E Book Levei to appear in the E Book of the Week Visible Fields EPER v Change the format of gt the column here e g Text section A preview of a 612 Macmillan P What S Happening To Me Paperback the view shows r ee pena here Use these arrows to 612 Mayle P Where Did Come From Paperback g change the location amp How To Go And Fly A Kite of the fields Eq Refresh Preview Save Close Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 188 Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net mis Record Selection is where you set the default search parameters What this means is that if you set the default search to New Resource Type Equal To DVD the system will carry out that s
340. yone belongs to it s possible to change the restriction group for individual borrowers An example for wanting to do this could be that you want to increase the loan period and allowance for some borrowers who are involved in a special school project First make sure you have created a restriction group that you want these borrowers to belong to see How do I create my own restriction groups earlier in this chapter Go into the Borrowers database by clicking on the icon from the left of the screen x Borrowers Find and highlight the borrower from the list or use Quick Search to type in their barcode PIN or Surname Once the borrower is highlighted either double click your mouse or click lt Edt to open up the borrower record card Click on the Advanced tab at the top of the screen Under the Restrictions section click the drop down arrow and select the restriction group that you want the borrower to have and then click Save Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 123 o Chapter 6 Restrictions m l S Repeat this for each borrower that you want to change the restriction group for p s Detais Advanced Cunert Loans Slaemerni Reservations Past Loans Security Custom Fields Select the restriction Click Save when you group from the list have finished 9000 See ese How do I globally set resource restrictions Its possible for you to specify restrictions on your resources as well as h
341. ystem allows you to choose which fields you want to update if any To access the Discovery Online settings select Schedule and then Discovery from the menu bar at the top of the screen Management Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Micro Librarian Syster Schedule Modules Tools Security Sete Database Click Schedule and then Discovery Class Author Title Discovery Directory Services GI L MA i D ife ont 574 GILMAN D WILDL Borrowers A Ar gt 1748 574 CARTER G WILOLI Tutor Groups 4750 574 WATERS J WILDLI Junior Librarian net User Guide Version 11 4 168 Ww mis Chapter 10 Maintaining My Library The Discovery Online settings screen will then appear where you can select which fields you d like to update When you have entered your settings click Schedule This will add a task to the Schedule See Chapter 11 Customising Junior Librarian net section on Schedule for more information Click each field which you d like to be updated by Discovery Ja Options Use this facility to update your books with bibliographic inf 6n held on the Discovery Online database i Updates take place in the background so just g your options and click Schedule Tick Update ere p i l V Meet The Author Windows only to only IC IS Option to i a p i pman s update fields rentir v i j ne e yo

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Energy Sistem Sport Cam Extreme  Paquete para rastrear alambres  Horizon Fitness RC-40 User's Manual  quand la bande dessinée devient dessin animé : « persepolis  Samsung HT-TX35 manual de utilizador  Whirlpool MH6140XF User's Manual  le polymere  Bijsluiter voor het publiek 14/07/06 BENAMINGEN  Detoxificación, test  Manuel d`instructions et livret des pièces détachées Verti  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file